巴利语辭典

诸大德合编

Massu: {'def': '[Vedic śmaśru] the beard D.II,42; Pug.55; J.IV,159. --parūḷha° with long-grown beard DA.I,263; bahala° thick-bearded J.V,42.

--kamma beard-dressing J.III,114; DhA.I,253. --karaṇa shaving DhA.I,253; DA.I,137. --kutti [m.+ *kḷpti] beard-trimming J.III,314 (C.=°kiriyā). (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】胡须。 ~ka, 【形】有胡须的。 ~kamma, ~karaṇa, 【中】修剪胡须。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】胡须。massuka,【形】有胡须的。massukamma, massukaraṇa,【中】修剪胡须。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Massuka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. massu] bearded; a° beardless (of a woman) J.II,185. (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Masāragalla: {'def': '【中】一种宝石(cat’s eye猫眼石〔常磨成圆形，从内部发出蛋白色光的宝石“金绿宝石或玉髓”〕)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】一种宝石（猫眼石〔常磨成圆形，从内部发出蛋白色光的宝石“金绿宝石或玉髓”〕）。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. masāra emerald+galva crystal & musāragalva] a precious stone, cat’s eye; also called kabara-maṇi (e. g. VvA.304). It occurs in stereotyped enumⁿ of gems at Vin.II,238 (where it is said to be found in the Ocean)=Miln.267; and at Miln.118, where it always stands next to lohitaṅka. The same combⁿ (with lohit.) is found at Vv 36³; 78³=81³; 84¹⁵. Masi. [cp. Class. Sk. maṣi & masi] 1. the fine particles of ashes, in aṅgara° charcoal-dust VvA.67=DhA.III,309; (agginā) masiṁ karoti to reduce to powder (by fire), to burn to ashes, turn to dust S.II,88=IV.197=A.I,204= II.199. -- 2. soot J.I,483 (ukkhali° soot on a pot). (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Masāraka: {'def': '[fr. masāra?] a kind of couch (mañca) or longchair; enum^d under the 4 kinds of mañcā at Vin.IV,40. -- See also Vin.II,149; IV,357 (where expl^d as: mañcapāde vijjhitvā tattha aṭṭaniyo pavesetvā kato: made by boring a hole into the feet of the bed & putting through a notched end); VvA.8, 9. (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Masāṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [etym.? prob. provincial & local] a coarse cloth of interwoven hemp and other materials D.I,166; M.I,308, 345; A.I,241, 295; Pug.55. At all passages as a dress worn by certain ascetics. (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Masūraka: {'def': '[connected with masāraka] a bolster J.IV,87; VI,185. (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mata: {'def': '2, (marati 的【过分】), 已死。matakicca,【中】办丧仪式。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [pp. of marati, mṛ] dead M.I,88 (ekāha° dead one day); III,159 (matam eyya would go to die); Sn.200, 440; J.V,480. Neg. amata see separate article. -- Note. mata at PvA.110 is to be corrected into cuta.

--kicca duty towards the dead, rites for the dead PvA.274. (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(maññati 的【过分】), 已知道，已明白。【中】观点。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(marati 的【过分】), 已死。 ~kicca, 【中】办丧仪式。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1, (maññati 的【过分】), 已知道，已明白。【中】观点。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of maññati] thought, understood, considered (as=--°), only late in use Vbh.2 (hīna° paṇīta°, doubtful reading); Sdhp.55; Mhvs 25, 55 (tassā matena according to her opinion); 25, 110 (pasu-samā matā, pl. considered like beasts). Cp. sam°. -- Note. Does mata-sāyika at Th.1, 501 (=Miln.367) belong under this mata? Then mata would have to be taken as nt. meaning “thought, thinking,” but the phrase is not without objection both semantically & syntactically. Mrs. Rh. D. (Brethren, p. 240) trsl^s “nesting-place of thought.” (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mataka: {'def': '【阳】死者。 ~bhatta, 【中】拜死人的食物。 ~vattha, 【中】拜死人的布料。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】死者。matakabhatta,【中】拜死人的食物。matakavattha,【中】拜死人的布料。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. mata²] dead, one who is dead DhA.II,274.

--ākāra condition of one who is dead J.I,164 (°ṁ dassati pretends to be dead). --bhatta a meal for the dead, food offered to the manes J.IV,151; DhA.I,326 (=petakicca p. 328); III,25. (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mathana: {'def': '【中】搅乳，骚动。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj. nt.) [fr. math] shaking up, crushing, harassing, confusing Miln.21 (+maddana); DhA.I,312; PvA.265. (Page 518)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】搅乳，骚动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mathati: {'def': '(math+a), 摇动，搅拌，扰乱。【过】mathi。【过分】mathita。【独】mathitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic math, manth to twirl, shake about, stir etc.; cp. Lat. mamphur part of the lathe=Ger. mandel (“mangle”), E. mandrel; Lith. mentùris churning stick, Gr. mόqos tumult mόqoura shaft of rudder. ‹-› The Dhtp (126) gives both roots (math & manth) and expl^s by “viḷolana,” as does Dhtm (183) by “viḷoṭana”] to churn, to shake, disturb, upset. Only in Caus. matheti to agitate, crush, harass, upset (cittaṁ) S.IV,210; Sn.50 (=tāseti hāpeti Nd² 492); Pv IV.7¹ (kammānaṁ vipāko mathaye manaṁ; C 264: abhibhaveyya); Miln.385 (vāyu pādape mathayati; . . . kilesā mathayitabbā). -- pp. mathita. See also abhimatthati (sic) & nimmatheti. (Page 518)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(math + a), 摇动，搅拌，扰乱。【过】 mathi。【过分】 mathita。【独】 mathitvā。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mathita: {'def': '[pp. of matheti] 1. (churned) buttermilk Vin.II,301 (amathita-kappa). -- 2. upset, mentally unbalanced state, disturbance of mind through passion, conceit, etc. M.I,486 (maññita+). Neumann trsl^s “Vermutung” i. e. speculation, guessing (v. l. matth°). (Page 518)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mati: {'def': '(‹man),【阴】智慧，主意，意思。matimantu,【形】明智的。mativippahīna,【形】愚蠢的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic mati, fr. man: cp. Av. maitiš, Lat. mens, mentem (cp. E. mental); Goth. ga-munds, gaminpi, Ohg. gi-munt, E. mind] mind, opinion, thought; thinking of, hankering after, love or wish for Vin.III,138 (purisa° thought of a man); Mhvs 3, 42 (padīpa lamp of knowledge); 15, 214 (amala° pure-minded); PvA.151 (kāma+). --su° (adj.) wise, clever Mhvs 15, 214; opp. du° (adj.) foolish J.III,83 (=duppañña C.); Pv.I,8² (=nippañña PvA.40); Sdhp.292. (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】智能，主意。 ~mantu, 【形】明智的。 ~vippahīna, 【形】愚蠢的。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Matikata: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. matī-kṛta, fr. matya, nt., harrow =Lat. mateola, Ohg. medela plough] in su° wellharrowed (field) A.I,229, 239 (khetta). (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Matimant: {'def': '(adj.) [mati+mant] sensible, intelligent, wise, metri causâ as matīmā (fr. matimanto, pl.) at Sn.881 (=matimā paṇḍitā Nd¹ 289). (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Matta: {'def': '(Mattaka), (在【合】中) 有…的大小，…那样多的。 ~ññū, 【形】知道限量的，适度的。 ~ññutā, 【阴】适度。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2 (madati‘自负’的【过分】),，已为…骄傲，已自负(intoxicated (with), full of joy about (-matta), proud of, conceited)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】尺寸，量，适度，大小。mattasukha,【中】有限制的快乐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (-°) (adj.) [i. e. mattā used as adj.] “by measure,” measured, as far as the measure goes, i. e. -- (1) consisting of, measuring (with numerals or similar expressions): appamatto kali Sn.659; pañcamattā sata 500 DA.I,35; saṭṭhimatte saṭṭhimatte katvā SnA 510; māsamattaṁ PvA.55; ekādasa° ib. 20; dvādasa° 42; satta° 47; tiṁsamattehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṁ 53. -- (2) (negative) as much as, i. e. only, a mere, even as little as, the mere fact (of), not even (one), not any: aṇumattena pi puññena Sn.431; kaṭacchumattaṁ (not) even a spoonful Miln.8; ekapaṇṇa° PvA.115; citta °ṁ pi (not) even as much as one thought ib. 3; nāma° a mere name Miln.25; phandana °ṁ not even one throb J.VI,7; phandita° the mere fact of . . . M.II,24, bindu° only one drop PvA.100; rodita° M.II,24. -- (3) (positive) as much as, so much, some, enough (of); vibhava° riches enough J.V,40; kā pi assāsa-mattā laddhā found some relief? PvA.104 (may be=mattā f.). -- (4) like, just as what is called, one may say (often untranslateable): sita°-kāraṇā just because he smiled VvA.68; bhesajja-mattā pītā I have taken medicine D.I,205 (=mattā f.?) okāsa --°ṁ (nt.) permission Sn.p, 94; putta° like children A.II,124; maraṇa° (almost) dead M.I,86; attano nattumatte vandanto Dha IV.178. f. mattī (=mattin?) see mātu°. -- (5) as adv. (usually in oblique cases): even at, as soon as, because of, often with other particles, like api, eva, pi, yeva: vuttamatte eva as soon as said DhA.I,330; cintitamatte at the mere thought DhA.I,326; naṁ jātamattaṁ yeva as soon as he was born PvA.195; anumodana-mattena because of being pleased PvA.121; upanītamattam eva as soon as it was bought PvA.192; nimujjana-matte yeva as soon as she ducked her head under PvA.47. --na mattena . . . eva not only . . . but even PvA.18 (n. m. nipphalā, attano dānaphalassa bhāgino eva honti). (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1﹐-matta﹐ (majjati‘醉’的【过分】), 已醉，已充满的欢喜，已沉浸，…的量，…的程度，仅仅…。mattahatthī,【阳】被置在凹槽隔离区的象。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】尺寸，量，适度，大小。 ~sukha, 【中】有限制的快乐。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Mattaka), (在【合】中) 有…的大小，…那样多的。mattaññū,【形】知道限量的，适度的。mattaññutā,【阴】适量。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(majjati 的【过分】), 已醉，已充满的欢喜，已为…骄傲，已自负。~hatthī, 【阳】被置在凹槽隔离区的象。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [pp. of madati] intoxicated (with), full of joy about (-°), proud of, conceited Sn.889 (mānena m.); J.IV,4 (vedanā°, full of pain, perhaps better with v. l. °patta for °matta); VvA.158 (hatthi matto elephant in rut); DhA.IV,24 (id.); PvA.47 (surā°), 86 (māna-mada°), 280 (bhoga-mada°).

--kāsinī see matthak’āsinī. (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mattaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. matta¹] 1. of the size of Sdhp.238 (pāṇi°). -- 2. only as much as, mere D.I,12 (appa°, ora°, sīla°); J.IV,228 (mana°); DhA.IV,178 (pitumattakaṁ gahetvā). (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mattatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. matta] (the fact of) consisting of, or being only . . . PvA.199 (maṁsa-pesi°). (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Matteyya: {'def': '【形】尊敬母亲的。matteyyatā,【阴】对母亲的孝顺。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& metteyya) (adj.) [fr. mātā, *mātreyya› *matteyya] reverential towards one’s mother, motherloving D.III,74; Pv.II,7¹⁸ (=mātu hita PvA.104; v. l. mett°). Spelling at D.III,72 is metteyya. It is difficult to decide about correct spelling, as metteyya is no doubt influenced by the foll. petteyya, with which it is always combined. (Page 518)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】尊敬母亲的。 ~tā, 【阴】对母亲的孝顺。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Matteyyatā: {'def': '(& mett°) (f.) [abstr. fr. matteyya] filial love towards one’s mother; always comb^d with petteyyatā D.III,145 (v. l. mett°); Nd² 294 (mett°), Dh.332; DhA.IV,33. (Page 518)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mattha: {'def': '[cp. Vedic masta(ka) skull, head, Vedic mastiṣka brains; perhaps to Lat. mentum chin, Cymr. mant jawbone; indirectly also to Lat. mons mountain] the head, etc. Only in cpd. mattha-luṅga [cp. Sk. mastulunga] the brain Vin.I,274; Sn.199; Kh III,; J.I,493; KhA 60; Vism.260 (in detail) 264, 359; VbhA.63, 243, 249; DhA.II,68; PvA.78, 80. -- See also matthaka. (Page 518)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Matthaka: {'def': '[cp. mattha] the head, fig. top, summit J.III,206 =IV.4; IV,173, 457; V,478; DA.I,226 (pabbata°); Pv IV.16³; DhA.I,184. matthaka-matthakena (from end to end) J I,202; III,304. Loc. matthake as adv. (1) at the head DhA.I,109; (2) at the distance of (-°) DhA.I,367; (3) on top of (-°) J.V,163 (vammīka°); Mhvs 23, 80 (sīsa°); Yugandhara° Miln.6; DhA.II,3 (uddhana°).

--āsin sitting on top (of the mountain) J.VI,497 (=pabbata-matthake nisinna C.; gloss matta-kāsin i. e. wildly in love, expl^d by kāma-mada-matta). The reading is not clear. --tela oil for the head KhA 64 (=muddhani tela Vism.262). (Page 518)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】头，顶端，顶点。【处】在…之上，在…的距离。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】头，顶端，顶点。【处】在…之上，在…的距离。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Matthaluṅga: {'def': '【中】脑。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】脑。Sn.v.199.︰Athassa susiraṁ sīsaṁ, matthaluṅgassa pūritaṁ;%9Subhato naṁ maññati, bālo avijjāya purakkhato.(头颅中的窟窿，装满脑髓，愚者出於无知，才认为它是好东西。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Matthu: {'def': '【中】从凝乳分开出来的清水。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】从凝乳分开出来的清水。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Matti: {'def': '(-sambhava) [for *māti°=mātu°=*mātṛ, after pitti°=pitu°=*pitṛ] born (from a mother) Sn.620 (=mātari sambhūta SnA 466)=Dh.396 (=mātu santike udarasmiṁ sambhūta DhA.IV,158). (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mattigha: {'def': '【阳】弑母。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】弑母。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mattika: {'def': '(adj.) (°-) [fr. mattikā] made of clay, clay-; only in cpds.:

--kuṇḍala clay earring S.I,79 (v. l. mattikā°). --bhājana clay or earthenware vessel Sn.577; Vism.231 (in comparison); DhA.I,130. --vāka clay fibre DhsA.321 (v. l. °takka, perhaps gloss=takku spindle, see takka¹). (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mattikā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic mṛttikā, der. fr. Vedic mṛt (mṛd) soil, earth, clay; with P. maṇḍa, Sk, vimradati. Gr. bladarόs soft, Osil. mylsna dust, Goth. mulda, Ags. molde (E. mould, mole=mouldwarp), to same root mṛd as in Sk. mṛdu=Lat. mollis soft, Gr. a]maldu/nw to weaken, Sk. mardati & mṛdnāti to crush, powder, Caus. mardayati; also in cognate °mḷd as appearing in Gr. mέldw to melt=Ags meltan, Ohg. smëlzan] 1. clay J.VI,372; Mhvs 29, 5 sq. --tamba° red clay DhA.IV,106; PvA.191. mattikā pl. kinds of clay (used in cosmetics, like Fuller’s earth) J.V,89 (nānā-cunṇāni+ mattikā; see also cuṇṇa). -- 2. loam, mud M.III,94 (alla° fresh loam or mud); Vism.123 (aruṇa-vaṇṇā); KhA 59 (paṇḍu); VvA.65; PvA.216 (aruṇa-vaṇṇā).

--thāla bowl of clay DhA.IV,67. --piṇḍa a lump of clay or loam DA.I,289; same trope at PvA.175. (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】泥土，土壤。mattikāpiṇḍa,【阳】一块泥土。mattikābhājana,【中】陶器(容器)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】泥土，土壤。 ~piṇḍa, 【阳】一块泥土。 ~bhājana, 【中】陶器（容器）。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mattā: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic mātrā, of mā] measure, quantity, right measure, moderation Sn.971 (mattaṁ so jaññā); Dh.I,35 (mattā ti pamāṇaṁ vuccati). -- Abl. mattaso in °kārin doing in moderation, doing moderately Pug.37 (=pamānena padesa-mattam eva karontī ti). -- In cpds. shortened to matta°.

--aṭṭhiya (mattaṭṭhiya=°atthika) desirous of moderation, moderate Th.1, 922. --ññu knowing the right measure, moderate, temperate (bhojane or bhojanamhi in eating) A.II,40; Sn.338; Pug.25; Dh.8. Cp. jāgariyā. --ññutā moderation (in eating) D.III,213; Nd¹ 483; Dh.185; Pug.25; Vbh.249, 360; Dhs.1348; DhA.II,238. --sukha (metri causâ: mattā-sukha) measured happiness, i. e. small happiness Dh.290 (cp. DhA.III,449). (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maya: {'def': '(adj.) (--° only) [Vedic maya] made of, consisting of. -- An interesting analysis (interesting for judging the views and sense of etymology of an ancient commentator) of maya is given by Dhammapāla at VvA.10, where he distinguishes 6 meanings of the word, viz. 1. asma-d-atthe, i. e. “myself” (as representing mayaṁ!). -- 2. paññatti “regulation” (same as 1. according to example given, but constructed syntectically quite diff. by Dhp.). -- 3. nibbatti “origin” (arising from, with example mano-maya “produced by mind”). -- 4. manomaya “spiritually” (same as 3). -- 5. vikār’atthe “alteration” (? more like product, consistency, substance), with example “sabbe-maṭṭikāmaya-kuṭikā.” -- 6. pada-pūraṇa matte to make up a foot of the verse (or add a syllable for the sake of completeness, with example “dānamaya, sīlamaya” (=dana; sīla). -- 1. made of: aṭṭhi° of bone Vin.II,115; ayo° of iron Sn.669; Pv.I,10⁴; J.IV,492; udum- bara° of Ud. wood Mhvs 23, 87; dāru° of wood, VvA.8; loha° of copper Sn.670; veḷuriya° of jewels Vv 2¹. -- 2. consisting in: dāna° giving alms PvA.8, 9; dussa° clothes Vv 46⁷; dhamma° righteousness S.I,137. -- 3. (more as apposition, in the sense as given by Dhp. above under 6) something like, a likeness of, i. e. ingredient, substance, stuff; in āhāra° food-stuff, food J.III,523; utu° something like a (change in) season Vism.395; sīla° character, having sīla as substance (or simply-consisting of) It.51 (dāna°, sīla°, bhāvanā°). (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mayaŋ: {'def': '(amha 的【主、复】), 我们。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mayaṁ: {'def': '(amha 的【主.复】), 我们。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[1^st pl. of ahaṁ, for vayaṁ after mayā etc. See ahaṁ] we Vin.II,270; Sn.31, 91, 167; Dh.6; KhA 210. (Page 524)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mayūkha: {'def': '【阳】光线。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic mayūkha in diff. meaning, viz. a peg for fastening a weft etc., Zimmer Altind. Leben 254] a ray of light Abhp. 64; Dhp. A 426 (old citation, unverified). (Page 524)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】光线(a ray of light)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mayūra: {'def': '(Vedic mayūra),【阳】孔雀(peacock)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】孔雀。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic mayūra] a peacock D.III,201; S.II,279; Th.1, 1113; J.II,144, 150 (°gīva)=DhA.I,144; J.IV,211 (°nacca); V,304; VI,172, 272, 483; Vv 11¹, 35⁸ (=sikhaṇḍin VvA.163); VvA.27 (°gīva-vaṇṇa); Sdhp.92. ‹-› The form mayūra occurs nearly always in the Gāthās and is the older form of the two m. and mora. The latter contracted form is found in Prose only and is often used to explain the old form, e, g. at VvA.57. See also mora. (Page 524)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mañca: {'def': '【阳】床(台语：眠床bin5chng5)、椅。mañcaka,【阳】小床、小椅。mañcaparāyaṇa,【形】被限制在床上的。mañcapīṭha,【中】床和椅，家具。mañcavāna,【中】床帐。《南海寄归内法传》卷第一：「床量长佛八指，以三倍之长，中人二十四指。当笏尺尺半，东夏诸寺床高二尺已上，此则元不合坐。」(T54.206.3 ~ p.207.1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. mañca stand, scaffolding, platform] a couch, bed Vin.IV,39, 40 (where 4 kinds are mentioned, which also apply to the defⁿ of pīṭha, viz. masāraka, bundikābaddha, kuḷīra-pādaka, āhacca-pādaka; same defⁿ at VbhA.365); Sn.401; J.III,423; DhA.I,89 (°ṁ bandhati to tie a bed or two together), 130; IV,16; VbhA.20; VvA.291; PvA.93. -- heṭṭhā mañce underneath the bed J.I,197 (as place where domestic pigs lie); II,419 (id.); II,275 (where a love-sick youth lies down in the park).

--atimañca bed upon bed, i. e. beds placed on top of each other serving as grand stands at a fair or festival J.III,456; VI,277; DhA.IV,59. --parāyaṇa ending in bed, kept in bed Pv.II,2⁵ (nīla°, fig. for being buried); DhA.I,183 (with v. l. maccu°, just as likely, but see maccuparāyaṇa). --pīṭha couch and chair Vin.II,270 sq.; A.III,51; VvA.9, 220, 295. --vāna stuffing of a couch DhA.I,234. (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】床。 ~ka, 【阳】小床。 ~parāyaṇa, 【形】被限制在床上的。~pīṭha, 【中】床和椅，家具。 ~vāna, 【中】床帐。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mañcaka: {'def': '[fr. mañca] bed, couch, bedstead Vin.I,271; S.I,121=III,123; J.I,91; III,423; Th.2, 115; Miln.10; DhA.II,53. (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mañjari: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. mañjarī] a branching flower-stalk, a sprout J.V,400, 416. (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mañjarikā: {'def': '(f.)=mañjari, Vin.III,180. (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mañjarita: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. mañjari] with (full-grown) pedicles, i. e. in open flower Miln.308 (°patta in full bloom). (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mañjarī: {'def': '【阴】串，群。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】串，群。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mañjeṭṭha: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. *Sk. mañjiṣṭhā Indian madder] light (bright) red, crimson, usually enum^d in set of 5 principal colours with nīla, pīta, lohitaka, odāta; e. g. at Vin.I,25; S.II,101 (f. mañjeṭṭhā); Vv 22¹ (Hardy in T. reads mañjaṭṭha, as twice at VvA.111, with vv. ll. °jiṭṭha & °jeṭṭha, cp. Corrections & Add^ns on p. 372); Miln.61. (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mañjeṭṭhaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. mañjeṭṭha, after lohita+ka] crimson, bright red, fig. shining Vv 39¹ (cp. defⁿ at VvA.177: like the tree Vitex negundo, sindhavāra, or the colour of the Kaṇavīra-bud; same defⁿ at DhsA.317, with Sinduvāra for Sindha°); usually in sequence nīla, pīta, mañjeṭṭhaka, lohitaka, odāta as the 5 fundamental colours: M.I,509 (has °eṭṭhika in T. but v. l. °eṭṭhaka); J.VI,185; Dhs.617. -- f. mañjeṭṭhikā a disease of sugar cane Vin.II,256. (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mañjeṭṭhī: {'def': '【阴】孟加拉茜草(Bengal madder﹐亚洲西南部的多年生〔茜草属〕 (Rubia tinctorum) 植物开有小黄花，生有卷状叶和红根)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】孟加拉茜草（亚洲西南部的多年生〔茜草属〕(Rubia tinctorum) 植物开有小黄花，生有卷状叶和红根）。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [=Sk. mañjiṣṭhā] Bengal madder DA.I,85. (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mañjiṭṭha: {'def': 'mañjeṭṭha, 【形】深红色的。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'mañjeṭṭha(cp. *Sk. mañjisṭhā Indian madder),【形】淡红色的，橙色的(crimson)。(light (bright) red, crimson), usually enumd in set of 5 principal colours with nīla, pīta, lohitaka, odāta; e. g. at Vin I.25; S II.101 (f. mañjeṭṭhā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mañjiṭṭhā: {'def': '【阴】紫檀(red sandal tree﹐印度和东印度群岛的一种乔木 (Pterocarpus indicus)，种子被当作珠宝商的重量使用)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】紫檀（印度和东印度群岛的一种乔木(Pterocarpus indicus)，种子被当作珠宝商的重量使用）。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mañju: {'def': '【形】迷人的，可爱的。 ~bhāṇaka, ~ssara, 【形】悦耳的声音，说得亲切的。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】迷人的，可爱的。mañjubhāṇaka, mañjussara,【形】悦耳的声音，说得亲切的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Class Sk. mañju, also maṅgala, cp. Gr. mάgganon means of deceiving, Lat. mango a dealer making up his wares for sale. See further cognates at Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. mango] pleasant, charming, sweet, lovely (only with ref. to the voice) D.II,211, 227 (one of the 8 characteristics of Brahmā’s & the Buddha’s voice: see bindu & aṭṭhaṅga); J.II,150. -- (nt.) a sweet note J.VI,591 (of the deer in the forest); VvA.219 (karavīka ruta°).

--bhāṇaka sweet-voiced, speaking sweetly J.II,150= DhA.I,144; f. bhāṇikā J.VI,418, 420. --bhāṇin id. J.II,150. (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mañjuka: {'def': '(adj.) [mañju+ka] sweet voiced Vin.I,249; J.II,350; III,266; VI,412, 496. (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mañjīra: {'def': '[cp. late Sk. mañjīra nt.] an anklet, foot-bangle Abhp 228. (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mañjūsaka: {'def': '【阳】天树(celestial tree)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】天树。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(-rukkha) [fr. mañjūsa] N. of a celestial tree, famed for its fragrancy Vv 38⁶; SnA 52, 66, 95, 98; VvA.175. (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mañjūsā: {'def': '【阴】首饰盒，盒子。Sṭ54.1~20./II,519.︰Kilesacorehi anabhibhavanīyattā jhānaṁ “cittamañjūsan”ti vuttaṁ.(由烦恼贼所无法征服的‘禅那’，所以説‘心的箱函’(cittamañjūsaṁ))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. mañjūṣā] a casket; used for keeping important documents in J.II,36 (suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṁ mañjūsāya nikkhipāpesi); IV,335 (suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṁ sāra-mañjūsāyaṁ ṭhapetvā kālam akāsi). (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】首饰盒，盒子。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Maññanā: {'def': '【阴】maññita,【中】想像，幻影。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. man] conceit Nd¹ 124 (taṇhā°, diṭṭhi°, māna°, kilesa° etc.); Dhs.1116 1233; Nett 24; Vism.265 (for mañcanā?). (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】 Maññita, 【中】想像，幻影。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Maññati: {'def': '(man + ya), 想像，评价，认为。【过】 maññī 。【过分】 maññita。【现分】 maññamāna。【独】 maññitvā。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(man 思+ya), 想像(to imagine)，评价(to be of opinion)，认为(to deem)。【过】maññī 。【过分】maññita(《中阿含经》译：自举)。【现分】maññamāna。【独】maññitvā。kiṁ maññasi﹐你认为如何？', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[man, Vedic manyate & manute, Av. mainyeite; Idg. *men, cp. Gr. mέnos mood, anger=Sk. manah mind; mέmona to think of, wish to, Lat. memini to think of, mens›mind, meneo; Goth. munan to think, muns opinion; Oisl. man, Ags. mon; Ohg. minna love, Ags, myne intention. Dhtp 427: man=ñāṇe, 524= bodhane] 1. to think, to be of opinion, to imagine, to deem Sn.199 (sīsaṁ . . . subhato naṁ maññati bālo), 588 (yena yena hi maññanti, tato taṁ hoti aññathā); J.II,258 (maññāmi ciraṁ carissati: I imagine he will have to wander a long time). -- With (double) Acc.: to take for, to consider as; na taṁ maññāmi mānusiṁ I deem you are not human Pv.II,4¹; yassa dāni kālaṁ maññati for this now may he think it time (in a phrase of departure), let him do what he thinks fit, we wait the Buddha’s pleasure, i. e. let it be time to go [so also BSk. manyate kālaṁ, e. g. Divy 50, 64 etc.] D.I,189. ‹-› Esp. in phrase taṁ kiṁ maññasi (maññatha 2. pl.) what do you think of this? (the foll.), what is your opinion about this? D.I,60; S.III,104 & passim. -- Pot. 1^st sg. maññeyyaṁ I should think PvA.40; 3^rd sg. maññeyya S.III,103, and maññe Sn.206. The short form 1^st sg. maññe is used like an adv. as affirmative particle & is inserted without influencing the grammatical or syntactical construction of the sentence; meaning: methinks, for certain, surely, indeed, I guess, presumably. E. g. D.I,137 (patapati m. paccatthike yasasā); S.I,181 (m. ‘haṁ); IV,289 (paveliyamānena m. kāyena); J.II,275; Miln.21; Vism.90, 92 (mato me m. putto); DhA.I,107; II,51; PvA.40 (m. goṇo samuṭṭhahe), 65 (tasmā m. sumuttā). --na maññe surely not DhA.II,84; PvA.75 (n. m. puññavā rājā). -- 2. to know, to be convinced, to be sure Sn.840 (=jānāti Nd¹ 192), 1049, 1142; Nd² 491 (=jānāti); DhA.I,29 (maññāmi tuvaṁ marissasi). -- 3. to imagine, to be proud (of), to be conceited, to boast Sn.382 (ppr. maññamāna), 806, 813, 855 (maññate); J.III,530 (aor. maññi’haṁ, perhaps maññe ‘haṁ? C. expl^ns by maññāmi). -- pp. mata. -- Note. Another Present form is munāti (q. v.), of which the pp. is muta. (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maññe: {'def': '【无】我想，我想像。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】我想，我想像(methink)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Maññita: {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of maññati] illusion, imagination M.I,486. Nine maññitāni (the same list is applied to the phanditāni, the papañcitāni & saṅkhatāni) at Vbh.390: asmi, ayam aham asmi, bhavissaṁ, na bhavissaṁ, rūpī bhavissaṁ, arūpī bh., saññī bh., asaññī bh., nevasaññī-nâsaññī-bh. (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maññitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. maññita] self-conceit, pride Dhs.1116; DhsA.372. (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maŋsa: {'def': '【中】肉。 ~pesi。【阴】肉片。 ~puñja, 【阳】肉堆。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Maḷorikā: {'def': '(f.) [prob. dialectical for māḷaka: cp. mallaka] a stand, (tripod) for a bowl, formed of sticks Vin.II,124 (=daṇḍ’ādhāraka Bdhgh on p. 318). (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṁ: {'def': '﹐(ahaṁ我) 的【宾】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Maṁsa: {'def': '【中】肉。maṁsapesi。【阴】肉片，肉脔ㄌㄨㄢˊ。maṁsapuñja,【阳】肉堆。世尊禁止比丘吃十种肉：人(manussa)，象(hatthi)，马(assa)，狗(sunakha)，蛇(ahi)，狮(sīha)，虎(byaggha)，豹(dīpi)，熊(accha)，鬣狗(taraccha,土狼)(Vin.Mv.218~220)。世尊允许吃三净肉，第一、眼不见杀，第二、耳不闻杀，第三、不为己所杀。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic māṁsa, fr. Idg. *memsro-, as in Gr. mhrόs thigh, Lat. membrum limb (“member”); Goth. mims flesh; Oir mīr bite, bit (of flesh)] flesh, meat S.II,97 (putta°); Dh.152; J.III,184; Pug.55; Vism.258, 357 (in compar.); DhA.I,375 (putta°); II,51 (alla° living flesh); VbhA.58, 61 (pilotika-paliveṭhita). Described and defined in detail as one of the 32 ākāras or constituents of the human body at Vism.252, 354; KhA 46; VbhA.235.

--ûpasecana sauce for meat J.III,144=VI,24; DhA.I,344. --kalyāṇa beauty of flesh, one of the 5 beauties of a girl (see kalyāṇa) J.I,394; DhA.I,387. --khādaka flesh-eater J.VI,530. --cakkhu the bodily eye, one of the 5 kinds of the sense of sight (see cakkhu III) D.III,219; Nd¹ 100, 354. --dhovanī odaka water for washing meat KhA 54. --piṇḍika a meat-ball, lump of flesh Vism.256. --puñja a heap of flesh Vism.361 (in comp.); VbhA.67. --pesi a piece of flesh or meat (see on simile J.P.T.S. 1907, 122) Vin.II,25; III,105 (°ṁ vehāsaṁ gacchantiṁ addasaṁ); M.I,143; A.III,97; Miln.280; Vism.195, 252, 468; DhA.I,164; VbhA.235; --lohita flesh & blood Dh.150. (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṁsi: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. māṁsī] a certain plant Nardostychus jatamansi J.VI,535. (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṁsika: {'def': '[fr. maṁsa; cp. *Sk. māṁsika] 1. a dealer in meat, meat-seller Miln.331. -- 2. in piṭṭhi° the °ka belongs to the whole cpd., thus: one who is a backbiter, a slanderer Sn.244 (=piṭṭhi-maṁsa-khādaka SnA 287). Similarly piṭṭhi-maṁsikatā (q. v.) Nd² 39¹. (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṅgala: {'def': '【形】吉兆的，王室的，幸运的，厌祝的。【中】欢宴，好预兆，典礼，繁荣。 ~kicca, 【中】欢宴。 ~kolāhala, 【阳】有关吉兆的事物或行为的争论。 ~divasa, 【阳】节日，婚姻日。 ~assa, ~sindhava, 【阳】皇家马。 ~pokkharaṇī, 【阴】王室的浴池。 ~silāpaṭṭa, 【中】国王的坐板。 ~supina, 【中】好梦。 ~hatthī, 【阳】皇家象。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Vedic maṅgala. Expl^d by Dhtp 24 with root maṅg, i. e. lucky; see also mañju] auspicious, prosperous, lucky, festive Nd¹ 87, 88; KhA 118 sq.; SnA 273, 595; Sdhp.551. -- nt. maṅgalaṁ good omen, auspices, festivity Sn.258; Vin.II,129; PvA.17. A curious popular etymology is put forth by Bdhgh at KhA 123, viz. “maṁ galanti imehi sattā ti” maṅgalāni. -- maṅgalaṁ karoti lit. to make an auspicious ceremony, i. e. to besprinkle with grains etc. for luck (see on this PvA.198), to get married DhA.I,182; maṅgalaṁ vadati to bless one J.IV,299; DhA.I,115. Three (auspicious) wedding-ceremonies at DhA.I,115 viz. abhiseka° consecration, geha-ppavesana° entering the house, vivāha° wedding. -- Certain other general signs of good luck or omina kat) e)coxήn are given at J.IV,72, 73 and KhA 118 sq. (see also maṅgalika). -- Several ceremonious festivities are mentioned at DhA.II,87 with regard to the bringing up of a child, viz. nāma-karaṇa-maṅgala the ceremony of giving a name; āhāra-paribhoga° of taking solid food; kaṇṇa-vijjhana° of piercing the ears; dussa-gahaṇa° of taking up the robe: cūḷā-karaṇa° of making the top-knot. -- Cp. abhi°.

--usabha an auspicious bull SnA 323. --chaṇa a merry time, fair J.II,48; DhA.I,392. --kicca auspicious function, festivity SnA 175, 323. --kiriyā festivity, wedding SnA 69; finding good omens J.IV,72. --kolāhala the lucky, or most auspicious, foreboding, one of the 5 kolāhalas (q. v.) KhA 121. --pañha see maṅgalika. --divasa a lucky day J.IV,210; DhA.III,467. --vappa ploughing festival SnA 137. Cp. vappa-maṅgala. --sindhava state horse J.I,59. --silāpaṭṭa auspicious slab (of stone) J.I,59; VI,37; PvA.74. --supina lucky dream J.VI,330. --hatthi state elephant Mhvs 35, 21; DhA.I,389. (Page 513)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Vedic maṅgala. Expld by Dhtp 24 with root maṅg),【形】吉兆的，兴旺的，幸运的，庆典的(auspicious, prosperous, lucky, festive)。【中】吉祥，欢宴，好预兆，典礼，繁荣。maṅgalakicca,【中】作吉祥事(auspicious function)，欢宴( festivity)。maṅgalakiriyā﹐庆典(festivity)，婚礼(wedding)。maṅgalakolāhala,【阳】有关吉兆的事物或行为的争论。maṅgaladivasa,【阳】节日，婚姻日。maṅgalassa, maṅgalasindhava,【阳】皇家马。maṅgalapokkharaṇī,【阴】王室的浴池。maṅgalasilāpaṭṭa,【中】国王的坐板。maṅgalasupina,【中】好梦。maṅgalahatthī,【阳】皇家象。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Maṅgala-sutta: {'def': 'n. = Mahāmaṅgala-sutta 吉祥経 [Khp 5 = Sn 2 4].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Maṅgalika: {'def': '(maṅgalika-) (fr. maṅgala),【形】1.one who is feasting in, one whose auspices are such & such; fond of; only in kotūhala° fond of excitement J.I.372; Miln.94 (apagata°, without passion for excitement). -- 2. superstitious, looking out for lucky signs Vin.II,129 (gihī), 140 (id.). At J.IV.72, 73; three sets of people are exemplified, who believe in omina as either diṭṭhaṁ (seen) or sutaṁ (heard) or mutaṁ (sensed); they are called diṭṭha-maṅgalikā, suta° & muta° respectively. The same group is more explicitly dealt with in the Maṅgala-sutta KhA 118 sq. (cp. Nd1 89); diṭṭhamaṅgalika pañha “a question concerning visible omina” J.IV.73 (correct meaning given under diṭṭha1, vol. II.1561!), 390 (?). The Np. diṭṭha-maṅgalikā at J.IV.376 sq.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) (--°) [fr. maṅgala] 1. one who is feasting in, one whose auspices are such & such; fond of; only in kotūhala° fond of excitement J.I,372; Miln.94 (apagata°, without passion for excitement). -- 2. superstitious, looking out for lucky signs Vin.II,129 (gihī), 140 (id.). At J.IV,72, 73; three sets of people are exemplified, who believe in omina as either diṭṭhaṁ (seen) or sutaṁ (heard) or mutaṁ (sensed); they are called diṭṭha-maṅgalikā, suta° & muta° respectively. The same group is more explicitly dealt with in the Maṅgala-sutta KhA 118 sq. (cp. Nd¹ 89); diṭṭhamaṅgalika pañha “a question concerning visible omina” J.IV,73 (correct meaning given under diṭṭha¹, vol. II.156¹!), 390 (?). The Np. diṭṭha-maṅgalikā at J.IV,376 sq. (Page 513)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṅgalya: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. maṅgala] auspiciousness, good luck, fortune Dhtp 24. (Page 513)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṅgula: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. maṅgura] sallow; f. maṅgulī woman of sallow complexion S.II,260=Vin.III,107; Vin.III,100. (Page 513)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṅgura: {'def': '(adj.) [etym.? or=maṅgula? See J.R.A.S. 1903, 186 the corresponding passage to M.I,246 in Lal. V, 320 has madgura.] golden; in cpd. °cchavi of golden colour, f. cchavī D.I,193, 242; M.I,246, 429; II,33; Vism.184. (Page 513)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】金黄色的(golden; maṅguracchavi of golden colour, f. maṅguracchavī)。【阳】一种淡水鱼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】一种淡水鱼。【形】金黄色的。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Maṅkati: {'def': 'is given as root maṅk (aor. maki) at Dhtm 13, in meaning maṇḍana, i. e. adornment. It is meant to be an explⁿ of maṅkato? (Page 513)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṅkato: {'def': '(adv.) [for Sk. mat-kṛte, Cp. E. Müller, P.Gr. 12] on my account, for me Miln.384. (Page 513)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṅku: {'def': '【形】混乱的，气馁的，无精打采的。 ~bhāva, 【阳】道德弱点，气馁。 ~bhūta, 【形】沈默的，气馁的。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. Vedic maṅku),【形】混乱的，气馁的，沮丧的，无精打采的(staggering, confused, troubled, discontented)。maṅkubhāva,【阳】道德弱点，气馁。maṅkubhūta,【形】沉默的，气馁的。f. pl. maṅkū Vin.I,93. dummaṅku, (“staggering in a disagreeable manner,” evil-minded A.I,98; IV.97 (read line as “dummaṅku’yaṁ padusseti dhūm’aggamhi va pāvako” he, staggering badly, is spoilt like the fire on the crest of smoke); V.70; Vin.II,196; III.21; IV.213; S.II,218; Nett 50. )。maṅkubhāva, (discontent, moral weakness J.IV.49; Miln.227; DhA.III,359. maṅkubhūta, (discontented, troubled, confused Vin.II,19; D.II,85; A.I,186; Dh.263; J.V.211; VI.362; DhA.II,76; amaṅku, (self-possessed A.III,40; Miln.21, 339.) )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Vedic maṅku; see on meaning Hardy in preface to Aṅguttara v. p. vi] staggering, confused, troubled, discontented Vin.II,118; S.V,74; Dh.249; Nd¹ 150; DhA.III,41, 359 (with Loc.). -- f. pl. maṅkū Vin.I,93. --dummaṅku “staggering in a disagreeable manner,” evil-minded A.I,98; IV,97 (read line as “dummaṅku’yaṁ padusseti dhūm’aggamhi va pāvako” he, staggering badly, is spoilt like the fire on the crest of smoke); V,70; Vin.II,196; III,21; IV,213; S.II,218; Nett 50.

--bhāva discontent, moral weakness J.IV,49; Miln.227; DhA.III,359. --bhūta discontented, troubled, confused Vin.II,19; D.II,85; A.I,186; Dh.263; J.V,211; VI,362; DhA.II,76; a° self-possessed A.III,40; Miln.21, 339. (Page 513)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṅkuna: {'def': '& Maṅkuṇa(cp. late Sk. matkuṇa),昆虫、跳蚤(an insect, bug or flea J.I.10; III.423; Vism.109 (where kīla-maṅkula ought to be read as kīṭamaṅkuna); DhA.II,12.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& °ṇa) [cp. late Sk. matkuṇa, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 6³] an insect, bug or flea J.I,10; III,423; Vism.109 (where kīla-maṅkula ought to be read as kīṭamaṅkuna); DhA.II,12. (Page 513)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṇi: {'def': '【阳】珠宝。maṇikāra,【阳】宝石琢磨工人。maṇikuṇḍala,【中】宝石耳环。maṇikkhandha,【阳】巨大的珠宝。maṇipallaṅka,【阳】珠宝座。maṇibandha,【阳】手腕(日语：てくび,手首)。maṇimaya,【形】宝石制的。maṇiratana,【中】贵重的珠宝。maṇivaṇṇa,【形】水晶的顔色。maṇisappa,【阳】玉蛇、铜头蛇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic maṇi. The connection with Lat. monile (pendant), proposed by Fick & Grassmann, is doubted by Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. monile, where see other suggestions. For further characterisation of maṇi cp. Zimmer, Altindisches Leben pp. 53, 263] 1. a gem, jewel. At several places one may interpret as “crystal.” ‹-› D.I,7 (as ornament); Dh.161; J.VI,265 (agghiya, precious). In simile at D.I,76 (maṇi veḷuriyo). On maṇi in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 121. --udaka-pasādaka maṇi a precious stone (crystal?) having the property of making water clear Miln.35 (cp. below Vism.366 passage); cintā° a “thought-jewel,” magic stone (crystal?) J.III,504; VvA.32; cūḷā° a jewelled crest or diadem, the crown-jewel J.V,441 sq.; jāti° a genuine precious stone J.II,417; Vism.216 (in comparison); tārā° (-vitāna) (canopy) of jewelled stars Vism.76; nīla° a dark blue jewel J.II,112; IV,140; DhA.III,254. The passage “amaṇiṁ udakaṁ maṇiṁ katvā” at Vism.366 (+asuvaṇṇaṁ leḍḍuṁ suvaṇṇaṁ katvā) refers clearly to meaning “jewel” (that the water is without a jewel or crystal, but is made as clear as crystal; a conjuror’s trick, cp. Miln.35). Whether meaning “waterpot” (as given at Abhp 1113 & found in der. maṇika) is referred to here, is not to be decided. -- 2. a crystal used as burning-glass Miln.54.

--kāra a jeweller Miln.331; DhA.II,152. --kuṇḍala a jewelled earring, adj. wearing an (ear) ornament of jewels Vin.II,156 (āmutta° adorned with . . .); Vv 20⁸ (id.); 43⁸ (id.); Pv.II,9⁵¹ (id.); Th.I,187; Dh.345 (maṇi-kuṇḍalesu=manīsu ca kuṇḍalesu ca maṇicittesu vā kuṇḍalesu, i. e. with gem-studded earrings DhA.IV,56). --kuṭṭima at VvA.188 is probably to be read as °kuṇḍala (v. l. °kundima). --khandha “jewelbulk,” i. e. a tremendous jewel, large gem, functioning in tales almost like a magic jewel J.III,187; V,37 (°vaṇṇaṁ udakaṁ water as clear as a large block of crystal), 183 (°pilandhana). --guhā a jewelled cave, cave of crystal J.II,417 (where pigs live); SnA 66 (one of three, viz. suvaṇṇa-guhā, m.°, rajata°. At the entrance of it there grows the Mañjūsaka tree). --canda “the jewelled moon,” i. e. with a crest like the (glittering) moon Vv 64⁶ (=maṇi-maya-maṇḍalânuviddha-candamaṇḍala-sadisa maṇi VbA 277). --cchāyā reflection of a jewel J.VI,345. --thūṇā, a jewelled pillar, adj. with jewelled pillars Vv 54¹, 67¹. --pabbata mountain of gems SnA 358. --pallaṅka a jewelled pallanquin DhA.I,274. --bandha (place for) binding the jewel(led) bracelet, the wrist Vism.255=VbhA.238=KhA 50 (°aṭṭhi). --bhadda N. of one of 20 classes of people mentioned Miln.191; trsl^d by Rh. D. Miln.trsl. I.266 by “tumblers.” The term occurs also at Nd¹ 89 & 92. Cp. Sk. Maṇibhadra, N. of a brother of Kuvera & prince of the Yakṣas. --maya made of, consisting of, or caused by jewels Pv.II,6⁴; VvA.280; DhA.I,29. --ratana a precious stone or mineral, which is a gem (jewel); i. e. maṇi as a kind of ratana, of which there are seven Vism.189 (in sim.); Miln.218. --rūpaka a jewelled image DhA.I,370; --lakkhaṇa fortune-telling from jewels D.I,9; SnA 564.

--vaṇṇa the colour or appearance of crystal; i. e. as clear as crystal (of water) J.II,304 (pasanna+). --sappa a kind of poisonous snake (i. e. a mysterious, magic snake) DA.I,197. (Page 516)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】珠宝。 ~kāra, 【阳】宝石琢磨工人。 ~kuṇḍala, 【中】宝石耳环。 ~kkhandha,【阳】巨大的珠宝。 ~pallaṅka,【阳】珠宝座。 ~bandha,【阳】手腕。 ~maya, 【形】宝石制的。 ~ratana, 【中】贵重的珠宝。~vaṇṇa, 【形】水晶的颜色。 ~sappa, 【阳】玉蛇。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Maṇika: {'def': '[cp. Class. Sk. maṇika] a waterpot M.II,39. Usually in cpd. udaka° Vin.I,277; M.I,354; S.IV,316; A.III,27; Miln.28; DhA.I,79. Whether this is an original meaning of the word remains doubtful; the connection with maṇi jewel must have been prevalent at one time. (Page 516)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 大的广口瓶，2. 以玻璃制成的手镯等。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】1.大的广口瓶，2.以玻璃制成的手镯等。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Maṇila: {'def': '[cp. *Sk. maṇila dewlap?] a kind of tree Vism.313. (Page 516)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṇīkā: {'def': '(f.) [f. of maṇika, adj. fr. maṇi] N. of a charm, the Jewel-charm, by means of which one can read other people’s minds D.I,214 (m. iddhi-vijjā), cp. Dial. I.278, n. 3.). (Page 516)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṇḍa: {'def': '[later Sk. maṇḍa, perhaps dial. from *mranda, cp. Sk. vi-mradati to soften. Attempts at etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. mollis. Cp. also mattikā] the top part, best part of milk or butter, etc. i. e. cream, scum; fig. essence of, the pick of, finest part of anything. parisā° the cream of a gathering, the pick of the congregation, excellent congregation A.I,72 (or for °maṇḍala?); bodhi° essence of enlightenment, highest state of enlightenment; in later literature objectively “the best place of enlightenment, the Throne of Enlightenment or of the Buddha” (does it stand for °maṇḍala in this meaning?) J.IV,233 (cp. puthavi-maṇḍa ibid. & puthavi-maṇḍala Sn.990); DhA.I,86; II,69; IV,72. sappi° “cream of butter,” the finest ghee (cp. AvŚ I.15¹³ sarpimaṇḍa) D.I,201; A.II,95; Pug.70; Miln.322. --maṇḍaṁ karoti to put into the best condition, to make pleasant SnA 81. --manda at DhsA.100 is to be read baddha (v. l. BB). Cp. Expos. 132ⁿ.

--khetta best soil, fertile ground Miln.255. --peyya to be drunk like cream, i. e. of the finest quality, first-class S.II,20 (°ṁ idaṁ brahmacariyaṁ). (Page 516)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】(牛奶等的)最好部份。【形】非常清楚的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】（牛奶等的）最好部份。【形】非常清楚的。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Maṇḍaka: {'def': '[fr. maṇḍa] 1. the cream of the milk, whey, in dadhi° whey S.II,111. -- 2. the scum of stagnant water, i. e. anything that floats on the surface & dirties the water, water-weeds, moss etc. J.II,304 (gloss sevāla). (Page 516)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṇḍala: {'def': '[cp. Vedic maṇḍala] 1. circle D.I,134 (paṭhavi°, cp. puthavi° Sn.990); Vism.143 (°ṁ karoti to draw a circle, in simile), 174 (tipu° & rajata° lead- & silver circle, in kasiṇa practice); VvA.147 (of a fan=tālapattehi kata°-vījanī). -- 2. the disk of the sun or moon; suriya° VvA.224, 271 (divasa-kara°); canda° Vism.174; PvA.65. -- 3. a round, flat surface, e. g. jānu° the disk of the knee, i. e. the knee PvA.179; naḷāta° the (whole of the) forehead D.I,106; Sn.p. 108. -- 4. an enclosed part of space in which something happens, a circus ring; e. g. M.I,446 (circus, race-ring); assa° horse-circus, raceground, Vism.308; āpāna° drinking circle, i. e. hall; kīḷa° play-circle, i. e. games J.VI,332, 333; DhA.III,146; keḷi° dice board (?) J.I,379; gā° Th.I,1143, cp. trs. ib. n. 3; go° ox-round Sn.301; jūta° dicing table J.I,293; yuddha° fightingring Vism.190; raṅga° play-house VvA.139; vāta° tornado J.I,73. -- 5. anything comprised within certain limits or boundaries, a group J.V,418 (chāpa° litter of young animals). -- 6. border as part of a bhikkhu’s dress, hem, gusset Vin.I,287; II,177.

--agga [cp. Sk. maṇḍal’āgra Halāyudha 2, 317 at Aufrecht p. 301] a circular sword or sabre Miln.339. --māla (sometimes māḷa) a circular hall with a peaked roof, a pavilion D.I,2, 50 (ḷ); Miln.16 (ḷ); Sn.p. 104; SnA 132 (Npl.); VvA.175. (Page 516)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】圆周，盘，圆月台，杂技场，圆平面，曼陀罗。maṇḍalamāla,【阳】圆形的大帐蓬。maṇḍalika,【形】一个圆周的，小国家的。maṇḍalissara,【阳】省长。maṇḍalī,【形】有盘的，圆形的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】圆周，盘，圆月台，杂技场，圆平面。 ~māla, 【阳】圆形的大帐蓬。 ~lika, 【形】属于一个圆周的，属于小国家的。 ~lissara, 【阳】省长。 ~ḍalī, 【形】有盘的，圆形的。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Maṇḍalika: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. maṇḍala, cp. maṇḍalaka-rājā “the king of a small country” Mvyut 94] a district officer, king’s deputy Vin.III,47 f. maṇḍalikā=maṇḍala 4, i. e. circus, ring, round, in assa° race court Vin.III,6. (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṇḍalin: {'def': '(fr. maṇḍala),【形】1.圆的(circular Th.1, 863 (maṇḍali-pākāra))。2.球状的，圆形的(having a disk, orbed (of the sun) S.I,51=VvA.116.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. maṇḍala] 1. circular Th.1, 863 (maṇḍali-pākāra). -- 2. having a disk, orbed (of the sun) S.I,51=VvA.116. (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṇḍana: {'def': '【中】装饰，装饰品。maṇḍanajatika,【形】想装饰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】装饰，装饰品。 ~jatika, 【形】想装饰。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. maṇḍ] ornament, adornment, finery D.I,5, 7; J.VI,64; Pug.21, 58; Vbh.351; VbhA.477; Dhtm 13. See under mada.

--ânuyoga practice of ornamenting, fondness of finery Vin.I,190. --jātika of an ornament (-loving) nature, fond of dressing D.I,80=Vin.II,255=M.II,19, 32. (Page 516)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṇḍapa: {'def': '【阳】暂时的棚，暂时的大帐蓬。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. late Sk. maṇḍapa] a temporary shed or hall erected on special or festive occasions, an awning, tent Vin.I,125; Vism.96, 300 (dhamma-savaṇa°), 339 sq. (in simile); DhA.I,112; II,45; III,206 (°kāraka); PvA.74, 171, 194; VvA.173. (Page 516)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】暂时的棚，暂时的大帐蓬。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Maṇḍeti: {'def': '(maṇḍ装饰+e), 装饰。【过】maṇḍesi。【过分】maṇḍita。【独】maṇḍetva。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(maṇḍ + e), 装饰。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~ḍita。【独】 ~ḍetva。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[maṇḍ to adorn, related to Lat. mundus world, cp. in meaning Gr. kόsmos=ornament Dhtp 103 bhūsane, 566: bhūsāyaṁ] to adorn, embellish, beautify J.III,138; DhA.II,86. -- pp. maṇḍita. (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṇḍita: {'def': '[maṇḍeti 装饰] 的【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(maṇḍeti 的【过分】)。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of maṇḍeti] adorned, embellished, dressed up Sdhp.244, 540. In cpd. °pasādhita beautifully adorned at J.I,489; II,48; VI,219. -- Cp. abhi°. (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṇḍuka: {'def': '【阳】青蛙。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】青蛙。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Maṇḍūka: {'def': '[Vedic maṇḍūka] a frog Vv 51²; J.IV,247; V,307; VI,164; KhA 46; VvA.217, 218; Sdhp.292. f. mandūkī J.I,341. -- Mandūka is the name of an angel (devaputta) at Vism.208.

--chāpī a young (female) frog J.VI,192. --bhakkha eating frogs, frog eater (i. e. a snake) J.III,16. (Page 517)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṭaja: {'def': '(nt.) [doubtful] a certain weapon M.I,281 (°ṁ nāma āvudhajātaṁ; Neumann trsl^s “Mordwaffe”). (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṭāhaka: {'def': '(adj.) [doubtful spelling & meaning] short (?) Vin.II,138 (ati°=atikhuddaka C.). (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maṭṭa: {'def': '& Maṭṭha [pp. of mṛj, see majjati²] wiped, polished, clean, pure. -- (a) maṭṭa: D.II,133 (yugaṁ maṭṭaṁ dhāraṇīyaṁ: “pair of robes of burnished cloth of gold and ready for wear” trsl.); Vism.258 (v. l. maṭṭha). Cp. sam.° -- (b) maṭṭha: Vv 84¹⁷ (su°); Miln.248; DhA.I,25 (°kuṇḍalī having burnished earrings); VvA.6 (°vattha). Cp. vi°.

--sāṭaka a tunic of fine cloth J.I,304; II,274; III,498; Vism.284 (ṭṭh). (Page 516)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'maṭṭha,【形】平滑的，擦亮的。maṭṭasāṭaka,【中】优良的布料。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'maṭṭha, 【形】平滑的，擦亮的。 ~sāṭaka, 【中】优良的布料。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Me: {'def': '(amha 的【与、领、单】), 给我，我的。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'is enclitic form of ahaṁ in var. cases of the sg. See under ahaṁ. (Page 540)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(amha 的【与.属.单】), 给我，我的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mecaka: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Vedic mecaka] black, dark blue DhsA.13. (Page 540)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】黑色的，深蓝色。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】黑色的，深蓝色。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Meda: {'def': '【阳】脂肪(台语：chi hong)。medakathālikā,【阴】油炸脂肪的炖锅。medavaṇṇa,【形】脂肪的顔色。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic medas (nt.) fr. mid, see etym. under mada] fat S.I,124; Sn.196; J.III,484 (ajakaraṁ medaṁ=ajakara-medaṁ C.); Kh III, (expl^d at Vism.262 as “thīnasineha” thick or coagulated fluid or gelatine); Vism.361; VbhA.66, 225, 245, 249.

--kathālika a cooking pot or saucepan for frying fat A.IV,377 (in simile with kāya); DhA.II,179 (similar); Vism.195 (in compar.). --gaṇṭhi (as medo-gaṇṭhi, Sk. influence!) an abscess of fat, fatty knot or tumour, mentioned as a disease at Miln.149. --vaṇṇa fatcoloured; in cpd. °pāsāna a stone of the (golden) colour of fat found in the Himālaya mountains Sn.447 (=medapiṇḍa-sadisa SnA 393); Mhvs 1, 39; 30, 57 sq., 96; 31, 121; see Geiger’s note Mhvs (P.T.S. ed.) p. 355, who puts it beyond doubt, that meda° is the correct reading for the v. l. megha° at all places. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】脂肪。 ~kathālikā, 【阴】油炸脂肪的炖锅。 ~vaṇṇa, 【形】脂肪的颜色。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Medaka: {'def': '[meda+ka] in go° a precious stone of light-red (or golden) colour (cp. meda-vaṇṇa-pāsāṇa) VvA.111. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Medeti: {'def': '[denom. fr. meda] to become fat M.I,238. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Medha: {'def': '【阳】宗教性的牺牲(祭祀)。Tato ca rājā saññatto brāhmaṇehi rathesabho assamedhaṁ purisamedhaṁ sammāpāsaṁ vācapeyyaṁ maggalaṁ.(由於诸婆罗门劝说的缘故，车乘之主──王举行马祭、人祭、大施会、酒祭、无遮会)。马祭︰杀马作祭。人祭︰杀人作祭。)大施会︰SA.︰ Daliddamanussānaṁ hatthato lekhaṁ gahetvā tīṇi vassāni vināva vaḍḍhiyā sahassadvisahassamattadhanānuppadānaṁ sammāpāsaṁ nāma.(由於诸穷人徒手三年，没有兴隆，故分发财物给为数一两千之(穷)人，为大施会(不知是否是「(五年一度)无遮大会」(pañca-vārsikamaha)的起源。)。酒祭︰饮苏摩酒之祭。无遮会︰施一切物之祭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic medha, in aśva, go°, puruṣa° etc.] sacrifice only in assa° horse-sacrifice & purisa° human s. (q. v.). e.g. at A.IV,151; Sn.303. -- Cp. mejjha. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】宗教性的牺牲。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Medhaga: {'def': '(& °ka) [cp. Sk. methana abusive speech; Vedic methati fr. mith to scold] quarrel, strife Vin.II,88 (°ka); Th.2, 344; Sn.893, 894 (=kalaha, bhaṇḍana, viggaha, vivāda Nd¹ 302, 303), 935 (T. °ka; Nd¹ 402 & 406 °ga. with v. l. SS °ka); Dh.6; J.III,334 (°ka; C.=kalaha), 488 (°ga; C. °ka explⁿ kalaha); DhA.I,65. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】吵架。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】吵架。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Medhasa: {'def': '(adj.) [=Vedic medhas, as a-base] having wisdom or intelligence, wise, only in cpds. bhūri° of great wisdom Sn.1131; & su° [Ved. sumedhas] very wise Vv 22² (=sundara-pañña VvA.111); Pv III,7⁷ (both comb^d as bhūri-su-medhasa, hardly correct; v. l. M. bhūrimedhasa PvA.205). (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Medhi: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic methī pillar, post (to bind cattle to); BSk. medhi Divy 244; Prk. meḍhi Pischel Gr. § 221. See for etym. Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. meta] pillar, part of a stūpa [not in the Canon?]. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Medhin: {'def': '(adj.-n.)=medha in adj. use; only in cpd. dummedhin (=dum-medha) foolish, ignorant Dh.26 (bālā dummedhino janā;=nippaññā DhA.I,257). (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Medhā: {'def': '【阴】智能。 ~vī, 【阳】明智的人。 ~vinī, 【阴】明智的女人。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic medhā & medhas, perhaps to Gr. maq° in manqάnw (“mathematics”)] wisdom, intelligence, sagacity Nd¹ s. v. (m. vuccati paññā); Pug.25; Dhs.16, DhsA.148; PvA.40 (=paññā). -- adj. sumedha wise, clever, intelligent Sn.177; opp. dum° stupid Pv.I,8². --khīṇa-medha one whose intelligence has been impaired, stupefied J.VI,295 (=khīṇa-pañña). (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】智慧，聪慧。medhāvī,【阳】明智的人。medhāvinī,【阴】明智的女人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Medhāvin: {'def': '(adj.) [medhā+in=*medhāyin›medhāvin; already Vedic, cp. medhasa] intelligent, wise, often comb^d with paṇḍita & bahussuta: D.I,120; S.IV,375; A.IV,244; Vin.IV,10, 13, 141; Sn.323 (Acc. medhāvinaṁ +bahussutaṁ) 627, 1008 (Ep. of Mogharājā), 1125 (id.); Nd² 259 (s. v. jātimā, with var. other synonyms); Dh.36; J.VI,294; Miln.21; DhA.I,257; II,108; IV,169; VvA.131; PvA.41. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Medhāvitā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. medhāvin] cleverness, intelligence VvA.229. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Medinī: {'def': '【阴】地(墨地尼，即：友善的)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [of adj. medin, fr. meda fat, but cp. Vedic medin an associate or companion fr. mid in meaning to be friendly] the earth (also later Sk.) Mhvs 5, 185; 15, 47; Vism.125. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】地（墨地尼，即：友善的）。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Megha: {'def': '[Vedic megha; not to mih, mehati (see mīḷha), but to Idg. *meigh-, fog, rain; cp. Sk. miḥ mist; Av. maēga cloud; Gr. o)mi/xlh fog, Lith. mighá fog, Dutch miggelen to drizzle, also Ags. mist=Oicel mistr “mist”] a cloud Pv.II,9⁴⁵; Vism.126; esp. a thundercloud, storm, S.I,100 (thaneti), 154; Th.I,307 (as kāḷa); It.66; J.I,332 (pajjunna vuccati megha); DhA.I,19; SnA 27 (°thanita-sadda). In this capacity often called mahā-megha, e. g. Sn.30; DhA.I,165; KhA 21; PvA.132. -- On megha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 124, 125.

--nātha having clouds as protectors (said with ref. to grass-eating animals) J.IV,253. --maṇḍala cloud-circle, a circle of clouds SnA 27. --vaṇṇa cloud-coloured J.V,321 (C. for megha-sannibha); °pāsāṇa a sort of ornamental building stone Mhvs 30, 59 (v. l., T. meda°; trsl. fat-coloured stones). See meda°. (Page 540)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】下雨，云。 ~nāda, 【阳】雷电。 ~vaṇṇa, 【形】云的彩色，即：黑色。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】下雨，云。meghanāda,【阳】雷电。meghavaṇṇa,【形】云的色彩，即：黑色。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Meghiya: {'def': '(梵Mihira), (比丘)弥醯，曾为佛陀的侍者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Meha: {'def': '【阳】泌尿的痛苦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】泌尿的痛苦。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mehana: {'def': '【中】男女的性器官。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】男女的性器官。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mejjati: {'def': '(cp. Vedic midyati, to mid, see meda), 爱(to love)。DhsA 192 (v. l. mijjati; =siniyhati lubricant润滑剂)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic midyati, to mid, see meda Dhtp 160, 413 & Dhtm 641 give mid with meaning “snehane”] to be fat, to be full of fat; fig. to be in love with or attracted by, to feel affection (this meaning only as a “petitio principii” to explain mettā) DhsA.192 (v. l. mijjati; =siniyhati). (Page 540)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mejjha: {'def': '【形】纯粹的。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹medha),【形】[to medha1] 纯粹的(fit for sacrifice, pure; neg. amejjha impure)。2. [to medha2 & medhāvin]【中】 in dummejjha, 愚蠢(foolishness)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [*medhya; fr. medha] 1. (adj.) [to medha¹] fit for sacrifice, pure; neg. a° impure Sdhp.363. 2. (nt.) [to medha² & medhāvin] in dum° foolishness Pug.21=Dhs.390 (expl^d at DhsA.254 by “yaṁ . . . citta-santānaṁ mejjhaṁ bhaveyya suci-vodānaṁ taṁ duṭṭhaṁ mejjhaṁ iminā ti dummejjhaṁ”). (Page 540)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mekhalikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. mekhalā] a girdle Vin.II,185 (ahi°, consisting of a snake). (Page 540)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mekhalā: {'def': '【阴】女人的腰带(=女的性器官)。Nd1.144﹑Sp.pārā.I,125.﹑Vism.212.︰yathā loke “mehanassa khassa mālā”ti vattabbe “mekhalā”ti vuccati.( 正如世间中(本应说「女子隐（mehanassa）处（khassa）的花环（mālā）」，但是（取me+kha+lā）说「金腰带」（mekhalā）。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic mekhalā] a girdle J.V,202, 294 (su°, adj.); VI,456; ThA.35; KhA 109; DhA.I,39; PvA.46. (Page 540)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】女人的腰带。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Melana: {'def': '【中】聚集，会议。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】聚集，会议。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mella: {'def': '[dial. or uncertain reading?] citron (=mātulunga) J.III,319 (gloss bella). (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Meniyo: {'def': '﹐Sil Meniyo﹐【锡兰语】十戒女(dasa sil matha=dasasīlamātā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Meraya: {'def': '【中】发酵的酒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Epic Sk. maireya, cp. Halāyudha 2, 175 (Aufrecht p. 314); prob. dial.] a sort of intoxicating liquor, spirits, rum, usually comb^d with surā. D.I,146‹-› 166; M.I,238; Pug.55; Dh.247; J.IV,117 (pupphāsav-ādi, i. e. made fr. flowers, cp. defⁿ dhātakī-puṣpaguḍa-dhāny-āmla-sanskṛtaṁ by Mādhava, Halāy. p. 314). Five kinds are given by Dhpāla at VvA.73, viz. pupph-āsava, phal’āsava, madhv°, guḷ°, sambhārasaṁyutta. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】发酵的酒。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Merita: {'def': 'in bhayamerita J.IV,424=V.359 is to be read as bhaya-m-erita driven by fear; there is no need to change it with Kern, Toev. to perita. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Meru: {'def': '【阳】须弥山(世界的最高山名)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】须弥山（世界的最高山名）。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mesa: {'def': '【阳】公羊。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】公羊。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Methuna: {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [fr. Vedic mithuna pair, der. fr. mithu. Cp. micchā] 1. (adj.) relating to sexual intercourse, sexual, usually with dhamma, sex intercourse, in phrase °ṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevati to cohabit Vin.I,96; D.II,133; Sn.291, 704; Nd¹ 139; Vism.418; SnA 536. -- (m.) an associate J.VI,294 (na rājā hoti methuno). -- 2. (nt.) sexual intercourse [Vedic maithuna] D.I,4; III,9, 88 sq., 133; Sn.400, 609, 814, 835=DhA.I,202; Nd¹ 139, 145; Pug.67; Vism.51. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】行房，行淫，交接。古译：交通。methunadhamma,【阳】行房，交合。Pārā.III,24.︰Methunadhammo nāma yo so asaddhammo gāmadhammo vasaladhammo duṭṭhullaṁ odakantikaṁ rahassaṁ dvayaṁdvayasamāpatti, eso methunadhammo nāma.(不净行(淫欲法)︰任何非正法、村民法、贱民法、淫猥的、(淫)水的、秘密、双双达到三摩钵地(性高潮)，这是淫欲法。) imesaṁ sattannaṁ methunasaṁyogānaṁ,七种淫相应(七淫结)。修习梵行，须戒绝「七种淫相应」，才能称为梵行清净圆满的(paripuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ caratī)正梵行者(sammā brahmacārī)。七种淫相应为︰(1)男女行淫(、按摩等)之事。(2)与妇人嬉笑游戏。(3)审视女人的眼睛(包括看体型、体态，或闻体香等)。(4)听隔壁女人之笑声、说话、唱歌、哭泣、(5)追忆过去曾与女人相笑、相谈、游玩。(6)见居士或居士子具备享受五欲而心动。(7)愿成天众而修梵行。(《增支部》(A.7.47./IV,54f.) ；《增壹阿含37.9经》(T2.714.3)；《清净道论》Vism.51~53)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】行房，接合。 ~dhamma, 【阳】行房，接合。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Methunaka: {'def': '[fr. methuna] 1. one concerned with (illicit) sexual intercourse, a fornicator Nd¹ 139 (in a wider sense). -- 2. an associate Vin.III,66. -- 3. (nt.) coitus J.II,360 (=methuna-dhamma C.). (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Metta: {'def': '希望他人幸福的慈心状态，其中完全没有私心。[60]', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '(adj. nt.) [cp. Vedic maitra “belonging to Mitra”; Epic Sk. maitra “friendly,” fr. mitra] friendly, benevolent, kind as adj. at D.III,191 (mettena kāya-kammena etc.), 245 (°ṁ vacī-kammaṁ); as nt. for mettā in cpds. of mettā (cp. mettaṁsa) and by itself at D.I,227 (mettaṁ+cittaṁ), perhaps also at Sn.507. (Page 540)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mettacitta: {'def': '【形】有慈善的心，慈心。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有慈善的心，慈心。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Metteyya: {'def': '（诸佛名）美德亚，（古音译：）弥勒，弥帝隶', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '美德亚。未来佛名，巴利语的音译，意为慈爱，为此贤劫中的第五位（也是最后一位）佛陀。
在《长部·转轮王经》中说:“诸比库，在人寿八万岁时，有名为美德亚的世尊将出现于世，是阿拉汉、正自觉者、明行具足、善至、世间解、无上者、调御丈夫、天人导师、佛陀、世尊。”（D.26）
汉传佛教依梵语Maitreya音译为弥勒、弥帝隶、梅怛丽耶等。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '(‹mitta, 梵 Maitreya), 慈(最深的友情)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'm. [BSk. Maitreya] 弥勒(みろく) [未来仏].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Metteyya-nātha: {'def': '【阳】未来佛，即：弥勒菩萨。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(梵Maitreya),【阳】弥勒菩萨，未来佛，又作梅呾丽耶，译为慈氏，下一次将在阎浮提成佛，为一生补处菩萨。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Metteyyattā: {'def': '(f.) is occasional spelling for matteyyatā (q. v.), in analogy to petteyyatā; e. g. Nd² 294. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Metti: {'def': '参考 Mettā。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '慈，参考 Mettā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Mettī (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. maitrī] love, friendship J.III,79; V,208; VbhA.75. See also defⁿ of mettā. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mettā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. mitra=mitta, cp. Vedic maitraṁ. According to Asl. 192 (cp. Expos. 258) derived fr. mid to love, to be fat: “mejjati mettā siniyhatī ti attho”] love, amity, sympathy, friendliness, active interest in others. There are var. def^ns & expl^ns of mettā: the stereotype “metti mettāyanā mettāyitattaṁ mettā cetovimutti” Vbh.86=272; occurring as “metti mettāyanā mettāyitattaṁ anudā anudāyana anudāyitattaṁ hitesitā anukampā abyāpādo . . . kusalamūlaṁ” at Nd¹ 488 & Dhs.1056 (where T. mettaṁ for metti, but see Dhs.trsl.² 253). By Bdhgh at SnA 128 expl^d in distinction fr. karuṇā (which is “ahita-dukkh-âpanayakāmatā”) as “hita-sukh-ûpanaya-kāmatā,” i. e. desire of bringing welfare & good to one’s fellow-men. Cp. defⁿ of mettā at Vism.317. -- Sn.73 (see Nd² p. 232), 967; D.III,247 sq., 279; Vism.111, 321 sq.; SnA 54; PvA.66 (khanti, m., anudaya); Sdhp.484, 487. ‹-› Phrases occurring frequently: mettā ceto-vimutti D.I,251; S.II,265; A.IV,150; It.20; Vbh.86 and passim. mettā-sahagatena cetasā with a heart full of love D.I,250; II,186; III,49 sq., 78, 223 sq.; S.V,115; A.I,183; II,129; IV,390; V,299, 344; expl^d in detail at Vism.308. mettaṁ karoti (Loc.) to be friendly or sympathize with Mhvs 12, 23. -- In cpds. usually mettā°, but shortened to metta° in metta-cittaṁ kindly thought, a heart full of love D.I,167; III,237; Sn.507; Pv.II,13¹⁷; J.VI,71; and metta-jhāna love-meditation, as explⁿ of m.--citta at SnA 417; PvA.167. --aṁsa (mettaṁsa) sympathetic, showing love towards It.22 (v. l. °āsa); J.IV,71 (=metta-koṭṭhāsa mettacitta C.). --kammaṭṭhāna the k. of sympathy DhA.IV,108. --bhāvanā cultivation or development of friendliness (towards all living beings) J.I,176; III,45; Miln.199; Vism.295. --vihārin abiding in kindliness Dh.368; DhA.IV,108; Nett 25; Vism.324; PvA.230. (Page 540)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '慈', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【阴】慈，友好，善意。 ~kammaṭṭhāna, 【中】 ~bhāvanā, 【阴】慈修。 ~yanā, 【阴】友好的感觉，慈性。 ~vihārī, 【形】住在慈意中，慈居。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹mida软化﹑爱),【阴】慈，友好，善意。mettākammaṭṭhāna,【中】mettābhāvanā,【阴】慈修。mettāyanā,【阴】友好的感觉，慈性。mettāvihārī,【形】住在慈意中，慈居，慈庵。mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati.(心与慈俱，遍满一方而住。‘住’《中阿含经》译作：‘成就游’)。mettāetovimutti (mettā cetovimutti), 慈心解脱。AA.1.2./I,47.︰mettā cetovimuttīti sabbasattesu hitapharaṇakā mettā.(慈心解脱︰对一切有情徧满祝福的慈。) DhsA 192.︰mejjatīti mettā, siniyhatīti attho. Mitte vā bhavā, mittassa vā esā pavattatīpi mettā.(慈︰爱；定义作︰他希望好。或对朋友生起慈(爱)，而有友情。) KhA.248.︰ Mittassa bhāvo mettaṁ. (朋友的情感(友谊)(mittassa bhāvo)，即「慈」。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mettāyanā: {'def': '(f.) & Mettāyitatta (nt.) [abstr. formations fr. mettā]: see defⁿ of mettā. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mettāyati: {'def': '[denom. fr. mettā] to feel friendly, to show love, to be benevolent A.IV,151; DhsA.194; VbhA.75. With Loc. to show friendship or be affectionate towards J.I,365; III,96; Dāvs III,34. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(mettā 的【派】), 觉得友善，发慈悲。【过】 ~tāyi。【独】 ~yitvā。【现分】 ~yanta。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(mettā 的【派】), 觉得友善，发慈悲。【过】mettāyi。【独】mettāyitvā。【现分】mettāyanta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Meṇḍa: {'def': '[dial., cp. Prk. měṇṭha & miṇṭha: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 293. The Dhtm (156) gives a root meṇḍ (meḍ) in meaning of “koṭilla,” i. e. crookedness. The Ved. (Sk.) word for ram is meṣa] 1. a ram D.I,9; J.IV,250, 353 (°visāṇa-dhanu, a bow consisting of a ram’s horn). --°patha Npl. “ram’s road” Nd¹ 155=415. --°yuddha ram fight D.I,6. -- 2. a groom, elephant-driver in cpd. hatthi° elephants’keeper J.III,431; V,287; VI,489. (Page 540)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'meṇḍaka,【阳】公羊，绵羊。Meṇḍakaseṭṭhi,【阳】公羊富翁(一位跋提城(Bhaddiyanagara)的巨富居士)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'meṇḍaka, 【阳】公羊，绵羊。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Meṇḍaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. meṇḍa] 1. made of ram(s) horn, said of a (very strong) bow J.II,88 (°dhanu); V,128 (°singadhanu). -- 2. belonging to a ram, in meṇḍaka-pañha “question about the ram” Miln.90 alluding to the story of a ram in the Ummagga-jātaka (J.VI,353--55), which is told in form of a question, so difficult & puzzling that nobody “from hell to heaven” (J.VI,354) can answer it except the Bodhisatta. Cp. Trenckner’s remark Miln.422. (Page 540)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Micchatta: {'def': '【中】谎言。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】谎言。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. micchā] item of wrong, wrongness. There are 8 items of wrong, viz. the 8 wrong qualities as enum^d under (an-) ariya-magga (see micchā), forming the contrary to the sammatta or righteousness of the Ariyan Path. These 8 at D.II,353; III,254; A.II,221; IV,237; Vbh.387; Vism.683. Besides these there is a set of 10, consisting of the above 8 plus micchā-ñāṇa and °vimutti wrong knowledge & wrong emancipation: D.III,290; Vbh.391; Vism.683 (where °ñāṇa & °viratti for vimutti). -- See further D.III,217 (°niyata); Pug.22; Dhs.1028 (cp. Dhs. trsl. §1028); Vbh.145; Tikp. 32 (°niyata-citta), 325 (°tika), 354 (id.). (Page 532)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Micchā: {'def': '【无】不真实，谎言，错误的，错误地，邪。micchābhinivesa(倾向),【阳】邪执。micchākammanta,【阳】邪业。micchāgahaṇa,【中】错误的观念。micchācāra,【阳】错误的行为。micchācārī,【形】错误地举止者。micchādiṭṭhi,【阴】邪见，异端。micchāpaṇihita,【形】误导的。micchāvācā,【阴】邪语。micchāvāyāma,【阳】邪精进。micchājīva﹐【阳】邪命(错误的生计方式)。micchāsaṅkappa,【阳】思维。kāmesu micchācāra﹐邪欲。《分别善恶报应经》卷下：「邪欲报有十种。何等为十？一欲心炽盛。二妻不贞良。三不善增长。四善法消灭。五男女纵逸。六资财密散。七心多疑虑。八远离善友。九亲族不信。十命终三涂。」(T1.899.2)《杂阿含500经》说四种邪命食。下口：adhomukha(adho下+mukha口﹑面)。即脸部朝下，或丢脸。下口食，指不托鉢乞食而自耕作营生，沙门的四邪命食之一。仰口：ubbhamukha。)，即仰脸、抬头。仰口食，以仰观星宿、日月、风雨、雷电、霹雳之术数学求衣食，而自活命，沙门的四邪命食之一。方口：disāmukha。即脸朝四方。方口食，指出家人曲媚显贵，通使於四方，借巧言令色而求活命，沙门的四邪命食之一。四维口：vidisāmukha。即脸朝东南、西南、西北、东北四面张望。四维口食，即学种种之咒术卜算吉凶，以求衣食而自活命，沙门的四邪命食之一。(cf. S.28.10.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [Sk. mithyā, cp. Vedic mithaḥ interchanging, separate, opposite, contrary (opp. sa’yak together: see samma); mithū wrongly; see also mithu] wrongly, in a wrong way, wrong-, false Sn.438 (laddho yaso), 815 (paṭipajjati leads a wrong course of life, almost syn. with anariyaṁ. Illustrated by “pāṇaṁ hanati, adinnaṁ ādiyati, sandhiṁ chindati, nillopaṁ harati, ekāgārikaṁ karoti, paripanthe tiṭṭhati, paradāraṁ gacchati, musā bhaṇati” at Nd¹ 144); VbhA.513 (°ñāṇa, °vimutti). --micchā° often in same comb^ns as sammā°, with which contrasted, e. g. with the 8 parts of (an-) ariya-magga, viz. °diṭṭhi (wrong) views (D.III,52, 70 sq., 76, 111, 246, 269, 287, 290, Dh.167, 316 sq.; Pug.39; Vism.469 (def.) PvA.27, 42, 54, 67; cp. °ka one who holds wrong views D.III,45, 48, 264; Vism.426); °saṅkappa aspiration (D.III,254, 287, 290 sq., Dh.11); °vācā speech (ibid.); °kammanta conduct (ibid.); °ājīva living (D.III,176 sq., 254, 290; A.II,53, 240, 270, IV.82); °vāyāma effort (D.III,254, 287, 290 sq.); °sati mindfulness (ibid.); °samādhi concentration (ibid.); see magga 2, and cp. the following:

--gahaṇa wrong conception, mistake J.III,304. --cāra wrong behaviour Pug.39 (& adj. cārin); VbhA.383 (var. degrees). --paṭipadā wrong path (of life) Pug.49 (& adj.: °paṭipanna, living wrongly). --paṇihita (citta) wrongly directed mind Dh.42=Ud.39 [cp. BSk. mithyāpraṇidhāna Divy 14]. --patha wrong road, wrong course Vbh.145 (lit. & fig.; in exegesis of diṭṭhi, cp. Nd² taṇhā III,; Dhs.381; DhsA.253). (Page 532)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】不真实，谎言，错误的，错误地，邪。 ~kammanta, 【阳】邪业。 ~gahaṇa, 【中】错误的观念。 ~cāra, 【阳】错误的行为。 ~cārī, 【形】错误地举止者。 ~diṭṭhi, 【阴】邪见，异端。 ~paṇihita, 【形】误导的。~vācā, 【阴】邪语。 ~vāyāma, 【阳】邪精进。 ~saṅkappa, 【阳】邪思维。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Micchācāra: {'def': '(梵kāma-mithyācāra) ,【阳】邪欲。Atthasālinī(殊胜义) (DhsA.p.98.)︰‘Kāmesu micchācāro’ti ettha pana ‘kāmesū’ti methunasamācāresu; ‘micchācāro’ti ekantanindito lāmakācāro. Lakkhaṇato pana asaddhammādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanā kāmesumicchācāro. (「邪欲乐行」（邪淫）里的「欲乐」是指「性交」；「邪行」是指「低贱及实应受到谴责的行为」。「邪欲乐行」的特相是生起於身门的思（cetanā，意愿），具有侵犯自己无权同其行房者的不如法意念。) Tattha agamanīyaṭṭhānaṁ nāma--purisānaṁ tāva (1)māturakkhitā, (2)piturakkhitā, (3)mātāpiturakkhitā, (4)bhāturakkhitā, (5)bhaginirakkhitā, (6)ñātirakkhitā, (7)gottarakkhitā, (8)dhammarakkhitā, (9)sārakkhā, (10)saparidaṇḍāti māturakkhitādayo dasa; (1)dhanakkītā, (2)chandavāsinī, (3)bhogavāsinī, (4)paṭavāsinī, (5)odapattakinī, (6)obhaṭacumbaṭā, (7)dāsī ca bhariyā, (8)kammakārī ca bhariyā, (9)dhajāhaṭā, (10)muhuttikāti etā dhanakkītādayo dasāti vīsati itthiyo. Itthīsu pana dvinnaṁ sārakkhasaparidaṇḍānaṁ, dasannañca dhanakkītādīnanti dvādasannaṁ itthīnaṁ aññe purisā idaṁ agamanīyaṭṭhānaṁ nāma.( 於此，不正确(男人无权与之行房者)是：（甲）十种未婚女人，即：一、为母所护；二、为父所护；三、为父母所护；四、为兄弟所护；五、为姐妹所护；六、为亲戚所护；七、为族人所护；八、为宗教导师所护；九、已订婚；十、正受惩罚；以及（乙）十种已婚女人，即：一、以钱财买来（的妻子）；二、自愿为人妻者；三、为了财富而为人妻者；四、为了服饰而为人妻者；五、由双亲执行婚礼，把新郎新娘之手浸入一只碗里的水，而如法地成为人妻者；六、从社会阶级较低阶层里获得的妻子；七、奴隶妻；八、佣人妻；九、战俘妻；十、短暂的妻子。当中，有十二种女人是其他男人不可侵犯的，即：已订婚和正受惩罚的女人，以及后面十种（已婚女人）。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Micchādiṭṭhi: {'def': '【阴】邪见，异端。SA.45.1~2./III,116.：Micchādiṭṭhīti ayāthāvadiṭṭhi aniyyānikadiṭṭhi.(邪见：错误的见解和无利可图的见解)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Micchājīva: {'def': '﹐【阳】邪命(错误的生计方式)。D.30./III,176.：micchājīvaṁ pahāya sammā-ājīvena jīvikaṁ kappesi, tulākūṭa kaṁsakūṭa mānakūṭa ukkoṭana vañcana nikati sāciyoga chedana vadha bandhana viparāmosa ālopa sahasākārā paṭivirato ahosi.(舍邪命，以正命为营生，远离：欺斗秤、伪币、错误的尺寸、贿赂、欺瞒、诈欺、走后门、(用手对众生)斩切、屠宰、(以粗绳)捆绑、(山中及树丛中)拦劫、(村、城等)抢劫、打家劫舍。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mid: {'def': '﹐【字根III.】油滑、假殷勤(to be unctuous)，爱(to love)，变湿(to wet)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Middha: {'def': '【中】惛沉，睡意。 ~dhī, 【形】处于睡眠状态的，昏昏欲睡的。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹middh迟钝)﹐【中】睡眠(迟钝torpor, 笨拙stupidity, 呆滞sluggishness。DhsA.378. gives “medhatī ti middhaṁ.”)。Abhidhammatthavibhāvinīṭīkā(阿毘达摩义广释)：Middhanaṁ middhaṁ, vigatasāmatthiyatā, asattivighāto vā, tattha thinaṁ cittassa akammaññatālakkhaṇaṁ, middhaṁ vedanādikkhandhattayassāti ayametesaṁ viseso.(诸睡眠都是‘睡眠’，别离能力性，破坏而无能力，昏沉，不适合工作相，三种受蕴等睡眠，这是它们的差别。)。《法集论》Dhammasaṅgaṇī#1163(PTS:1157；CS:p.233)：Tattha katamaṁ middhaṁ? Yā kāyassa 1akallatā 2akammaññatā 3onāho 4pariyonāho 5antosamorodho 6middhaṁ 7soppaṁ 8pacalāyikā 9soppaṁ 10supanā 11supitattaṁ--idaṁ vuccati middhaṁ.(什么是‘睡眠’？那个心所是1不聪明的、2不适合工作、3遮盖、4完全遮盖、5自己迟钝、6睡眠、7睡觉、8打瞌睡、9沉觉、10睡觉、11睡状，称为睡眠。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】睡意，呆滞。middhī,【形】处於睡眠状态的，昏昏欲睡的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [orig. pp. perhaps to Vedic mid (?) to be fat=medh, as DhsA.378 gives “medhatī ti middhaṁ.” -- More likely however connected with Sk. methi (pillar=Lat. meta), cp. Prk. medhi. The meaning is more to the point too, viz. “stiff.” Thus semantically identical with thīna. -- BSk. also middha, e. g. Divy 555] torpor, stupidity, sluggishness D.I,71 (thīna°); Sn.437; A.V,18; Dhs.1157; Miln.299, 412 (appa° not slothful, i. e. diligent, alert); Vism.450 (°rūpa; +rogarūpa, jātirūpa, etc., in def. of rūpa); DA.I,211 (expl^d as cetasika gelañña: see on this passage Dhs.trsl. §1155); Sdhp.459. -- See thīna. (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Middhin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. middha] torpid, drowsy, sluggish Dh.325 (=thīnamiddh’âbhibhūta DhA.IV,16). (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Midha: {'def': '[does it refer to mī² as in mināti², or to middha?] is given as root in meaning “hiṁsana,” to hurt at Dhtm 536 (with var. v.v ll.), not sure. (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Miga: {'def': '[Vedic mṛga, to mṛj, cp. magga, meaning, when characterised by another attribute “wild animal” in general, animal of the forest; when uncharacterised usually antelope] 1. a wild animal, an animal in its natural state (see cpds.). -- 2. a deer, antelope, gazelle. Various kinds are mentioned at J.V,416; two are given at Nd² 509, viz. eṇi (antelope) & sarabha (red deer): see under eṇi & sarabha. -- Sn.39, 72; J.I,154; III,270 (called Nandiya); PvA.62, 157. On miga in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 123, where more refs. are given.

--âdhibhū king of beasts (i. e. the lion) Sn.684. --inda king of beasts (id.) Sdhp.593. --chāpaka young of a deer VvA.279. --dāya deer park J.IV,430 (Maddakucchi); VvA.86 (Isipatana). --dhenu a hind J.I,152; DhA.III,148. --bhūta (having become) like a wild animal, M.I,450 (°bhūtena cetasā). --mandalocana the soft eye of the deer Vv 64¹¹; Pv.I,11⁵. See under manda. --rājā king of the beasts (the lion) D.III,23 sq. --luddaka deer-hunter J.I,372; III,49, 184; DhA.II,82; VbhA.266 (in simile). --vadha deer-slaying J.I,149. --vittaka, amateur of hunting J.IV,267. --visāna a deer’s horn Pug.56. --vīthi deer-road J.I,372. (Page 532)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】畜牲，四脚动物，鹿。 ~chāpaka, ~potaka, 【阳】鹿崽。 ~taṇhikā, 【阴】海市蜃楼。 ~dāya, 【阳】鹿园。 ~mada, 【阳】麝香鹿。 ~mātukā, 【阴】鼷鹿（原产于中非、印度和东南亚的热带雨林区的几种〔水鼷鹿属或鼷鹿属〕动物中任何一种，该动物小而似鹿且无角—亦称鼠鹿）。 ~luddaka, 【阳】捕鹿猎人。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】畜牲，四脚动物，鹿。migachāpaka, migapotaka,【阳】小鹿。migataṇhikā,【阴】海市蜃楼。migadāya,【阳】鹿园。migamada,【阳】麝香鹿。migamātukā,【阴】鼷鹿(原产於中非、印度和东南亚的热带雨林区的几种〔水鼷鹿属或鼷鹿属〕动物中任何一种，该动物小而似鹿且无角—亦称鼠鹿)。migaluddaka,【阳】捕鹿猎人。migava,【中】狩猎。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Migava: {'def': '【中】狩猎。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Migavā: {'def': '(f.) [=Sk. mṛgayā, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 46¹] hunt, hunting, deer-stalking PvA.154 (°padesa). Usually in devasikaṁ migavaṁ gacchati to go out for a day’s hunting J.IV,267; or as pp. ekadivasaṁ migavaṁ gata VvA.260; ekāhaṁ m. g. Mhvs 5, 154. (Page 532)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Miginda: {'def': '(miga畜牲+inda王),【阳】畜王，狮子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】畜王，狮子。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Migāramātu-pāsāda: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Mṛgāramātṛ-prasāda] 鹿母講堂 [舍衛城の東郊の東園 Pubbārāma にある].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Migī: {'def': '(f.) [f. of miga, cp. Epic Sk. mṛgī] a doe Th.1, 109; J.V,215; VI,549; DhA.I,48. (Page 532)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】雌鹿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】雌鹿。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mihati: {'def': 'is given as root mih in 2 meanings at Dhtp, viz. (1) īsa-hasana (No. 328), i. e. a kind of laugh, for smi, as in mihita. (2) secana (No. 342). (Page 534)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mihita: {'def': '(=sita),【中】微笑。台语：微微仔笑bi5 bi5 a2 chio3，文文子笑bun5 bun5 a2 chio3。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】微笑。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of smi; this is the inverted-diæretic (Pāli) form (smita›*hmita›*mhita›mihita) for the other (Sk.) form smita (q. v.). The Dhtp (328) puts root down as mih] a smile J.III,419; V,452; VI,504. --mihita-pubba with smiles Th.1, 460 (spelt mhita°); J.VI,221 (=sita C.). -- Cp. vimhaya, vimhāpaka, vimhita. (Page 534)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Milakkha: {'def': '【阳】野蛮人。milakkhadesa,【阳】野蛮国(野蛮人居住的)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Ved. Sk. mleccha barbarian, root mlecch, onomat. after the strange sounds of a foreign tongue, cp. babbhara & mammana] a barbarian, foreigner, outcaste, hillman S.V,466; J.VI,207; DA.I,176; SnA 236 (°mahātissa-thera Np.), 397 (°bhāsā foreign dialect). The word occurs also in form milakkhu (q. v.). (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】野蛮人。 ~desa, 【阳】野蛮国（野蛮人居住的）。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Milakkhu: {'def': '[the Prk. form (A-Māgadhī, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. 105, 233) for P. milakkha] a non-Aryan D.III,264; Th.1, 965 (°rajana “of foreign dye” trsl.; Kern, Toev. s. v. translates “vermiljoen kleurig”). As milakkhuka at Vin.III,28, where Bdhgh expl^s by “Andha-Damil’ādi.” (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Milinda: {'def': '（国王名）弥林达，（古音译：）弥兰陀，弥兰王', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Milinda-pañhā: {'def': 'm. pl. ミりンダ王の問い, 弥蘭王問経 [漢訳那先比丘経].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Millikā: {'def': 'at PvA.144 in passage paṁsukūlaṁ dhovitv-âbhisiñcimillikañ ca katvā adāsi is to be read either as “abhisiñci cimillikañ ca k.” or “abhisiñcitvā mudukañ ca k.” (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Milāca: {'def': '[by-form to milakkha, viâ *milaccha›*milacca› milāca: Geiger, P.Gr. 62²; Kern, Toev. s. v.] a wild man of the woods, non-Aryan, barbarian J.IV,291 (not with C.=janapadā), cp. luddā m. ibid., and milāca-puttā J.V,165 (where C. also expl^s by bhojaputta, i. e. son of a villager). (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Milāta: {'def': '[pp. of milāyati] faded, withered, dried up J.I,479; V,473; Vism.254 (°sappa-piṭṭhi, where KhA 49 in same passage reads “milāta-dham(m)ani-piṭṭhi”); DhA.I,335; IV,8 (sarīra), 112; SnA 69 (°mālā, in simile); Mhvs 22, 46 (a°); Sdhp.161. (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Milāyati的【过分】), 已凋谢。milatā,【阴】已褪色。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Milātatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. milāta] only neg. a° the (fact of) not being withered J.V,156. (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Milāyati: {'def': '(milā + ya), 褪色，凋谢。【过】 ~lāyi。【现分】 milāyamāna。【独】~yitvā。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic mlā, to become soft; ldg. *melā & *mlei, as in Gr. blac, blakeu/w to languish; Lat. flaccus withered (=flaccid); Lith. blakà weak spot; also Gr. blhxrόs weak. -- Dhtp 440: “milā=gatta-vimāne” (i. e. from the bent limbs); Dhtm 679 id.] to relax, languish, fade, wither S.I,126; It.76; J.I,329; V,90. -- Caus. milāpeti [Sk. mlāpayati] to make dry, to cause to wither J.I,340 (sassaṁ); fig. to assuage, suppress, stifle J.III,414 (taṇhaṁ). -- pp. milāta. (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(milā+ya), 褪色，凋谢。【过】milāyi。【现分】milāyamāna。【独】milāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Minana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. mi to measure, fix, construct] measuring, surveying DA.I,79; DhsA.123. (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mināti: {'def': '² [Vedic mināti, mī (or mi), to diminish; cp. Gr. minu/w diminish; Lat. minor=E. minor; Goth. mins (little), compar, minniza, superl. minnists=Ger. mindest. -- The Dhtp 502 gives mi with “hiṁsā,” the Dhtm 725 with “hiṁsana.” It applies the same interpretation to a root midh (Dhtm 536), which is probably abstracted fr. Pass. mīyati] to diminish; also: to hurt, injure. Very rare, only in some prep. comb^ns. -- See also mīyati. (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [roots (Vedic) mā & mi; pres. minūte & minoti; Idg. *me, cp. Sk. mātra measure, māna; Av. mā-, mitiḥ measure; Gr. mάtion small measure, mh_tis counsel Lat.; metior, mensis, modus; Goth. mēla bushel; Ags. maed measure (cp. E. mete, meet= fitting); Lith. m&etilde;tas year. -- The Dhtm 726 gives mi in meaning “pamāṇa”] to measure VbhA.108 (see etym. of mitta); Pot. mine J.V,468 (=mineyya C.); fut. minissati Sdhp.585. ger. minitvā Vism.72; grd. minitabba J.V,90. -- Pass. mīyati: see anu°, -- pp. mita. -- Cp. anu°, abhi°, ni°, pa°, vi°. Caus. māpeti (q. v.). (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Misati: {'def': '[miṣ, Vedic miṣati, root given as misa at Dhtm 479, with explⁿ “mīlane”] to wink (one’s eyes): see ni°. (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Missa: {'def': '(adj.) [orig. pp. of miś, cp. Vedic miśra. Sk. miśrayati, mekṣayati; Gr. mi/gnumi & miζgw; Lat. misceo, mixtus; Ags. miscian=mix; Ohg. miskan. -- Dhtp 631 “sammissa”] 1. mixed (with: --°); various Vin.I,33 (kesa°, jatā° etc.=a mixture of, various); Th.1, 143; J.III,95, 144 (udaka-paṇṇa° yāgu); Pv.I,9² (missā kiṭakā). nt. missaṁ as adv. “in a mixed way” Vism.552=VbhA.161 (+dvidhā). -- 2. accompanied by (-°), having company or a retinue, a title of honour in names, also as polite address [cp. Sk. miśra & āraya miśra] J.V,153 (Voc. f. misse), 154 (f. missā). -- 3. missa° is changed to missī in compⁿ with kṛ and bhū (like Sk.), thus in missī-bhāva (sexual) intercourse, lit. mixed state, union J.II,330; IV,471; V,86; VbhA.107; and missī-bhūta mixed, coupled, united J.V,86 (=hatthena hatthaṁ gahetvā kāya-missībhāvaṁ upagata C.). Cp. sam.°

--kesī (f.) “mixed hair,” Ep. of a heavenly maiden or Apsaras Vv 60¹⁴ (expl^d at VvA.280 as “ratta-mālādīhi missita-kesavaṭṭī”). The m. missa-kesa occurs as a term for ascetics (with muṇḍa) at Vism.389. (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'missaka(orig. pp. of miw),【形】1.混合(mixed)。2.组合的(accompanied by)。3.性交，交陪(博感情)，联合(missa° is changed to missī in compn with kr and bhū (like Sk.), thus in missī-bhāva (sexual) intercourse, lit. mixed state, union)。missībhūta, 混合，偶合，联合(mixed, coupled, united)。【反】amissībhāva﹐未混合。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'missaka, 【形】混合，组合的。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Missaka: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. missa] 1. mixed, combined J.II,8 (phalika° rajata-pabbata mountain of silver mixed with crystal); VbhA.16 (lokiya-lokuttara°); usually °-, like °āhāra mixed food DhA.II,101; °uppāda mixed portents, a main chapter of the art of prognosticating (cp. Bṛhat-Saṁhitā ch. 86: miśrak’âdhyāya) Miln.178; °bhatta=°āhāra SnA 97; Mhbv 27. -- 2. (m.) an attendant, follower; f. missikā DhA.I,211 (Sāmāvati°). ‹-› 3. (nt.) N. of a pleasure grove in heaven (lit. the grove of bodily union), one of the 3: Nandana, M., Phārusaka J.VI,278; Vism.424. -- 4. (pl. missakā) a group of devas, mentioned at D.II,260 in list of popular gods (cp. missa 2 and missakesī). (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'm. [BSk. Miśraka] ① 眉沙, 雑種 [三十三天の園林] . ② 眉沙迦 [セイロンにある山, 現在の Mihintale].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Missakatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. missaka] mixing, mixture, combination with (-°) Tikp 291. (Page 534)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Missana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. misseti] mixing Dhtp 338. (Page 534)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Misseti: {'def': '(miss+e), 混合。【过】missesi。【现分】missenta。【独】missetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of miś, Vedic miśrayati] 1. to mix Miln.126 (mayaṁ missayissāma); PvA.191 (palāse sālīhi saddhiṁ). -- 2. to bring together in cohabitation, to couple J.V,154 (C.: kilesana misseti). -- pp. missita. (Page 534)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(miss + e), 混合。【过】 ~esi。【现分】 ~senta。【独】 ~setvā。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Missita: {'def': '[pp. of misseti] mixed, intermingled Sn.243; J.V,460; PvA.198 (dhañña sāsapa-tela°); VvA.280 (see under missa-kesī). (Page 534)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Misseti’混合’的【过分】) 混合、混杂。【反】amissita﹐未混合。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mita: {'def': '[Vedic mita, pp. of mā, mināti, to measure; also in meaning “moderate, measured,” cp. in same sense Gr. mέtrios] measured, in measure D.I,54 (doṇa° a doṇa measure full); Sn.300 (bhāgaso m. measured in harmonious proportions, i. e. stately); Pv.I,10¹³ (id.); J.III,541. --amita unlimited, without measure, boundless, in Ep. amit-ābha of boundless lustre Sdhp.255. Also N. of a Buddha.

--āhāra measured, i. e. limited food Sn.707. --bhāṇin speaking measuredly, i. e. in moderation Dh.227; J.IV,252. (Page 532)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Miṇāti’量’的【过分】；Vedic mita, pp. of mā, mināti, to measure; also in meaning “moderate, measured”)已度量(measured, in measure)。mitabhāṇī(mitabhāṇin),【阳】话说得适当者。mitamita, 无限量、没有度量(unlimited, without measure, boundless. Also name of a Buddha)。mitāhāra, 度量(measured, i. e. limited food Sn.707. speaking measuredly, i. e. in moderation Dh.227; J.IV.252.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mithu: {'def': '【无】轮流，交替地，秘密地。 ~bheda, 【阳】联盟的瓦解。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】轮流，交替地，秘密地。mithubheda,【阳】联盟的瓦解。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [cp. Vedic mithū & P. micchā; mith, cp. mithaḥ alternately, Av. miqō wrongly; Goth. misso one another, missa-leiks different; Ger. E. prefix mis- i. e. wrongly: Ger. missetat wrong doing=misdeed; Lat. mūto to change, mutuus reciprocal; Goth. maipms present=Ags. mapum; mith in Vedic Sk. is “to be opposed to each other,” whereas in Vedic mithuna the notion of “pair” prevails. See also methuna] opposite, reciprocally, contrary Sn.825, 882 (taken by Nd¹ 163 & 290, on both passages identically, as n. pl. of adj. instead of adv., & expl^d by “dve janā dve kalaha-kāraka” etc.).

--bheda [evidently in meaning of mitta-bheda “break of friendship,” although mithu means “adversary,” thus perhaps “breaking, so as to cause opposition”] breaking of alliance, enmity D.II,76; J.IV,184 (here with v. l. mitta°); Kvu 314. (Page 532)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mithuna: {'def': '【中】一对男女。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】爱侣(loving couple)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mitta: {'def': '(cp. Vedic mitra, m. & nt., friend; Av. mipro, friend),【阳】【中】朋友。Mittaddu(Sk. mitra-druha), mittadubbhi, mittadūbhī,【阳】出卖朋友的人，叛逆的人(also in foll. forms: mittadubbha; mittadūbha; mittadūbhin [cp. Sk. mittadrohin])。mittapatirūpaka,【形】损友(a false friend, one pretending to be a friend D.31./III,185.︰是敌而似友(amittā mittapatirūpakā)：一、拿去任何物者(añña-d-atthu-haro)。二、光说不练者(vacīparamo)。三、谄媚者(anuppiyabhāṇī)。四、损友者(apāyasahāyo))。(The qualities of a Good friend are he who 1.gives what is hard to give (dana), 2.does what is hard to do, 3.hears what is hard to hear or bear, 4.confess (shares) his own secret with you, 5.keeps others’ secrets, 6.in need, forsake one not) 7. despises not when one is in ruin.)。mittabheda,【阳】绝交，断绝友情，瓦解联盟。mittasanthava,【阳】朋友关系。āgārikamitta,在家人的朋友(a house- or lay-friend)。Anāgārikamitta,出家人的朋友(a homeless- or clericalfriend)。kalyāṇa-mitta,善友(mentor, or spiritual adviser)。ñāti-sālohitamitta,有血缘关系的朋友(blood-relations; cp. ñāti-mittā relatives & friends Pv.I.59)。【反】sapatta, 敌人( enemy PvA.13)。amitta, 非友(a sham friend or enemy)。pāpa-mitta, 恶友、坏朋友(bad friend)。mittābhirādhin, 满意的朋友(one who pleases his friends J.IV.274 (=mittesu adubbhamāno C.) mittavaṇṇa, 虚假的朋友(pretence of friendship, a sham friendship Pv IV.86 (=mitta-rūpa, mitta-paṭirūpatā PvA.268)。Kavidappaṇanīti(诗人镜子格言)#238：Na vissase amittassa, mittañcāpi na vissase;Kadāci kupite mitte, sabbadosaṁ pakāsati.(可别亲信那不是朋友的人，并且，即使朋友也不应(轻)信；(因为)一当朋友(反目，)生气之时，他会将(你的)所有缺点(大加)宣扬。)vissase, pt.3sg. ‹ vi-(s)sas, vissasati，愿望式表「劝告」，「(不)应亲爱、信赖」// amittassa ‹ a-mitta, m.Gen.sg.，信赖(vissasati)之「处」(对象)习惯用「属格」或「处格」。mitte, m.Loc.sg. 表信赖之「处」// cāpi = ca api。kadāci = kadā-ci, 「疑问词」kadā (何时)后接 -ci变成「不定词」(某时) // kupite, mitte,均为m.Loc.sg.，此为「独立处格结构」 (Loctive Absolute)，表「时机」。sabbadosaṁ ‹ sabba-dosa // pakāsaye, Opt. 3sg. ‹ (p)pa-kās, pakāseti (pakāsayati)，愿望式表「可能」，「将会宣扬」。amittā mitta-paṭirūpakā(非友似友)。mittā suhadā(善心之友)。mittapaṭirūpaka﹐非友似友。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳、中】朋友。 ~ddu, ~dubbhi, ~dūbhī, 【阳】出卖朋友的人，叛逆的人。 ~patirūpaka, 【形】损友。 ~bheda, 【阳】绝交，断绝友情，瓦解联盟。 ~santhava, 【阳】结交朋友。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. nt.) [cp. Vedic mitra, m. & nt., friend; Av. mipro, friend] friend. Usually m., although nt. occurs in meaning “friend,” in sg. (Nett 164) & pl. (Sn.185, 187); in meaning “friendship” at J.VI,375 (=mittabhāva C.). The half-scientific, half-popular etym. of mitta, as given at VbhA.108, is “mettāyantī ti mittā, minantī ti vā m.; sabba-guyhesu anto pakkhipantī ti attho” (the latter: “they enclose in all that is hidden”). -- Two kinds of friends are distinguished at Nd² 510 (in exegesis of Sn.37 & 75), viz. āgārika° (a house- or lay-friend) and anāgārika° (a homeless- or clericalfriend). The former is possessed of all ordinary qualities of kindness and love, the latter of special virtues of mind & heart. -- A friend who acts as a sort of Mentor, or spiritual adviser, is called a kalyāṇa-mitta (see under kalyāṇa). -- Mitta is often comb^d with similar terms, devoting relationship or friendship, e. g. with amaccā colleagues and ñāti-sālohita° blood-relations, in ster. phrase at Vin.II,126; A.I,222; Sn.p. 104; PvA.28; cp. ñāti-mittā relatives & friends Pv.I,5⁹; suhada (“dear heart”) D.III,187 (four types, cp. m. paṭirūpaka); suhajja one who is dear to one’s heart PvA.191; sahāya companion PvA.86. The neut. form occurs for kind things D.III,188; S.I,37. -- Opp. sapatta enemy PvA.13; amitta a sham friend or enemy Sn.561 (=paccatthika SnA 455); D.III,185. pāpa-mitta bad friend PvA.5. -- For refs. see e. g. Sn.58, 255, 296, 338; Dh.78, 375.

--âbhirādhin one who pleases his friends J.IV,274 (=mittesu adubbhamāno C.) --ddu [cp. Sk. mitra-druha] one who injures or betrays his friends S.I,225; Sn.244; J.IV,260; also in foll. forms: °dubbha Pv.II,9³ (same passage at J.IV,352; V,240; VI,310, 375); °dūbha J.IV,352; VI,310; °dūbhin [cp. Sk. °drohin] J.IV,257; V,97 (°kamma); VI,375; DhA.II,23. --paṭirūpaka a false friend, one pretending to be a friend D.III,185 (four types: añña-d-atthu-hara, vacī-parama, anuppiyabhāṇin, apāya-sahāya, i. e. one who takes anything, one who is a great talker, one who flatters, one who is a spendthrift companion.) --bandhava a relation in friendship, one who is one’s relative as a friend Nd² 455 (where Nd¹ 11 has manta-bandhava). --bheda see mithu-bheda --vaṇṇa pretence of friendship, a sham friendship Pv IV.8⁶ (=mitta-rūpa, m.-paṭirūpatā PvA.268). (Page 532)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mittatā: {'def': 'Mittatā-, (abstr. fr. mitta) ,【阴】友谊(state of being a friend, friendship, in kalyāṇamittatā being a good friend)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) --(°) [abstr. fr. mitta] state of being a friend, friendship, in kalyāṇa° being a good friend, friendship as a helper (see kalyāṇa) D.III,274; Vism.107. (Page 532)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mitti: {'def': '(f.) [a by-form of metti] friendship J.I,468 (=metti C.). (Page 532)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(a by-form of metti) ,【阴】友谊(friendship J.I.468 (=metti C.))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Miyyati: {'def': 'mīyati (mar+ya, mar 被改成 miy 和 mī), 死。【现分】mīyamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& Mīyati) [corresponding to Vedic mriyate, fr. mṛ, viâ *mīryate›miyyati. See marati] to die. -- (a) miyyati: Sn.804; Nett 23. med. 3^rd pl. miyyare Sn.575; pot. miyye J.VI,498; ppr. miyyamāna M.III,246; Vism.49; fut. miyyissati M.III,246. -- (b) mīyati (influenced in form by jīyati & mīyati of mināti²): M.III,168 (jāyati jīyati mīyati); J.III,189; Dh.21; pot. mīyetha D.II,63. ppr. mīyamāna S.I,96. -- pp. mata. (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'mīyati (mar + ya, mar 被改成 miy 和 mī), 死。【现分】 mīyamāna。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Miñja: {'def': '(nt.) & miñjā (f.) [Vedic majjan (fr. majj?); on form see Geiger. P.Gr. § 9¹, & cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. §§ 74, 101] marrow, pith, kernel Vin.I,25 (in sequence chavi, camma, maṁsa, nahāru, aṭṭhi, miñjā); Vism.235 (id.); Kh III, (aṭṭhi°, f. cp. KhA 52, nt.); J.IV,402 (tāla° pith of the palm); Mhvs 28. 28 (panasa°, f., kernels of the seeds of the jak-fruit).

--rāsi heap of marrow Vism.260 (=matthalunga). (Page 532)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】miñjā,【阴】核心，髓，精华。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 miñjā, 【阴】核心，髓，精华。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Miñjaka: {'def': '=miñja, only in tela° inner kernels of tila-seed, made into a cake PvA.51. See doṇī². (Page 532)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Miḷhakā: {'def': 'at S.II,228 is to be read mīḷhakā (q. v.). (Page 533)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Miṇana: {'def': '【中】测量。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】测量。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Miṇāti: {'def': '(mi + ṇā), 量，秤重，称。【过】 miṇi。【过分】 mita。【现分】 miṇanta。【独】 miṇitvā。【不】 miṇituŋ。【被】 miṇīyati。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(mi+ṇā), 量，秤重，称。【过】miṇi。【过分】mita。【现分】miṇanta。【独】miṇitvā。【不】miṇituṁ。【被】miṇīyati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Moca: {'def': '² [root-noun of moc, Caus. of muc] delivery, setting free Dhtm 631, 751, where Dhtp in same context reads mocana. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】芭蕉(plantain tree；Musa paradisiaca sapientum) 亚洲热带的土产，具软的草质的茎，单叶非常大，花由一顔色的总苞包著，并聚集下垂成一串，其中的每一朵花都产生一单个的无籽的果实)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [cp. *Sk. moca & mocā] the plantain or banana tree’Musa, sapientum Vin.I,246 (°pāna drink made fr. M. s.; one of the 8 permitted drinks); J.IV,181; V,405, 465. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】芭蕉（(Musa paradisiaca sapientum) 亚洲热带的土产，但在整个热带都有栽培或引种，具软的草质的茎，单叶非常大，花由一些一颜色的总芭包着，并聚集成一个大的下垂的串，其中的每一朵花都产生一单个的常常是无籽的果实，而且通常仅通过在植物基部形成的根出条进行营养繁殖）。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mocana: {'def': '【中】释放。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】释放。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. moceti] 1. setting free, delivering DhA.III,199 (parissayā°); Dhtp 376, 539; Dhtm 609. Cp. moca². -- 2. letting loose, discharging, in assu° shedding tears PvA.18. Cp. vi°. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mocaya: {'def': '(adj.) [quâsi grd. formation fr. moceti] to be freed, able to escape, in dum° difficult to obtain freedom J.VI,234. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mocetar: {'def': '[M. ag. fr. moceti] one who sets free, a deliverer Nd¹ 32. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Moceti: {'def': '[Caus. of muñcati] 1. to deliver, set free, release, cause one’s release or deliverance from (Abl.). imper. praes. mocehi Pv.II,1⁶ (duggatiyā); PvA.12; aor. mocesi PvA.112 (dāsavyato); ger. mocetvā PvA.8, 77; inf. mocetuṁ PvA.45 (petalokato). -- 2. to discharge, emit (semen in coitu) Vin.III,36, 39 (as Caus II.), 110. -- 3. to let loose, set into motion, stir: padaṁ m. to run J.III,33. -- 4. to discharge, fulfil: paṭiññaṁ one’s promise DhA.I,93. -- 5. to unharness DhA.I,67. -- 6. to detach S.I,44. -- Caus. II. mocāpeti to cause to be freed, to give freedom, to let loose Vin.IV,316 (opp. bandhāpeti). (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(muc+e), 释放，解脱。【过】mocesi。【过分】mocita。【现分】mocenta。【独】mocetvā, mociya。【不】mocetuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(muc + e), 释放，解脱。【过】 ~esi。【过分】mocita。【现分】 mocenta。【独】 mocetvā, mociya。【不】 mocetuŋ。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mocāpana: {'def': '【中】导致个人的自由，救出。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. Caus. II. mocāpeti] causing one’s freedom, deliverance J.VI,134. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】导致个人的自由，救出。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mocāpeti: {'def': 'Mocāpayati(Moceti的【使】) 使被释放。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Modaka: {'def': '【阳】球状的甜肉。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic. Sk. modaka in meaning 1] 1. a sort of sweetmeat S.I,148; A.I,130; III,76; Pug.32; PvA.4. ‹-› 2. receptacle for a letter, an envelope, wrapper or such like J.VI,385 (paṇṇaṁ °assa anto pakkhipitvā). May, however, be same ạs 1. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】球状的甜肉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Modana: {'def': '【中】 ~nā, 【阴】高兴，享乐。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. mud] satisfaction, rejoicing Sdhp.229. Cp. sam°. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】modanā,【阴】高兴，享乐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Modanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. mud] blending (?); Cy. explⁿ at DhsA.143 of term āmodanā. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Modara: {'def': 'In modara at J.V,54 (of elephant’s teeth) Kern, Toev. s. v. sees a miswriting for medura (full of, beset with), which however does not occur in Pali. The C. explⁿ is “samantato obhāsento,” i. e. shining. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Modati: {'def': '[mud, cp. Vedic moda joy Dhtp 146: tose] to rejoice, to enjoy oneself, to be happy A.III,40; Sn.561; Pv.I,5⁴; II,1²¹. -- pp. mudita (q. v.). For mohayamāna at DhA.I,275 the better reading is modayamāna rejoicing, a ppr. med. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(mud+a), 欢喜，使快乐。【过】modi。【过分】modita。【现分】modamāna。【独】moditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(mud + a), 欢喜，使快乐。【过】 modi。【过分】 modita。【现分】modamāna。【独】 moditvā。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Moggaliputta Tissa: {'def': 'm. 目犍連子帝須 [アソーカ王時代の大長老, 王の師].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Moggallāna: {'def': 'm. [=Mahāmoggallāna, BSk. Maudgalyāyana] 目犍連, 目連 [仏のニ大弟子の一, 神通第一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mogha: {'def': '【形】空的，徒然的，无用的。 ~purisa, 【阳】愚蠢者，没用的人。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】空的，徒然的，无用的。moghapurisa,【阳】愚蠢者，没用的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [the Vedic mogha for the later Sk. moha, which is the P. noun moha; fr. muh. BSk. mohapuruṣa e. g. at AvŚ II.177; MVastu III,440] empty, vain, useless, stupid, foolish D.I,187 (opp. to sacca), 199; Sn.354; Dh.260 (°jiṇṇa grown old in vain; C. expl^s as tuccha-jiṇṇa DhA.III,388); DhA.I,110 (patthanā a futile wish); PvA.194. -- Opp. amogha S.I,232; J.VI,26; DhA.II,34 (°ṁ tassa jīvitaṁ: not in vain).

--purisa a stupid or dense fellow Vin.IV,126, 144. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Moha: {'def': '[fr. muh, see muyhati; cp. Sk. moha & Vedic mogha] stupidity, dullness of mind & soul, delusion, bewilderment, infatuation D.III,146, 175, 182, 214, 270; Vin.IV,144, 145; Sn.56, 74, 160, 638, 847; Vbh.208, 341, 391, 402; Pug.16; Tikp 108, 122, 259. -- Def^d as “dukkhe aññāṇaṁ etc., moha pamoha, sammoha, avijj’ogha etc.,” by Nd² 99 & Vbh.362; as “muyhanti tena, sayaṁ vā muyhati, muyhana-mattaṁ eva vā tan ti moho” and “cittassa andha-bhāva-lakkhaṇo, aññāṇalakkhaṇo vā” at Vism.468. -- Often coupled with rāga & dosa as one of the 3 cardinal affects of citta, making a man unable to grasp the higher truths and to enter the Path: see under rāga (& Nd² p. 237, s. v. rāga where the wide range of application of this set is to be seen). Cp. the 3 fires: rāg-aggi, dos-aggi, moh-aggi It.92; D.III,217 also rāga-kkhaya, dosa°, moha° VbhA.31 sq. -- On combⁿ with rāga, lobha & dosa see dosa² and lobha. -- On term see also Dhs.trsl. §§ 33, 362, 441; Cpd 16, 18, 41, 113, 146. -- See further D.I,80 (samoha-cittaṁ); Nd¹ 15, 16 (with lobha & dosa); VvA.14; PvA.3. --amoha absence of bewilderment Vbh.210 (+alobha, adosa; as the 3 kusala-mūlāni: cp. mūla 3), 402 (id., as kusala-hetu). -- Cp. pa°, sam°.

--antara (personal) quality of bewilderment (lit. having m. inside) Sn.478 (taken by C. as “cause of m.,” i. e. °kāraṇa, °paccaya SnA 411; cp. antara= kāraṇa under antara I 2 b.). --ussada quality of dullness Nd¹ 72, 413. --kkhaya destruction of infatuation Vbh.73; VbhA.51. --carita one whose habit is infatuation Nett 90 (+rāgacarita & dosacarita). --tama the darkness of bewilderment MA 1. --dhamma anything that is bewildering or infatuating Sn.276. --pāruta covered or obstructed by delusion Pv IV.3³⁴. --magga being on the road of infatuation Sn.347. --salla the sting of bewilderment Nd¹ 59. (Page 543)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '愚痴。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '(‹muh, see muyhati; cp. Sk. moha & Vedic mogha),【阳】痴，愚蠢，迷惑(stupidity, dullness of mind & soul, delusion, bewilderment, infatuation )。mohakkhaya,【阳】无知的破坏。mohacarita,【形】愚蠢的习惯。mohatama,【阳】无知的黑暗。mohanīya, mohaneyya,【形】导致糊涂的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】愚蠢，迷惑。 ~kkhaya, 【阳】无知的破坏。 ~carita, 【形】愚蠢的习惯。 ~tama, 【阳】无知的黑暗。 ~nīya, ~neyya, 【形】导致糊涂的。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mohana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. muh as Caus. formⁿ] making dull or stupid, infatuation, enticement, allurement Sn.399, 772 (=mohanā vuccanti pañca kāmaguṇā Nd¹ 26). The Sk. meaning is also “sexual intercourse” (cp. Halāyudha p. 315), which may apply to the Sn.passages SnA 517 (on Sn.772) expl^s “mohanaṁ vuccati kāmaguṇā, ettha hi deva-manussā muyhanti.” (Page 543)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】造成迟钝，诱惑，引诱。mohanaka,【形】使人混乱的，导致迷路的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】造成迟钝，诱惑，引诱。 ~ka, 【形】使人混乱的，导致迷路的。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mohanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. mohana] leading astray, bewildering, leading into error Vin.IV,144. (Page 543)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mohaneyya: {'def': '& Mohanīya (adj.) [grd. formⁿ fr. moha] leading to infatuation A.II,120; III,110; J.III,499. (Page 543)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mohatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. moha] infatuation, bewilderment A.II,120; III,376. (Page 543)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Moheti: {'def': '[Caus. fr. muh, see muyhati & cp. moha] to deceive, to befool, to take in, surprise, delude, aor. 2^nd sg. amohayi Sn.352; 3^rd sg. amohayi S.IV,158= It.58 (maccu-rājan; vv. ll. asamohayi & asamohari); reading somewhat doubtful, cp. similar context Sn.1076 with “sabbesu dhammesu samūhatesu” (v. l. samoha°). -- 3^rd sg. (poet.) also amohayittha Sn.332 (mā vo pamatte viññāya maccurājā amohayittha vasānuge, cp. Sn.ed. p. 58). -- On mohayamāna DhA.I,275 see modati. (Page 543)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(muh+e), 欺骗，愚弄，迷惑(to deceive, to befool, to take in, surprise, delude)。【过】mohesi。【过分】mohita。【独】mohetvā。, aor. 2nd sg. amohayi Sn.352; 3rd sg. amohayi S.IV,158= It.58 (maccurājan; vv. ll. asamohayi & asamohari); reading somewhat doubtful, cp. similar context Sn.1076 with “sabbesu dhammesu samūhatesu” (v. l. samoha°). -- 3rd sg. (poet.) also amohayittha Sn.332', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(muh + e), 欺骗，愚弄，迷惑。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 mohita。【独】mohetvā。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mokkha: {'def': '【阳】释放，自由，解脱。mokkhaka,【形】释放者。mokkhamagga。【阳】导致解脱之道。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [late Vedic & Epic Sk. mokṣa, fr. muc, see muñcati. Dhtp 539 mokkha=mocana; Dhtm 751= moca] 1. (lit.) release, freedom from, in bandhanā m. D.I,73=M.I,276. -- 2. (fig.) release, deliverance, salvation Vbh.426 (jarā-maraṇa° from old age & death); DhA.I,4 (°magga+sagga-magga, the way to heaven & salvation), 89, 90 (°dhamma=salvation) Mhvs 5, 61. -- 3. (lit.) (act.) letting loose, emission, uttering (of speech) J.I,375. -- 4. it may (& prob. ought to) be taken as adj. (=*mokṣya, grd. of Caus. of muc) at Sn.773 (añña°, either=1, as “deliverance for others,” or=4, as “to be delivered by others.” Bdhgh at SnA 516 gives both expl^ns: aññe mocetuṁ (na) sakkonti, kāraṇa-vacanaṁ vā etaṁ: aññena mocetabbā (na) honti). (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】释放，自由，解脱，最后的释放。 ~ka, 【形】释放者。 ~magga。【阳】导致解脱之道。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [fr. mukha 6; Vṛddhi form=*maukhya] the headmost, first, foremost, in series aggo seṭṭho m. uttamo A.II,95, where the customary tradition reads pāmokkha (see under mahā & cp. Nd² 502A). (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mokkhacika: {'def': '(m. or °ā f.) [see on attempt at etym. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1885, 49 who takes mokkha as fr. muc “tumbling” & cika=“turning” fr. cak=cik. The word remains obscure, it must be a dialectical expression, distorted by popular analogy & taken perhaps from a designation of a place where these feats or toys had their origin. More probable than Morris’etym. is an analysis of the word (if it is Aryan) as mokkha= mokkha², in meaning “head, top,” so that it may mean “head over,” top-first” & we have to separate *mokkhac-ika the °ika representing °iya “in the manner of, like” & --ac being the adv. of direction as contained in Sk. prāñc=pra-añc.] tumbling, turning somersaults, an acrobatic feat; in list of forbidden amusements at D.I,6 (cp. DA.I,86; samparivattaka-kīḷanaṁ, i. e. playing with something that rolls along, continuously turning? The foll. sentence however seems to imply turning head over heels: “ākāse vā daṇḍaṁ gahetvā bhūmiyaṁ vā sīsaṁ ṭhapetvā heṭṭh-upariya (so read!) --bhāvena parivattana-kīḷanaṁ”; i. e. trapeze-performing. Cp. Dial. I.10 & Vin. Texts II.184). The list re-occurs at Vin.II,10 (°āya: f.! kīḷanti); III,180; M.I,266≈and A.V,203 (with important v. l. mokkhaṭika, which would imply mokkha & ending tiya, and not °cika at all. The Cy. on this passage expl^s as: daṇḍakaṁ gahetvā heṭṭh-uppariya (sic. as DA.I,86; correct to upariya?) --bhāvena parivattana-kīḷanaṁ). The word is found also at Vin.I,275, where the boy of a Seṭṭhi in Bārāṇasī contracts injuries to his intestines by “mokkhacikāya kīḷanto,” playing (with a) m. -- According to its use with kīḷati & in Instr. mokkhacikena (Nd² 219) may be either a sort of game or an instrument (toy), with which children play. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐【中】倒立。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mokkhaka: {'def': '=mokkha²; thus we should read at J.I,441 for mukkhaka. (Page 541)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mokkhati: {'def': '(mokkh +a), 释放，解救。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(mokkh + a), 释放，解救。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see under muñcati. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Moli: {'def': '(m. & f.) [cp. Epic Sk. mauli, fr. mūla] a chignon; crest, turban J.I,64; V,431; Mhvs 11, 28; DA.I,136 (v. l. moḷi). Also found (as molin, adj.?) in Np. Yama-moli: see under yakkha 5.

--galla (?) fat Vin.I,85 (expl^d by thūla-sarīra; vv. ll. moḷi° & mukalla). --baddha one who has his hair tied into a top-knot 128, 243, 348. (Page 543)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Momuha: {'def': '【形】迟钝的，愚蠢的，糊涂的。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】迟钝的，愚蠢的，糊涂的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Momūha: {'def': '(adj.) [intens.-redupl. formation fr. moha & muh] dull, silly, stupid, infatuated, bewildered (cp. Cpd. 83³) D.I,27; A.III,164 sq.; Sn.840, 841, 1120; Nd¹ 153 (=manda), 192; Nd² 521 (=avidvā etc.); Pug.65. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Momūhatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. momūha] silliness, foolishness, bewilderment of the mind M.I,520; A.III,119, 191, 219 (=mandatta); Pug.69. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mona: {'def': '(fr. muni),【中】智慧，沉著，冷静，沉默(wisdom, character, self-possession)。monattha, 寂默。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. muni, equal to *maunya taken by Nd as root of moneyya] wisdom, character, self-possession Sn.540 (°patha=ñāṇa-patha SnA 435), 718, 723; Nd¹ 57; Nd² 514 A (=ñāṇa & paññā); Th.1, 168 (what is monissaṁ? fut. 1^st sg. of ?). (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】智能，沉着，冷静，沈默。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Moneyya: {'def': '(fr. muni；梵mauneyāṇi),【中】道德完美，寂默(state of a muni, muni-hood; good character, moral perfection)。A.3.122./I,273.(三寂默tīṇi moneyya)：Kāyamoneyyaṁ, vacīmoneyyaṁ, manomoneyyaṁ(身寂默、语寂默、意寂默)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】道德完美。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. muni, cp. Vedic moneya] state of a muni, muni-hood; good character, moral perfection. This is always represented as 3 fold, viz. kāya°, vacī°, mano° (see under muni), e. g. at D.III,220; A.I,273; Nd¹ 57; Nd² 514 A (where also used as adj.: moneyyā dhammā properties of a perfect character). Cp. also Sn.484, 698, 700 sq. On moneyya-kolāhala (forebodings of the highest wisdom) see the latter. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mora: {'def': '【阳】孔雀。 ~piñja, 【中】孔雀的尾部。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[the contracted, regular P. form of *Sk. mayūra, viâ *ma-ūra›mora. See also Geiger, P.Gr. § 27 & Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 166. -- Vedic only mayūrī f. pea-hen] a peacock J.II,275 (°upasevin, see C. on this passage); VI,218, 497; PvA.142; DhA.I,394. A peacock’s tail (sometimes used as a fan) is denoted in var. terms in cpds., as mora-kalāpa DhA.I,387; --piccha Vin.I,186; --piñcha Vin.II,130; --pīñja PvA.142, 176; VvA.147; --sikali (?) KhA 49; --hattha Vv 33⁴⁴ (=mayūra-piñjehi kataṁ makasa-vījaniṁ); Pv III,1¹⁷. Perhaps also as morakkha “a peacock’s eye” at VbhA.63 (morakkhaka loha, a kind of copper, grouped with pisācaloha). It is more likely however that morakkha is distorted fr. *mauryaka, patronymic of mura, a local (tribal) designation (cp. murala), then by pop. etym. connected with mora peacock. With this cp. Sk. moraka “a kind of steel” BR. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】孔雀。morapiñja,【中】孔雀的尾部。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Moragu: {'def': '[cp. (scientific) Sk. mayūraka] a tender grass (Achyranthes aspera) Vin.I,196. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Morinī: {'def': '(f.) [fr. mora] a peahen Miln.67. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mosa: {'def': '(°-) (adj.-nt.) [the guṇa (compⁿ) form of musā] belonging to or untruth, false-; only in cpds. --dhamma of a deceitful nature, false, A.V,84 (kāma); Sn.739, 757; & --vajja [fr. musā-vāda] false-speaking, lie, untruth S.I,169; Sn.819, 866, 943; Nd¹ 152, 265; Nd² 515; Vv 12⁶. (Page 543)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 mosana, 【中】窃盗。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】mosana,【中】窃盗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mosalla: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. musala] worthy of being slain (with clubs), punishable A.II,241. (Page 543)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mosavajja: {'def': '【中】不真实。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】不真实。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Motar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. munāti, more likely direct der. fr. muta, pp. of man, q. v.] one who feels (or senses) that which can be felt (or sensed), in phrase “mutaṁ na maññati motabbaṁ (so read) na maññati motāraṁ” he does not identify what is sensed with that which is not sensed, nor with what is to be sensed (motabba) nor with him who senses A.II,25; where motar & motabba correspond to sotar & sotabba & daṭṭhar & daṭṭhabba. The word does not occur in the similar passage M.I,3. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Moḷi: {'def': '【阳】【阴】顶髻，头顶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳、阴】顶髻，头顶。(p259)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Moṭa: {'def': '[BSk. moṭa, Prk. mrḍa: Pischel § 166, 238] see mutoḷī. (Page 542)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mucala: {'def': 'occurs as simplex only in Np. Mahā-mucala-mālaka Mhvs 15, 36. It refers to the tree mucalinda, of which it may be a short form. On the other hand mucal-inda appears to the speaker of Pāli a cp. noun, viz. king of the mucala(s) (trees). Its (late?) Sk. correspondent is mucilinda, of which the P. form may be the regular representative (cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 34). -- 1. the tree Barringtonia acutaṅgula (Nicula*, of which it may be a dialectical distortion: *Abhp 563 nicula›*mucula› *mucala) Vin.I,3; J.V,405 (°ketakā, Dvandva); VI,269 (id.). -- 2. N. of a nāga (serpent) king Vin.I,3. -- 3. N. of a great lake J.VI,534, 535. (Page 535)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mucalinda: {'def': '【阳】锐棱玉蕊 (Barringtonia acutangula)。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】锐棱玉蕊 (Barringtonia acutangula)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Muccati: {'def': '(muc释放+ya)(Vedic muñcati; muc, to release, loosen; with orig. meaning “strip off, get rid of,” hence also “glide”), 舍弃，解脱，被释放。【过】muñci。【过分】mutta﹐muccita。【现分】muccamāna﹐muñcanto。【独】mutvā﹐muñcitvā﹐muñciya。 muñc- & mucc- are differentiated in such a way, that muñc- is the active base, and mucc- the passive. There are however cases where the active forms (muñc-) are used for the passive ones (mucc-), which may be due simply to a misspelling, ñc & cc being very similar. pot. muñcetha; imper. muñca; aor. pl. muñciṁsu; inf. muñcituṁ. -- Caus. II. muñcāpeti. -- B. Passive. pres. muccati; ppr. muccanto, muccamāno, mocento, mocayanto, mocayamāno, mocīyamāno; imper, sg. muccassu; pl. muccatha; pot. muñceyya ; fut. muccissati (=muñcissati); also mokkhasi ; pl. mokkhanti; aor. mucci(ṁsu); inf. muccituṁ. -- Caus. moceti, mocayati. pp. mutta', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(muc + ya), 解脱，被解救，被释放。【过】 mucci。【过分】 mutta。muccita。【现分】 muccamāna。【独】 ~citvā。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mucchana: {'def': '【中】 Mucchanā, mucchā, 【阴】昏晕，无意识，糊涂。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】mucchanā,【阴】昏晕，无意识，糊涂。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mucchanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. mucchati 2] swelling or rising in tone, increase of sound J.II,249 (vīṇaṁ uttama-mucchanāya mucchetvā vādesi). (Page 535)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mucchati: {'def': '(mucch + a), 失去知觉，冲昏头脑，昏倒。【过】 mucchi。【过分】~chita。【现分】 ~chanta。【独】 ~chitvā, mucchiya。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[murch, an enlargement of Vedic mūr to get stiff (as in mūra stupid, dull, cp. Gr. mwrόs; Sk. mūrakha foolish). Used in 2 senses, viz. (a) to become stiff & (b) (Caus.) to harden, increase in tone, make louder. From (a) a fig. meaning is derived in the sense of to become dulled or stupid, viz. infatuated, possessed. ‹-› See also Lüders in K.Z. XLII.194 a. How far we are justified to connect Dhtp 216 mū & 503 mu (“bandhane”) with this root is a different question. These 2 roots seem to be without connections. -- mūrch itself is at Dhtp 50 defined with “mohe”] 1. (spelt muccati) to become stiff, congeal, coagulate, curdle Dh.71; DhA.II,67. -- 2. to become infatuated D.III,43 (majjati+). -- 3. only in Caus. muccheti to make sound, to increase in tone J.II,249 (vīṇaṁ); III,188 (id.). -- pp. mucchita. (Page 535)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(mucch(梵murch)昏倒+a), 1.昏倒(fainting, swoon)，冲昏头脑，昏倒。2.迷恋(infatuation)。【过】mucchi。【过分】mucchita。【现分】mucchanta。【独】mucchitvā, mucchiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mucchañcikatā: {'def': '(°añji°) is probably the correct reading for puñcikatā. -- We find puñcikatā at Dhs.1136, 1230; Vbh.351, 361 (v. l. pucchañji°); DhsA.365; mucchañci° at Nd¹ 8 & Nd² p. 152; pucchañji° at VbhA.477. The meaning is “agitation,” as seen from explⁿ of term at DhsA.365 (“wagging of a dog’s tail,” pucchaṁ cāleti), and VbhA.477 (“lābhan’âlābhanaka-ṭhāne vedhanā kampanā nīcavuttatā”). -- The etym. explⁿ is difficult; we may take it as a (misunderstood) corruption of *mucch-aṅgi-kata i. e. mucchā+aṅga+kṛ “being made stiff-of-limbs,” or “swoon.” Psychologically we may take “swoon” as the climax of agitation, almost like “hysterics.” A similar case of a similar term of swooning being interpreted by Bdhgh as “wavering” (cal) is chambhitatta “paralysis,” expl^d as “sakalasarīra calanaṁ” at DA.I,50. -- The expression mucchañcikatā reminds us of the term kaṭukañcukatā. (Page 535)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mucchita: {'def': '见 Mucchati。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of mucchati] 1. fainted, swooning, in a faint J.I,243; DhA.II,112; PvA.62, 174, 258. -- 2. distraught, infatuated S.I,61, 204; A.I,274; D.III,46 (a°); It.92; J.III,432; V,274 (C. for pagiddha & gadhita). ‹-› Cp. pa°. (Page 535)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(mucchati的【过分】),已失去知觉，已冲昏头脑，已昏倒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mucchā: {'def': '(fr. mūrch),【阴】1.昏倒(fainting, swoon)。2.热恋、著迷(infatuation )。kāmamucchā, 慾醉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. mūrch] 1. fainting, swoon PvA.174. -- 2. infatuation A.II,10 (kāma°). Sn.328; Dhs.1059. (Page 535)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mudati: {'def': '[for modati?] in exegetical explⁿ of “muti” at VbhA.412: mudatī ti muti. See muti. (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mudayantī: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. modayantī] a certain plant, perhaps Ptychotis ajowan J.VI,536. (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muddaṅkaṇa: {'def': '【中】印刷。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】印刷。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Muddha: {'def': '¹ [pp. of muh, for the usual mūḷha, corresp. to Sk. mugdha. Not=mṛddha (of mṛdh to neglect) which in P. is maddhita: see pari°; nor=mṛdhra disdained] infatuated, bewildered, foolish J.V,436.

--dhātuka bewildered in one’s nature, foolish(ly) J.IV,391 (v. l. luddha°); DhA.III,120 (v. l. danta° & mūḷa°). (Page 538)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】愚蠢的，令人困惑的。 ~dhātuka, 【形】天生愚蠢的。 ~tā,【阴】愚蠢。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pp. of muh, for the usual mūḷha, corresp. to Sk. mugdha),【形】愚蠢的(foolish)，令人困惑的(infatuated, bewildered)。mudhātuka,【形】天生愚蠢的。muddhatā,【阴】愚蠢。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² & Muddhā [Vedic mūrdhan, the P. word shows a mixture of a- and n- stem] the head; top, summit. ‹-› m. sg. muddhā Sn.983, 1026, & muddhaṁ Sn.989; acc muddhaṁ D.I,95; Sn.987 sq., 1004, 1025; Dh.72 (=paññāy’etaṁ nāmaṁ DhA.II,73); & muddhānaṁ M.I,243; III,259=S.IV,56; Instr. muddhanā Mhvs 19, 30; Loc. muddhani Sn.689, 987; M.I,168; Vism.262; Mhvs 36, 66, in meaning “on the top of (a mountain)”: Vin.I,5 (here spelt pabbata-muddhini)=S.I,137; J.IV,265 (Yugandhara°); Pv.II,9⁶¹ (Naga°=Sineru° PvA.138); Vism.304 (vammika° on top of an ant-hill). -- Freq. in phrase muddhā (me, or no, or te) sattadhā phaleyya, as an oath or exclamⁿ of desecration or warning: “(your) head shall split into 7 pieces,” intrs. spelt both phal° & phāl° at J.V,92 (te s. phal°); Miln.157; DhA.I,17 (me . . . phāl°), 41 (te phalatu s.), 42 (ācariyassa m. s. phalissati); IV,125 (no . . . phāleyya); VvA.68 (me s. phal°). -- In compⁿ muddha°.

--(n)aṭṭhi (muddhan-aṭṭhi) bone of the head KhA 51. --âdhipāta head-splitting, battering of the head Sn.988 sq., 1004, 1025; --âdhipātin head-splitting (adj.) Sn.1026. --âra head (top) spoke KhA 172. --âvasitta “head-anointed” a properly anointed or crowned king D.III,60 sq., 69; Pug.56; Miln.234. --pāta=°âdhipāta. (Page 538)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muddhatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. muddha¹] foolishness, stupidity, infatuation J.V,433 (v. l. muṭhatā, muddatā). (Page 538)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muddhā: {'def': '【阳】头，顶端，顶点。 ~dhaja, 【形】舌音的。【阳】头发。~adhipāta, 【阳】头的破裂。 ~avasitta, 【形】正确灌顶的（国王）。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】头，顶端，顶点(summit)。muddhādhaja,【形】舌音的。【阳】头发。muddhādhipāta,【阳】头的破裂。muddhāvasitta,【形】正确灌顶的(国王)。muddhā sattadhā phaleyya, 你的头可能破成七片(警告词)。rājan khattiya muddhāvasitta﹐刹利王水浇头种(经灌顶即王位之刹利王，新王即位时，以五河之水浇灌其头)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Muddika: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. muddā] one who practises muddā (i. e. knowledge of signs) D.I,51 (in list of occupations, comb^d with gaṇaka & trsl^d Dial. I.68 by “accountant”; cp. Franke, Dīgha p. 53, “Finger-rechner”?) Vin.IV,8 (m., gaṇaka, lekhaka); S.IV,376 (gaṇaka, m., saṅkhāyaka). (Page 538)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muddikā: {'def': '¹ (f.) [fr. muddā] a seal ring, signet-ring, fingerring J.I,134; III,416; IV,439; DhA.I,394; II,4 (a ring given by the king to the keeper of the city gates as a sign of authority, and withdrawn when the gates are closed at night); IV,222. aṅguli° finger-ring, signetring Vin.II,106; J.IV,498; V,467. -- Similarly as at DhA.II,4 (muddikaṁ āharāpeti) muddikā is fig. used in meaning of “authority,” command; in phrase muddikaṁ deti to give the order, to command Miln.379 (with ref. to the captain of a ship). (Page 538)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】葡萄树(一种葡萄属的木本植物 (Vitis vinifera)，簇生可食用果实)，葡萄果(肉色的、表皮光滑的浆果，呈紫色、红色或绿色，可鲜食或制成果乾，并广泛用於制酒)。muddikāsava,【阳】酒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】印章戒指，图章戒指。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】葡萄树（一种葡萄属的木本植物 (Vitis vinifera)，有簇生可食用果实，被广泛栽培，有许多种类和变种），葡萄果（葡萄树所结的肉色的、表皮光滑的浆果，呈紫色、红色或绿色，可鲜食或制成果干，并广泛用于制酒）。 ~āsava, 【阳】酒。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】印章戒指，图章戒指。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (f.) [fr. mudu, cp. *Sk. mṛdvīkā] a vine or bunch of grapes, grape, grape wine Vin.I,246 (°pāna); J.IV,529; DhA.II,155. (Page 538)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muddā: {'def': '【阴】印章，印记，盖印，手势，印刷。 ~paka, 【阳】印刷者。 ~pana, 【中】印刷。 ~yanta, 【中】印刷机。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. (late?) Sk. mudrā] 1. a seal, stamp, impression; --rāja° the royal seal DhA.I,21. Also with ref. to the State Seal at Miln.280, 281 in cpds. muddakāma (amacca) & mudda-paṭilābha. -- 2. the art of calculation mentioned as a noble craft (ukkaṭṭhaṁ sippaṁ) at Vin.IV,7 (with gaṇanā & lekhā), as the first of the sippāni (with gaṇanā) at M.I,85=Nd² 199. Further at Miln.3, 59, 78 sq., 178. Cp. BSk. mudrā in same sense (e. g. at Divy 3, 26, 58 in set lipyā, saṅkhyā, gaṇanā, m.). Bdhgh’s explⁿ of muddā D.I,11 m.+gaṇanā (see DA.I,95) as “hattha-muddā-gaṇanā” is doubtful; since at Miln.78 sq. muddā & gaṇanā are two quite diff. things. See also Franke, Dīgha trsl. p. 18, with note (he marks muddā “Finger-Rechnen” with?); and cp. Kern, Toev. I.166 s. v. muddā. The Dial. I.21 trsl. “counting on the fingers” (see Dial. I.21, 22 with literature & more refs.). --hattha° is signlanguage, gesture (lit. hand-arithmetic), a means of communicating (question & answer) by signs, as clearly evident fr. J.VI,364 (hattha-muddāya naṁ pucchissāmi . . . muṭṭhiṁ akāsi, sā “ayaṁ me . . . pucchati” ti ñatvā hatthaṁ vikāsesi, so ñatvā . . .; he then asks by word of mouth). --hattha-muddaṁ karoti to make a sign, to beckon J.III,528; cp. Vin.V,163: na hatthavikāro kātabbo, na hattha-muddā dassetabbā.

--âdhikaraṇa the office of the keeper of the Privy Seal, Chancellorship Miln.281. (Page 538)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】印章，印记，盖印，手势，印刷。muddupaka,【阳】印刷者。muddāpana,【中】印刷。muddāyanta,【中】印刷机。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Muddāpeti: {'def': '(muddā 的【派】), 印刷。【过】muddāpesi。【过分】muddāpita。【独】muddāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(muddā 的【派】), 印刷。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~pita。【独】 ~petvā。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mudhā: {'def': '【无】免费，白送，徒然。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】免费，白送，徒然。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [Class. Sk. mudhā] for nothing, gratis VvA.77. (Page 538)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mudita: {'def': '[pp. of mud, modati] pleased, glad, satisfied, only in cpd. °mana (adj.) with gladdened heart, pleased in mind Sn.680 (+udagga); Vv 83¹⁵ (+pasanna-citta). Cp. pa°. (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】高兴的，满足的。 ~mana, 【形】有喜悦的心。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mudita-: {'def': '(pp. of mud, modati),【形】高兴的，满足的(pleased, glad, satisfied, only in muditamana (adj.) with gladdened heart, pleased in mind)。muditamana,【形】有喜悦的心。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Muditā: {'def': '(abstr. fr. mudu‹mrḍ亲切的),【阴】随喜，欣赏或赞叹自他的成就)(appreciative joy)。Muditāti āmoditā pāmojjena samannāgatā.(随喜：具足高兴之欢喜)(Sāratthadīpanī-ṭīkā(1~3)《心义灯》(pg.3.152))', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. mudu, for the usual mudutā, which in P. is only used in ord. sense, whilst muditā is in pregnant sense. Its semantic relation to mudita (pp. of mud) has led to an etym. relation in the same sense in the opinion of P. Commentators and the feeling of the Buddhist teachers. That is why Childers also derivers it from mud, as does Bdhgh. -- BSk. after the Pali: muditā Divy 483] soft-heartedness, kindliness, sympathy. Often in triad mettā (“active love” SnA 128), karuṇā (“preventive love,” ibid.), muditā (“disinterested love”: modanti vata bho sattā modanti sādhu sutthū ti ādinā mayena hita-sukh’âvippayogakāmatā muditā SnA 128); e. g. at D.I,251; S.V,118; A.I,196 etc. (see karuṇā). -- Cp. also Sn.73; D.III,50, 224, 248; Miln.332 (°saññā;+mettā°, karuṇā°); Vism.318 (where defined as “modanti tāya, taṁ-samaṅgino, sayaṁ vā modati etc.”); DhsA.192. See on term Dhs.trsl. §251 (where equalled to sugxairosu/nh); Cpd. 24 (called sympathetic & appreciative), 97 (called “congratulatory & benevolent attitude”); Expos. 200 (interpretation here refers to mudutā DhsA.151 “plasticity”). (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】喜，于他人福利的道贺。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mudiṅga: {'def': 'see mutiṅga. (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mudu: {'def': 'muduka(Vedic mrdu, fr. mrd see maddati‹madd压破),【形】软的，温和的，嫩的。muducitta, muduhadaya,【形】心肠软的。mudujātika,【形】天生温和的。mudutā,【阴】mudutta,【中】柔和，可塑性。mudubhūta,【形】柔软的，有延展性的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'muduka, 【形】软的，温和的，嫩的。 ~citta, ~hadaya, 【形】心肠软的。 ~jātika, 【形】天生温和的。 ~tā, 【阴】 ~tta, 【中】柔和，可塑性。 ~bhūta, 【形】柔软的，有延展性的。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic mṛdu, fr. mṛd: see maddati; cp. Lat. mollis (fr. *moldǔis); Gr. a)maldu/nw to weaken, Cymr. blydd soft] soft, mild, weak, tender D.II,17=III,143 (+taluṇa); A.II,151 (pañcindriyāni mudūni, soft, blunt, weak: opp. tikkha); S.II,268 (°taluṇa-hatthapādā); Sn.447 (=muduka SnA 393); Th.1, 460 (=loving); Pv.I,9²; Vism.64; PvA.46, 230. Compar. mudutara S.V,201.

--indriya (mud°) weak, slow minded, of dull senses Ps.I,121=II.195; Vism.87. --citta a tender heart PvA.54. --cittatā kind (soft) heartedness DhA.I,234. --piṭṭhika having a soft (i. e. pliable) back Vin.III,35. --bhūta supple, malleable D.I,76 (+kammaniya); Pug.68. --maddava soft & tender (said of food taken by young women to preserve their good looks) DhsA.403. --hadaya tender-hearted DhA.II,5. (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muduka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. mudu]=mudu. -- 1. flexible, pliable, soft S.II,221 (saṅghāṭi); Vism.66 (giving in easily, cpd. with ukkaṭṭha & majjhima); KhA 49 (°aṭṭhikāni soft bones); Mhvs 25, 102 (sayana); bhūmi Miln.34. -- 2. soft, mild, gentle, kindly, tender-hearted J.V,83 (m. hadaya), 155; Miln.229 (cittaṁ m.); SnA 84 (°jātika), 393; DhA.I,249 (citta); PvA.243. -- 3. soft, weak, pampered, spoilt S.II,268 (of the Licchavi princes). -- See also maddava, & cp. ati°. (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mudutā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. mṛdutā; abstr. fr. mudu. See also muditā] softness, impressibility, plasticity A.I,9; D.III,153 (trslⁿ “loveliness”); Dhs.44 (+maddavatā); 1340 (id.); Vism.463 sq.; DhsA.151 (=mudubhāva); cp. Dhs. trsl. §1340. (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mudā: {'def': '【阴】欢乐。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. mud, see modati] joy, pleasure D.II,214 (v. l. pamudā); Sdhp.306, 308. (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】欢乐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mugga: {'def': '(Vedic mudga),【阳】绿豆(a kind of kidney-bean, Phaseolus mungo)。cāṭukamyatā, 豆汤语(谄媚(flattery), pātumugga Nd2; cāṭukammatā Miln; pāṭukamyatā Vbh.) mugga-sūpyatā (muggasūpatā Nd2; muggasuppatā Miln & KhA 236; muggasūpatā and suppatā Vbh & VbhA 338; supyatā Vism) pāribhaṭṭatā (muggabhatyatā Vism.; °bhaṭṭakatā Miln; °bhaṭyatā & °bbhaṭṭatā Vbh). At Nd2 391 it is used to explain sāvajja-bhogin, at Vism 17 & Vbh 246 anācāra; at Vbh 352 lapanā)。(VbhA 483 &) Vism.17：Idhekacco na veḷudānena vā na pattana pupphana phalana sinānana dantakaṭṭhadānena vā na cāṭukamyatāya vā na muggasūpyatāya vā na pāribhaṭyatāya vā na jaṅghapesanikena vā na aññataraññatarena vā Buddhapaṭikuṭṭhena micchā-ājīvena jīvikaṁ kappeti, ayaṁ vuccati ācāro.(有此类人，施竹、施叶，或施花、果、洗浴粉、牙刷，或谄谀，或说豆汤语(半真半假，似是而非)，或抚爱(他人的孩子)，或作使者，或以种种为佛陀所唾弃的不正当的生活手段以营求其生活，都称为‘不正行’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic mudga, cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 240] a kind of kidney-bean, Phaseolus mungo, freq. comb^d with māsa² (q. v.). On its size (larger than sāsapa, smaller than kalāya) see A.V,170 & cp. kalāya. -- D.II,293; M.I,57 (+māsa); S.I,150; J.I,274, 429; III,55; VI,355 (°māsā); Miln.267, 341; SnA 283.

--sūpa bean-soup Vism.27. --sūpyatā “bean-soupcharacter,” or as Vism.trsl. 32 has it “bean-currytalk”; fig. denoting a faulty character, i. e. a man who behaves like bean-soup. The metaphor is not quite transparent; it is expl^d by Bdhgh as meaning a man speaking half-truths, as in a soup of beans some are only half-boiled. The explⁿ is forced, & is stereotype, as well as is the combⁿ in which it occurs. Its origin remains to be elucidated. Anyhow it refers to an unevenness in character, a flaw of character. The passage (with var. spellings) is always the foll.: cāṭukamyatā (pātu° Nd²; °kammatā Miln; pāṭu° Vbh) mugga-sūpyatā (°sūpatā Nd²; °suppatā Miln.& KhA 236; °sūpatā and suppatā Vbh.& VbhA.338; supyatā Vism) pāribhaṭṭatā (°bhatyatā Vism.; °bhaṭṭakatā Miln; °bhaṭyatā & °bbhaṭṭatā Vbh). At Nd² 39¹ it is used to explain sāvajja-bhogin, at Vism.17 & Vbh.246 anācāra; at Vbh.352 lapanā; at Miln.370 it is used generally (cp. Miln.trsl. II.287). The C. explⁿ of the Vbh.passage, as given at (VbhA.483 &) Vism.17 runs as follows: “mugga-sūpa-samānāya sacc’âlikena jīvita kappanatāy’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ. Yathā hi muggasūpe paccante bahū muggā pākaṁ gacchanti, thokā na gacchanti, evam eva saccâlikena jīvitakappake puggale bahuṁ alikaṁ hoti, appakaṁ saccaṁ.” The text at VbhA.483 is slightly different, although the sense is the same. Similarly at Vism.27. (Page 534)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】青豆。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Muggara: {'def': '【阳】棍棒，木槌。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】棍棒，木槌。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. mudgara] a club, hammer, mallet J.I,113; II,196, 382; V,47; VI,358; Miln.351; Vism.231; DhA.I,126; II,21; PvA.4, 55 (ayo°), 56 (°pahāra), 66, 192. The word is specifically peculiar to the so-called Jātaka style. (Page 535)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muggatiya: {'def': '(nt.?) [fr. mugga?] a plant, according to C. a species of bean J.VI,536. (Page 535)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muhutta: {'def': '【阳、中】片刻，分钟。 ~ttena, 【副】立刻。 ~ttika, 【形】只存在一会儿的。【阳】占星家。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. & nt.) [Vedic muhūrta, fr. muhur suddenly] a moment, a very short period of time, an inkling, as we should say “a second.” -- Its duration may be seen from descending series of time-connotations at PvA.198 (under jātakamma, prophesy by astrologers at the birth of a child): rāsi, nakkhatta, tithi, m.; and from defⁿ at Nd² 516 by “khaṇaṁ, layaṁ, vassaṁ, atthaṁ.” ‹-› Usually in oblique cases: muhuttena in a short time, in a twinkling of an eye PvA.55; muhuttaṁ (Acc.) a moment, even a second Sn.1138 (m. api); Dh.65 (id.), 106; PvA.43. (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic muhūrta, fr. muhur suddenly),【阳】【中】须臾、片刻、一瞬间(a moment, a very short period of time, an inkling, as we should say “a second.”)。muhuttena,【副】瞬间(in a short time, in a twinkling of an eye)。muhuttika,【形】只存在一会儿的。【阳】占星家。muhuttikā,【阴】须臾妇、短暂结合的太太(a temporary wife, =tan-khaṇikā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Muhuttika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. muhutta] only for a moment; °ā (f.) a temporary wife, in enumⁿ of several kinds of wives at Vin.III,139 & VvA.73. Syn. tan-khaṇikā. (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mujjati: {'def': '[The P. form of the Sk. majj] to sink, dive, be submerged Dhtp 70 (mujja=mujjana). Only in cpds. um° & ni°. (Page 535)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mukha: {'def': '(Vedic mukha, fr. Idg. *mu),【中】1.嘴。2.脸。3.入口。4.原因，理由，方法。5.前面。6.面门。音译：目佉。【形】最初的。mukhatuṇḍa,【中】鸟嘴(喙)。mukhadvāra,【中】嘴。mukhadhovana,【中】洗脸，漱口。mukhapuñchana,【中】面巾。mukhapūra,【中】一口。【形】填嘴的。mukhavaṭṭi,【阴】(杯、碗等)边，轮缘，边缘。mukhavaṇṇa,【阳】容貌，脸色，面象(ming7 chiunn)。mukhavikāra,【阳】脸孔扭曲，扮鬼脸。mukhasaṅkocana,【中】撇嘴(嘴角向下，表示不高兴的情绪)。mukhasaññata,【形】控制嘴巴的。nava vaṇa-mukhāni﹐九孔、九入、九漏、九疮，即：两眼、两耳、两鼻孔、口及大小便道等九处。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】嘴，脸，入口，口子，前面。【形】最初的。 ~tuṇḍa, 【中】鸟嘴，喙。 ~dvāra,【中】嘴。 ~dhovana,【中】洗脸，漱口。 ~puñchana,【中】面巾。 ~pūra, 【中】一口。【形】填嘴的。 ~vaṭṭi, 【阴】（杯、碗等）边，轮缘，边缘。 ~vaṇṇa, 【阳】容貌。 ~vikāra, 【阳】脸孔扭曲，扮鬼脸。 ~saṅkocana, 【中】撇嘴（嘴角向下，表示不高兴的情绪）。~saññata, 【形】控制嘴巴的。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic mukha, fr. Idg. *mu, onomat., cp. Lat. mu facere, Gr. mukάomai, Mhg. mūgen, Lat. mūgio to moo (of cows), to make the sound “moo”; Ohg. māwen to cry, muckazzen to talk softly; also Gr. mu_qos word, “myth”; Ohg. mūla=Ger. maul; Ags. mule snout, etc. Vedic mūka silent, dumb=Lat. mutus=E. mute] 1. the mouth Sn.608, 1022 (with ref. to the long tongue, pahūta-jivha, of the Buddha or Mahāpurisa); J.II,7; DA.I,287 (uttāna° clear mouthed, i. e. easy to understand, cp. D.I,116); PvA.11, 12 (pūti°), 264 (mukhena). -- 2. the face J.VI,218 (uṇṇaja m.); PvA.74, 75, 77; °ṁ karoti to make a face (i. e. grimace) Vism.343. --adho° face downward Vin.II,78; opp. upari° (q. v.); assu° with tearful face Dh.67; PvA.39; see assu. --dum° (adj.) sad or unfriendly looking J.II,393; VI,343; scurrilous J.V,78; bhadra° brightfaced PvA.149; ruda° crying Pv.I,11². -- 3. entrance, mouth (of a river) Mhvs 8, 12; āya° entrance (lit. opening), i. e. cause or means of income DA.I,218; ukkā° the opening of a furnace, a goldsmith’s smelting pot A.I,257; Sn.686; J.VI,217; 574. ubhato-mukha having 2 openings M.I,57. sandhi° opening of the cleft PvA.4. Hence: -- 4. cause, ways, means, reason, by way of J.III,55 by way of a gift (dānamukhe); IV,266 (bahūhi mukhehi). --apāya° cause of ruin or loss A.II,166; IV,283. -- 5. front part, front, top, in īsā° of the carriage pole S.I,224=J.I,203. Hence: -- 6. the top of anything, front, head, best part; adj. topmost, foremost Sn.568 (aggihutta-mukhā yaññā), 569 (nakkhattānaṁ mukhaṁ cando; cp. Vin.I,246); VbhA.332 (=uttamaṁ, mukha-bhūtaṁ vā). -- Der. adj. mokkha & pāmokkha (q. v.). Note. A poetical Instr. sg. mukhasā is found at Pv.I,2³ & I.3², as if the Nom. were mukho (s-stem). -- The Abl. mukhā is used as adv. “in front of, before,” in cpd. sam° & param°, e. g. PvA.13. See each sep.

--ādhāna (1) the bit of a bridle M.I,446; (2) setting of the mouth, i. e. mouth-enclosure, rim of the m.; in m. siliṭṭhaṁ a well-connected, well-defined mouth-contour DhsA.15 (not with trsl. “opens lightly,” but better with note “is well adjusted,” see Expos. 19, where write °ādhāna for °ādāna). --āsiya (? cp. āsita¹) to be eaten by the mouth DhsA.330 (mukhena asitabba). --ullokana looking into a person’s face, i. e. cheerful, bright, perhaps also flattering DhA.II,193 (as °olokana). --ullokika flattering (cp. above) Nd¹ 249 (puthu Satthārānaṁ m. puthujjana); PvA.219. --odaka water for rinsing the mouth Nd² 39¹=Miln.370; VvA.65; DhA.II,19; IV,28. --ja born in (or from) the mouth, i. e. a tooth J.VI,219. --tuṇḍa a beak VvA.227 [cp. BSk. mukhatuṇḍaka Divy 387]. --dugga one whose mouth is a difficult road, i. e. one who uses his mouth (speech) badly Sn.664 (v. l. °dukkha). --dūsi blemishes of the face, a rash on the face DA.I,223 (m.--dosa ibid.). --dvāra mouth opening PvA.180. --dhovana-ṭṭhāna place for rinsing the mouth, “lavatory” DhA.II,184. --puñchana wiping one’s mouth Vin.I,297. --pūra filling the mouth, a mouthful, i. e. as much as to fill the mouth J.VI,350. --pūraka mouth-filling Vism.106. --bheri a musical instrument, “mouth-drum,” mouthorgan (?) Nd² 219 B; SnA 86. --makkaṭika a grimace (like that of a monkey) of the face J.II,70, 448 (T. makkaṭiya). --vaṭṭi “opening-circumference,” i. e. brim, edge, rim DhA.II,5 (of the Lohakumbhi purgatory, cp. J.III,43 lohakumbha-mukhavaṭṭi); DhA.III,58 (of a gong). --vaṇṇa the features PvA.122, 124. --vikāra contortion of the mouth J.II,448. --vikūṇa (=vikāra) grimace SnA 30. --saṅkocana distortion or contraction of the mouth, as a sign of displeasure DhA.II,270; cp. mukha-saṅkoca Vism.26. --saññata controlling one’s mouth (i. e. speech) Dh.363, cp. DhA.IV,93. (Page 534)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mukhara: {'def': '【形】饶舌的，多嘴的。 ~tā, 【阴】爱说话。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】饶舌的，多嘴的。mukharatā,【阴】爱说话。mukharā vikiṇṇavācā﹐饶舌多语。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. mukhara; fr. mukha] garrulous, noisy, scurrilous S.I,203; V,269; A.I,70; III,199, 355; Th.1, 955; Sn.275; J.III,103; DhA.II,70 (ati°); PvA.11. -- opp. amukhara M.I,470; Th.1, 926; Pug.35; Miln.414. (Page 534)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mukharatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. mukhara] talkativeness, garrulousness, noisiness DhA.II,70. (Page 534)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mukhodaka: {'def': '【中】洗脸水。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】洗脸水。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mukhullokaka: {'def': 'mukhullokika﹐【形】寻找他人的脸(mukhaṁ ulloketi)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】注视着他人的脸。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mukhya: {'def': '【形】首要的，最初的，最重要的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】首要的，最初的，最重要的。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mukhādhāna: {'def': '【中】马勒(bridle)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】马勒。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mukka: {'def': '[pp. of muc, Sk. mukta, for the usual P. mutta; cp. Prk. mukka, Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 566] only in um° & paṭi° (q. v.), and as v. l. at M.III,61. (Page 534)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mukkhaka: {'def': 'at J.I,441 should be read as mokkhaka, meaning “first, principal, foremost”; cp. mokkha². (Page 534)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mukula: {'def': '【中】芽，蓓蕾。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. mukula] a bud; see makula (where also see mukulita). -- Abhp 811, 1116. (Page 534)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】芽，蓓蕾。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mummura: {'def': '[*Sk. murmura, lit. crackling, rustling; cp. Lat. murmur=E. murmur, Gr. mormuρw to rustle, Ohg. murmurōn & murmulōn=Ger. murmeln; all to Idg. *mrem, to which Sk. marmara: see P. mammara & cp. murumurā] crackling fire, hot ashes, burning chaff J.II,134. (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Munana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. munāti, almost equal to mona] fathoming, recognising, knowing; a C. word to explain “muni,” used by Dhpāla at VvA.114 (mahā-isibhūtaṁ . . . mahanten’eva ñāṇena munanato paricchindanato mahā muniṁ), & 231 (anavasesassa ñeyyassa munanato muni). (Page 538)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muni: {'def': '【阳】牟尼（出家人）。 ~nda, 【阳】牟尼因陀（伟大的圣人）。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic muni, originally one who has made the vow of silence. Cp. Chh. Up. VIII,5, 2; Pss. of the Br. 132 note. Connected with mūka: see under mukha. This etym. preferred by Aufrecht: Halāyudha p. 311. Another, as favoured by Pischel (see under munāti) is “inspired, moved by the spirit.” Pāli expl^ns (popular etym.) are given by Dhammapāla at VvA.114 & 231: see munana] a holy man, a sage, wise man. I. The term which was specialised in Brahmanism has acquired a general meaning in Buddhism & is applied by the Buddha to any man attaining perfection in self-restraint and insight. So the word is capable of many-sided application and occurs frequently in the oldest poetic anthologies, e. g. Sn.207--221 (the famous Muni-sutta, mentioned Divy 20, 35; SnA 518; expl^d SnA 254--277), 414, 462, 523 sq., 708 sq., 811 sq., 838, 844 sq., 912 sq., 946, 1074 & passim (see Pj. Index p. 749); Dh.49, 225, 268 sq., 423. -- Cp. general passages & expl^ns at Pv.II,1¹³; II,13³ (expl^d at PvA.163 by “attahitañ ca parahitañ ca munāti jānātī ti muni”); Miln.90 (munibhāva “munihood,” meditation, self-denial, abrogation); DhA.III,521 (munayo=moneyya-paṭipadāya maggaphalaṁ pattā asekha-munayo), 395 (here expl^d with ref. to orig. meaning tuṇhībhāva “state of silence” =mona). -- II. The Com. & Abhidhamma literature have produced several schedules of muni-qualities, esp. based on the 3 fold division of character as revealed in action, speech & thought (kāya°, vacī°, mano°). Just as these 3 are in general exhibited in good or bad ways of living (°sucaritaṁ & °duccaritaṁ), they are applied to a deeper quality of saintship in kāya-moneyya, vacīmoneyya, mano-moneyya; or Muni-hood in action, speech & thought; and the muni himself is characterised as a kāya-muni, vacī° & mano°. Thus runs the long exegesis of muni at Nd² 514^A=Nd¹ 57. Besides this the same chapter (514^B) gives a division of 6 munis, viz. agāra-muni, anagāra° (the bhikkhus), sekha°, asekha° (the Arahants), pacceka° (the Paccekabuddhas), muni° (the Tathāgatas). -- The parallel passage to Nd² 514^A at A.I,273 gives a muni as kāya-muni, vācā° & ceto° (under the 3 moneyyāni). (Page 538)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】牟尼(出家人)。Muninda(muni+inda王),【阳】牟尼因陀(伟大的圣人)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Munāti: {'def': '[=manyate, prob. corresponding to Sk. med. manute, with inversion *munati and analogy formation after jānāti as munāti, may be in allusion to Sk. mṛṇāti of mṛ to crush, or also mā mināti to measure out or fathom. The Dhtm 589 gives as root mun in meaning “ñāṇa.” The word is more a Com. word than anything else, formed from muni & in order to explain it] to be a wise man or muni, to think, ponder, to know Dh.269 (yo munāti ubho loke munī tena pavuccati), which is expl^d at DhA.III,396 as follows: “yo puggalo . . . tulaṁ āropetvā minanto viya ime ajjhattikā khandhā ime bāhirā ti ādinā nayena ime ubho pi atthe mināti munī tena pavuccati.” Note. The word occurs also in Māgadhī (Prk.) as muṇaï which as Pischel (Prk. Gr. § 489) remarks, is usually taken to man, but against this speaks its meaning “to know” & Pāli munāti. He compares maṇaï with Vedic mūta in kāma-mūta (driven by kāma; mūta=pp. of mū=mīv) and Sk. muni. Cp. animo movere. (Page 538)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(mun知+a), 知道，明白。【过】muni。【过分】muta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(mun + a), 知道，明白。【过】 muni。【过分】 muta。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Muraja: {'def': '【阳】小手鼓(tamborine)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic. & Class. Sk. muraja, Prk. murava: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 254] 1. a small drum, tambourine J.V,390; Vv 35³ (=bheri VvA.161); 84¹⁸ (=mudinga VvA.340); SnA 370. -- 2. a kind of girdle Vin.II,136. (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】小手鼓。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Murumurā: {'def': '(indecl.) [onomat. to sound root mṛ, see mammara & mummura] the grinding, crackling sound of the teeth when biting bones, “crack”; in phrase m. ti khādati to eat or bite up to bits J.I,342; V,21 (of a Yakkhinī, eating a baby). (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Murumurāpeti: {'def': '=murumurāyati J.II,127; III,134; V,196 (°etvā khādati). (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Murumurāyati: {'def': '(muru-muru 的【拟】), 咔嚓咔嚓地响着咬。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[denom. fr. murumurā] to munch, chew, bite up with a cracking sound J.IV,491. (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(muru-muru 的【拟】), 哢嚓哢嚓地响著咬。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Musala: {'def': '【阳】乳钵槌(pestle研磨棒)。musalī,【形】手中乳钵槌的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(m. nt.) [cp. Vedic musala. The etym. is probably to be connected with mṛd (see maddati)] 1. a pestle (whilst udukkhala is “mortar,” cp. J.II,428 & see udukkhala) D.I,166=Pug.55; DhA.II,131 (+suppa). ‹-› 2. a club A.II,241; VvA.121. -- 3. a crowbar J.I,199; PvA.258 (°daṇḍa). (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】乳钵。 ~salī, 【形】乳钵在手中的。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Musalaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. musala] a little pestle, a toy for little girls DhsA.321. (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Musalika: {'def': 'only in cpd. danta° (an ascetic) who uses his teeth as a pestle J.IV,8 (an aggi-pakkaṁ khādati, eats food uncooked, only crushed by his teeth). (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Musati: {'def': '[in this connection=mṛṣ in an active sense, as quâsi denom. fr. musā. Not to muṣ to steal, which is given at Dhtp 491 with “theyya”] to betray, beguile, bewilder, dazzle, in cakkhūni m. D.II,183 (but trslⁿ “destructive to the eyes”); musati ‘va nayanaṁ Vv 35³ (cp. VvA.161). (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mussati: {'def': '(mu知道+ya), 忘记，被遗忘。【过】mussi。【过分】muṭṭha。【独】mussitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(mu + ya), 忘记，被遗忘。【过】 mussi。【过分】 muṭṭha。【独】mussitvā。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[=mṛṣ, mṛṣyati; to which musā “wrongly,” quite diff. in origin fr. micchā: mṛṣā›mithyā. Dhtm 437 defines by “sammose,” i. e. forgetfulness] v. intrs.: to forget, to pass into oblivion, to become bewildered, to become careless D.I,19 (sati m.); J.V,369 (id.); Sn.815 (=nassati SnA 536;=parimussati, paribāhiro hoti Nd¹ 144). -- pp. muṭṭha. Cpp. pa°, pari°. (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Musā: {'def': '【无】谎言(台语：嘐韶hau siau5，讲白贼kong2 peh8 chat8)，妄语。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】谎言，妄语。 ~vāda, 【阳】说谎。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adv.) [Vedic mṛṣā, fr. mṛṣ, lit. “neglectfully”] falsely, wrongly; uṣually with verbs vadati, bhanati, bhāsati & brūti to speak falsely, to tell a lie. -- A.I,149 (opp. saccaṁ); Sn.122, 158, 397, 400, 757, 883, 967, 1131; Nd¹ 291; Pv.I,3³; VvA.72 (=abhūtaṁ atacchaṁ); SnA 19; PvA.16, 152.

--vāda lying, a falsehood, a lie D.I,4, 25; III,68 sq.; 92 sq., 106, 170, 195, 232, 269; M.I,414; Sn.129, 242 (cp. D.II,174); Dh.246; Pug.57; Nd¹ 268; Vv 15⁸; Pv.I,6⁸; VbhA.383 (var. degrees); PvA.16; Sdhp.65; explicitly at Nd¹ 152, 394; Nd² 515. Cp. mosavajja. --vādin speaking falsely, lying D.I,138; III,15, 82; Dh.176; Pug.29, 38. (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Musāvāda: {'def': '【阳】说谎。sampajāna-musāvāda﹐【阳】故意说妄语。妄语：台语：嘐韶hau siau5，白贼kong2 peh8 chat8。 KhA.31.︰Tattha musāvādassa (1)tāva musā ca hoti taṁ vatthu, (2)visaṁvādanacittañca paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti, (3)tajjo ca vāyāmo, (4)paravisaṁvādanañca viññāpayamānā viññatti pavattatīti cattāri aṅgāni veditabbāni.(说谎(有四条件)︰1.欺骗。2.对那对象现起欺骗心。3.适当的努力(tajjo ca vāyāmo)。4.(明白地)对他人说出欺骗的话(paravisaṁvādanañca viññāpayamānā viññatti pavattatīti)。)A.2.3./I,60.说：“Paṭicchannakammantassa bhikkhave, dvinnaṁ gatīnaṁ aṅṅatarā gati pāṭikaṅkhā--nirayo vā tiracchānayoni vāti.(造覆藏(恶)业之人，应预期二趣之随一趣：地狱或傍生。) 「覆藏」心态含有「悭」心所(属於瞋因组)。M.61./I,415.：yassa kassaci sampajānamusāvāde natthi lajjā nāhaṁ tassa kiñci pāpaṁ akaranīyanti vadāmi.(任何人如果故意说谎而无羞耻，则我说此人必会无恶不作。)《法句经》(Dh.176)：Ekaṁ dhammaṁ atītassa, musāvādissa jantuno, vitiṇṇaparalokassa, natthi pāpaṁ akāriyaṁ(对於踰越(违犯)一法--妄语的人(来说)，已舍弃(不关心)后世，而无恶不作。)Vin.Mv.I,103.(CS.Mv.pg.141)：Yo pana bhikkhu…saramāno santiṁ āpattiṁ nāvikareyya, sampajānamusāvādassa hoti. Sampajānamusāvādo kho panāyasmanto antarāyiko dhammo vutto Bhagavatā.(比丘忆念有罪而不发露，即是故妄语罪，诸具寿！故妄语罪是世尊所说的障法。)(「不发露」(nāvikareyya)即是覆藏(罪)，覆藏即属於「悭」心所。)KhA.34.︰Musāvādā veramaṇiyā vippasannindriyatā vissaṭṭhamadhurabhāṇitā samasitasuddhadantatā nātithūlatā nātikisatā nātirassatā nātidīghatā sukhasamphassatā uppalagandhamukhatā sussūsakaparijanatā ādeyyavacanatā kamaluppalasadisamudulohitatanujivhatā anuddhatatā acapalatāti evamādīni.(离虚诳语：诸根明净，语词清晰、甜美，牙齿平置纯(白)，(齿)不太粗、不太细(瘦)、不太短、不太长、乐触，口有青莲花香，随从恭敬听闻，言语受欢迎，舌如莲花、青莲花辨一般柔软、红薄，不掉举、不轻躁，如此等(果)。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Muta: {'def': '【中】经过鼻、舌和触觉所感觉的知觉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】经过鼻，舌和触觉所感觉的知觉。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[for mata, cp. Geiger. P.Gr. § 18] thought, supposed, imagined (i. e. received by other vaguer sense impressions than by sight & hearing) M.I,3; Sn.714 (=phusan’arahaṁ SnA 498), 812; J.V,398 (=anumata C.); Vbh.14, 429 sq. -- Often in set diṭṭha suta muta what is seen, heard & thought (? more likely “felt,” cp. Nd² 298: diṭṭha=cakkhunā d., sutaṁ=sotena s., mutaṁ=ghānena ghāyitaṁ, jivhāya sāyitaṁ, kāyena phuṭṭaṁ, and viññātaṁ=manasā v.; so that from the interpretation it follows that d. s. m. v. refer to the action (perception) of the 6 senses, where muta covers the 3 of taste, smell & touch, and viññāta the function of the manas) S.I,186 (K.S. I.237 note); IV,73; Th.I,1216. Similarly the psychol. analysis of the senses at Dhs.961: rūp’āyatanaṁ diṭṭhaṁ; sadd-āyat. sutaṁ; gandh°, ras°, phoṭṭhabb° mutaṁ; sabbaṁ rūpaṁ manasā viññātaṁ. See on this passage Dhs.trsl. § 961 note. In the same sense DhsA.388 (see Expositor, II.439). -- D.III,232; Sn.790 (cp. Nd¹ 87 sq. in extenso) 793, 798, 812, 887, 901, 914, 1086, 1122. Thus quite a main tenet of the old (popular) psychology.

--maṅgalika one who prophesies from, or derives lucky auspices from impressions (of sense; as comp^d with diṭṭha-maṅgalika visible-omen-hunter, and suta-m. sound-augur) J.IV,73 (where C. clearly expl^s by “touch”); KhA 119 (the same explⁿ more in detail). --visuddhika of great purity, i. e. orthodox, successful, in matters of touch Nd¹ 89, 90. --suddhi purity in matter of touch Nd¹ 104, 105. (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muti: {'def': '(f.) [for mati, cp. muta] sense-perception, experience, understanding, intelligence Sn.864; Nd¹ 205 (on Sn.846=hearsay, what is thought); Vbh.325 (diṭṭhi, ruci, muti, where muti is expl^d at VbhA.412 as “mudatī ti muti”!) 328; Sdhp.221. Cp. sam°. (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mutimant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. muti] sensible, intelligent, wise Sn.539; as mutīmā at Sn.61, 321, 385; pl. 881; J.IV,76 (as mutīmā & mutimā); Nd² 511=259. Cp. matimant. (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mutimantu: {'def': '【形】有感觉的。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有感觉的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mutiṅga: {'def': 'mudiṅga,【阳】小鼓。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. mṛdaṅga on d›t. cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 23] a small drum, tabour D.I,79; Vin.I,15; S.II,266 sq. (a famous mythological drum, called Ānaka; same also at J.II,344); J.IV,395 (bheri+); KhA 49. Spelling mudiṅga at S.II,266; J.IV,395; Vism.250; VbhA.232; VvA.210 (v. l. SS mutinga), 340 (id.).

--sadda sound of the drum J.I,3 (one of the 10 sounds, hatthi°, assa° etc.). (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'mudiṅga, 【阳】小鼓。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mutoḷī: {'def': '[?] a doubtful word occurring only in one stock phrase, viz. “ubhato-mukhā m. pūrā nānā-vihitassa dhaññassa” at M.I,57 (vv. ll. putoḷi, mūṭolī)=III,90 (mūtoḷī)=D.II,293 (T. mutoli, v. l. muṭoli; gloss K pūtolī). The Dial. II.330 trsl. “sample bag” (see note on this passage; with remark “spelling uncertain”). Neumann, Mittlere Sammlung I.101 trsl^s “Sack.” ‹-› Kern, Toev. s. v. mutoḷī tries to connect it with BSk. moṭa (Hindi moṭh), bundle, which (with vv. ll. mūḍha, muṭa, mūṭa) occurs only in one stock phrase “bharaiḥ motaiḥ piṭakaiḥ” at Divy 5, 332, 501, 524. The more likely solution, however, is that mutoḷī is a distortion of puṭosā (puṭosa), which is found as v. l. to puṭaṁsa at all passages concerned (see puṭaṁsa). Thus the meaning is “bag, provision-bag.” The BSk. moṭa (muṭa) remains to be elucidated. The same meaning “provision-bag” fits at Vism.328 in cpd. yāna°, where spelling is T. °paṭṭoli, v. l. BB °putoḷi, but which is clearly identical with our term. We should thus prefer to read yāna-puṭosi “carriage-bag for provisions.” (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mutta: {'def': '(muñcati 的【过分】)。 ~ācāra, 【形】放荡的习惯。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】尿，小便。 ~karaṇa, 【中】男女的性器官。 ~vatthi。【阴】膀胱。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】尿，小便。muttakaraṇa,【中】男女的性器官，密处。muttavatthi。【阴】膀胱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(muñcati 的【过分】；sk. mūtra)已释放。muttācāra,【形】放荡的习惯。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of muñcati; Sk. mukta] 1. released, set free, freed; as --° free from Sn.687 (abbhā° free from the stain of a cloud); Dh.172 (id.), 382 (id.). -- Dh.344; Pv IV.1³⁴; PvA.65 (su°). -- 2. given up or out, emitted, sacrificed Vin.III,97=IV.27 (catta, vanta, m.) A.III,50 (catta+). Cp. vi°. -- 3. unsystematised. Comp. 9, 137 (vīthi°).

--ācāra of loose habits D.I,166=III,40=Pug.55 (where expl^d at PugA 231, as follows: vissatth’ācāro. Uccārakamm’ādīsu lokiya-kulaputt’ācārena virahito ṭhitako va uccāraṁ karoti passāvaṁ karoti khādati bhuñjati). --paṭibhāna of loose intelligence, or immoderate promptitude (opp. yutta°), quick-tempered Pug.42 (cp. PugA 223); SnA 110, 111; --saddha given up to faith Sn.1146 (=saddhâdhimutta Nd² 512). --sirā (pl.) with loose (i. e. confused) heads KhA 120=Vism.415. (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.) [cp. Vedic mūtra; Idg. *meud to be wet, as in Gr. mu/zw to suck, mudάw to be wet; Mhg. smuz (=Ger. schmutz), E. smut & mud, Oir. muad cloud (=Sk. mudira cloud); Av. muprem impurity, Mir. mūn urine; Gr. miai/nw to make dirty] urine Vin.IV,266 (passāvo muttaṁ vuccati); Pv.I,9¹ (gūthañ ca m.); PvA.43, 78. Enum^d under the 32 constituents of the body (the dvattiṁs-ākāraṁ) at Kh III, (cp. KhA 68 in detail on mutta; do. Vism.264, 362; VbhA.68, 225, 248 sq.) =M.III,90=D.II,293 etc.

--ācāra see mutta¹. --karaṇa “urine-making,” i. e. pudendum muliebre, cunnus Vin.IV,260. --karīsa urine & fæces, i. e. excrements Vin.I,301; S.III,85; A.II,33; Sn.835; Nd¹ 181; J.VI,111; Vism.259, 305, 342, 418 (origin of). --gata what has become urine DhsA.247 (gūtha°+). --vatthi the bladder Vism.345. (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muttaka: {'def': '(adj.) [mutta¹+ka] only in cpd. antarā° one who is released in the meantime Vin.II,167. (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muttakā: {'def': '(f.)=muttā; °maya made of pearls Mhvs 27, 33. (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muttatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. mutta¹] state of being liberated, freedom J.V,480. (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mutti: {'def': '【阴】释放，自由。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】释放，自由。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. muc, cp. Sk. mukti] release, freedom, emancipation Sn.344 (muty-apekho); Nd¹ 88, 89 (+vimutti & parimutti); PvA.35, 46; Sdhp.492. -- Cp. vi°. (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muttika: {'def': '[fr. muttā] a pearl vendor, dealer in pearls Miln.262. (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muttā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. muktā] a pearl Vv 37⁷ (°ācita); Pv.II,7⁵ (+veḷuriya); Mhvs 30, 66. Eight sorts of pearls are enum^d at Mhvs. 11, 14, viz. haya-gaja-rath’āmalakā valay’ aṅguli-veṭhakā kakudha-phala-pākatikā, i.e. horse-, elephant-, waggon-, myrobalan-, bracelet-, ring-, kakudha fruit-, and common pearls.

--āhāra a string or necklace of pearls J.I,383; VI,489; DhA.I,85; SnA 78 (simile); Vism.312. --jāla a string (net) of pearls J.IV,120; Mhvs 27, 31; VvA.198. --dāma garland or wreath of p. Mhvs 30, 67 (so T. for v. l. °maya). --vali string of pearls VvA.169. --sikkā string of pearls VvA.244. (Page 537)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】珍珠。 ~vali, 【阴】 ~hāra, 【阳】一串珍珠。 ~jāla, 【中】珍珠网。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】珍珠。muttāvali,【阴】muttāhāra,【阳】一串珍珠。muttājāla,【中】珍珠网。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Muyhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. muyhati] bewilderment, stupefaction, infatuation DA.I,195 (rajjana-dussana-m.). (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】健忘，糊涂。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】健忘(forgetfullness)，糊涂(infatuation)。SA.3.2./I,137.︰muyhanalakkhaṇo mohoti.(糊涂相，称为‘痴’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Muyhati: {'def': '(muh昏晕+ya), 忘记，变成迟钝，冲昏头脑，痴闇。【过】muyhi。【过分】mūḷha。【现分】muyhamāna。【独】muyhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic muhyati, muh; defⁿ Dhtp 343: mucchāyaṁ; 460: vecitte; cp. moha & momuha] to get bewildered, to be infatuated, to become dull in one’s senses, to be stupified. Just as rāga, dosa & moha form a set, so do the verbs rajjati, dussati, muyhati, e. g. Miln.386 (rajjasi rajjanīyesu, dussanīyesu dussasi, muyhase mohaniyesu). Otherwise rare as finite verb; only DhsA.254 (in defⁿ of moha) & Sdhp.282, 605 (so read for mayhate). -- pp. mūḷha & muddha¹. (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(muh + ya), 忘记，变成迟钝，冲昏头脑。【过】 muyhi。【过分】mūḷha。【现分】 ~hamāna。【独】 ~hitvā。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Muñcaka: {'def': '【形】释放的人，放出。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】释放的人，放出。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Muñcana: {'def': '【中】释放，放弃。 ~ka, 【形】放出。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Muccana (abstr. fr. muc) ,【中】1.释放，放弃(release, being freed, deliverance); muccanākāra (muñccanākāra) means of deliverance (dukkhato from ill) DhA.I,267; muñccanakāla time of release (dukkhā from suffering) DhA.II,11 (mucc°, v. l. muñc°)。2.松掉(letting loose, emitting, giving, bestowing VbhA.249 (speaking, shouting out; Vism.reading p. 265 is to be corrected fr. mañcana!); PvA.132 (v. l. dāna).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Muccana (nt.) [abstr. fr. muc] 1. release, being freed, deliverance J.IV,478 (mucc°); °ākāra (muñc°) means of deliverance (dukkhato from ill) DhA.I,267; °kāla time of release (dukkhā from suffering) DhA.II,11 (mucc°, v. l. muñc°). -- 2. letting loose, emitting, giving, bestowing VbhA.249 (speaking, shouting out; Vism.reading p. 265 is to be corrected fr. mañcana!); PvA.132 (v. l. dāna). (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muñcanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. muñcana] sending out or forth, emitting VvA.303 (pabhā°). (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. muñcana) ,【形】放出的，送出的(sending out or forth, emitting VvA.303 (pabhāmuñcanaka).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Muñcati: {'def': '[Vedic muñcati; muc, to release, loosen; with orig. meaning “strip off, get rid of,” hence also “glide” as in Lith. mūkti to escape, Ags. smūgan to creep, Ger. schmiegen to rub against. See further connections in Walde, Lat. Wtb., s. v. emungo. The Dhtp 376 expl^s by mocane, Dhtm 609 id.; 631: moce; 765: pamocane] I. Forms. The 2 bases muñc° & mucc° are differentiated in such a way, that muñc° is the active base, and mucc° the passive. There are however cases where the active forms (muñc°) are used for the passive ones (mucc°), which may be due simply to a misspelling, ñc & cc being very similar. -- A. Active. pres. muñcati J.I,375; IV,272; V,453; Vv 64¹⁸; pot. muñcetha Dh.389; imper. muñca Dh.348; ppr. muñcanto Sn.791; aor. muñci J.V,289; Mhvs 19, 44; pl. muñciṁsu J.IV,142; ger. muñciya Mhvs 25, 67; mutvā J.I,375; & muñcitvā ibid.; PvA.43; inf. muñcituṁ D.I,96. -- Caus. II. muñcāpeti D.I,148. -- B. Passive. pres. muccati Sn.508; ppr. muccanto J.I,118; imper, sg. muccassu Th.2, 2; pl. muccatha DhA.II,92; pot. muñceyya Pv.II,2⁶; PvA.104; Dh.127; fut. muccissati J.I,434 (where also muñcissati in same sense); DhA.I,105; III,242; PvA.53, 105; also mokkhasi Vin.I,21=S.I,111; pl. mokkhanti Dh.37; aor. mucci(ṁsu) S.III,132; IV,20; J.II,66; inf. muccituṁ Th.1, 253; DhA.I,297. -- Caus. moceti & mocāpeti (q. v.). -- pp. mutta. -- II. Meanings. 1. to release, deliver (from=Abl.), set free (opp. bandhati) Sn.508 (sujjhati, m., bajjhati); S.III,132 (cittāni mucciṁsu their hearts were cleansed), Th.2, 2 (muccassu); Dh.127 (pāpakammā, quoted at PvA.104); Pv.II,2⁶; PvA.53 (niray’ûpapattito muccissati), 105; DhA.I,297 (dukkhā muccitu-kāma desirous of being delivered from unpleasantness; v. l. muñc°); II,92 (dukkhā). ‹-› 2. to send off, let loose, drop, give J.IV,272 (saraṁ an arrow); Vism.313 (dhenu vacchakassa khīra-dhāraṁ m.); Mhvs 25, 63 (phalakaṁ). -- 3. to let out of the yoke, to unharness, set free D.I,148 (satta usabhasatāni muñcāpeti); PvA.43 (yoggāni muñcitvā). ‹-› 4. to let go, emit, send forth (light) J.V,289 (obhāsaṁ muñci); Mhvs 19, 44 (rasmiyo). -- 5. to send forth (sound); to utter, emit (words etc.) J.I,375 (vācaṁ); Vv 64¹⁸ (mālā m. ghosaṁ=vissajjenti VvA.281). ‹-› 6. (from 4 & 5 in general) to undertake, to bestow, send forth, let loose on Dh.389: “na brāhmaṇassa pahareyya nâssa muñcetha brāhmaṇo,” where DhA.IV,148 supplements veran na muñcetha (i. e. kopaṁ na kareyya). In this case veraṁ muñcati would be the same as the usual veraṁ bandhati, thus opposite notions being used complementarily. The interpretation “give up” (enmity) instead of “undertake” is possible from a mere grammatical point of view. L. v. Sohroeder (Worte der Wahrheil) trsl^s “noch stürzt der Priester auf den Feind”! -- 7. to abandon, give up, leave behind Dh.348 (muñca, viz. taṇhaṁ DhA.IV,63); J.V,453 (peta-rāja-visayaṁ). -- 8. An idiomatic (late) use of the ger. muñciya (with Acc.) is in the sense of an adv. (or prep.), meaning “except, besides,” e. g. maṁ m. Mhvs 25, 67; imaṁ m. (besides this Mhvs 14, 17). -- Cp. pa°, paṭi°, vi°. Note. At Dh.71 muccati stands for muccheti (=Sk. mūrchati) to become stiff, coagulate, curdle; cp. DhA.II,67. (Page 535)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(muc + ŋ-a), 解放，放松，释放，送别，放出，放弃。【过】 muñci。【过分】 mutta, muñcita。【现分】 ~canta, ~camāna。【独】 ~citvā,~ciya。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(muc释放+ṁ-a), 解放，放松，释放，送别，放出，放弃。【过】muñci。【过分】mutta, muñcita。【现分】muñcanta, muñcamāna。【独】muñcitvā, muñciya。“sapattivāsā muccanatthāyā”ti(解放在和妻子的家(=获得家庭的幸福))', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Muñja: {'def': '[Vedic muñja, cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 72] 1. a sort of grass (reed) Saccharum munja Roxb. Sn.440. °kesa having a dark mane (like m. grass) D.II,174. °pādukā slipper made of m. grass DhA.III,451. °maya made of m. grass Sn.28. -- The reed itself is called isīkā (q. v.). -- 2. a sort of fish J.IV,70 (+rohita, taken as Dvandva by C.); VI,278 (id.). (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic muñja),【中】纤毛甘蔗(亚洲的一种粗壮甘蔗属植物 (Saccharum munja)，其强韧的杆通常用制绳索，麻线和篮子，古印度也用来造拖鞋等)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】纤毛甘蔗（亚洲的一种粗壮甘蔗属植物 (Saccharum munja)，其强韧的杆通常用制绳索，麻线和篮子，古印度也用来造拖鞋等）。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Muḷāla: {'def': '& Muḷālī (f.) [cp. Vedic mulālin. Zimmer, Altind Leben 70 mentions Bisa, Śāluka & Mulālin as edible roots of lotus kinds. -- Geiger, P.Gr. 12 & 43 puts muḷāla =Sk. mṛṇāla] the stalk of the lotus: muḷālī Vin.I,215 (bhisa+); muḷāli J.VI,530 (=muḷālaka C.); muḷālikā Vin.I,215 (bhisa+); bhisa-muḷālaṁ (nt.) (collective cpd.) fibre & stalks Vin.II,201=S.II,269; IV,94; V,39; Vism.361; VbhA.66. --muḷāli-puppha a lotus Th.1, 1089. (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】莲藕。muḷālapuppha,【中】莲花。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】莲藕。 ~puppha, 【中】莲花。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Muṅgusa: {'def': '【阳】獴(mungoose﹐一种獴属(Herpestes nyula) 的东半球食肉哺乳动物，有一柔软而灵活的躯体和长尾巴，善於捕食毒蛇)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】獴（一种獴属 (Herpestes nyula) 的东半球食肉哺乳动物，有一柔软而灵活的躯体和长尾巴，善于捕食毒蛇）。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Muṇḍa: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. BSk. muṇḍa] bald, shaven; a shaven, (bald-headed) ascetic, either a samaṇa, or a bhikkhu or (f.) bhikkhunī S.I,175 (m. saṅghāṭi-pāruta); Vin.IV,265 (f.); Sn.p. 80 (=muṇḍita-sīsa SnA 402). --kaṇṇa° with cropped or shorn ears (appl^d to a dog) Pv.II,12¹⁰, cp. muṇḍaka.

--pabbataka a bare mountain J.I,303 (Hatthimatta); VvA.302 (v. l. for T. muṇḍika-pabbata). --vaṭṭin “shaven hireling” (?), a king’s servant, probably porter Vin.II,137. The explⁿ given by Bdhgh on p. 319 (on CV. V, 29. 5) is twofold, viz. malla-kammakar’ādayo viya kacchaṁ banditvā nivāsenti; and muṇḍa-veṭṭhī (sic) ti yathā rañño kuhiñci gacchanto parikkhāra-bhaṇḍavahana-manussā ti adhippāyo. Maybe that reading veṭi is more correct. --sira shaven head DhA.II,125. (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】剃光头的，无植物的，光秃的。muṇḍaka,【阳】剃光头发的人，剃光头的。muṇḍacchadda,【阳】平顶的建筑物。muṇḍatta, muṇḍiya,【中】剃光头的事实。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】剃光头的，无植物的，光秃的。 ~ka,【阳】剃光头发的人，剃光头的。 ~cchadda, 【阳】平顶的建筑物。 ~tta, muṇḍiya, 【中】剃光头的事实。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Muṇḍaka: {'def': '=muṇḍa; cp. BSk. muṇḍaka Divy 13. -- Sn.p. 80; Dh.264 (=sīsa-muṇḍana-matta DhA.III,391, qualification of a shaveling); VvA.67 (°samaṇā, Dvandva). --aḍḍha° shaven over one half the head (sign of loss of freedom) Mhvs 6, 42. --kaṇṇa° “with blunt corners,” N. of one of the 7 great lakes: see under kaṇṇa. --paṭisīsaka the chignon of a shaveling, in phrase: kāsāyaṁ nivāsetvā muṇḍaka-paṭisīsakaṁ sīse paṭimuñcitvā fastening the (imitation) top-knot of a shaveling to his head Miln.90; cp. J.II,197 (paccekabuddha-vesaṁ gaṇhitvā paṭisīsakaṁ paṭimuñcitvā), similarly J.V,49. (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muṇḍana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. muṇḍa] shaving, tonsure DhA.III,391 (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muṇḍatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. muṇḍa] the fact of being shaven or shorn PvA.106. (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muṇḍeti: {'def': '(muṇḍ + e), 剃（头发）。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~ḍita。【独】 ~ḍetvā。(p257)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(muṇḍ剃发+e), 剃(头发)。【过】muṇḍesi。【过分】muṇḍita。【独】muṇḍetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[denom. -- Caus. from muṇḍa] to shave Mhbv 103. -- pp. muṇḍita. -- The BSk. has only Caus. II. muṇḍāpayati, at Divy 261. Should Dhtp 106 “muṇḍ= khaṇḍha” be the defⁿ of muṇḍati? -- At J.III,368 we find muṇḍati for muṇḍeti (kuṇṭha-satthena muṇḍanto viya), which should prob. be read muṇḍento. (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muṇḍika: {'def': '(-pabbata) bare (mountain), uncertain T. reading at VvA.302 for v. l. SS muṇḍa-pabbata (q. v.). (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muṇḍita: {'def': '[pp. of muṇḍeti] shaven SnA 402 (°sīsa). (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muṇḍiya: {'def': '[abstr. fr. muṇḍa] baldness, shaven condition (of ascetics & bhikkhus) M.I,515; Sn.249; Kvu I.95; Sdhp.374. (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muṭa: {'def': 'see mutoḷī. Otherwise occurring in Np. Muṭa-siva at Mhvs 11, 4. (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Muṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of mussati, mṛṣ] having forgotten, one who forgets; only in two cpds., viz. °sacca [der. fr. foll.: muṭṭha+sati+ya] forgetfulness, lit. forgotten-mindedness, usually comb^d with asampajañña, D.III,213; A.V,149; Pug.21; Dhs.1349 (where read: yā asati ananussati . . . adhāraṇatā pilāpanatā sammussanatā); Vbh.360, 373; Vism.21; DhA.IV,85; & °sati(n) (adj.) “forgetful in mindfulness,” i. e. forgetful, careless, bewildered [cp. BSk. amuṣitasmṛti Lal. V, 562, to all appearance (wrongly) derived from P. musati to rob, mus, muṣṇāti] D.III,252, 282; S.I,61 (+asampajāna); Pug.21, 35 (neither passage expl^d in PugA!); J.III,488; VbhA.275. As °satika at Miln.79. -- Note. muṭṭhasati with var. (unsuccessful) etym. is discussed in detail also by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, pp. 92--94. (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(mussati’忘记’的【过分】), 失念，已忘记。muṭṭhasacca,【中】健忘。muṭṭhassatī,【形】健忘的。S.35.95./IV,73.︰“Rūpaṁ disvā sati muṭṭhā, piyaṁ nimittaṁ manasi karoto; Sārattacitto vedeti, tañca ajjhosa tiṭṭhati. “Tassa vaḍḍhanti vedanā, anekā rūpasambhavā; Abhijjhā ca vihesā ca, cittamassūpahaññati. Evaṁ ācinato dukkhaṁ, ārā nibbānamuccati.(见色(相)之后失念，作意可爱相，体验心有执著，也黏住於此。他的感受增长，许多色(相)的交会，(产生)贪婪和恼乱，心的被伤害，如是正累积苦，远离涅盘解脱。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(mussati 的【过分】), 已忘记。 ~sacca, 【中】健忘。 ~ssatī, 【形】健忘的。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Muṭṭhi: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic muṣṭi, m. f. Does defⁿ “muṭ=maddane” at Dhtm 125 refer to muṭṭhi?] the fist VvA.206. muṭṭhī katvā gaṇhāti to take by making a fist, i. e. clutch tightly, clenching one’s fist J.VI,331. --muṭṭhiṁ akāsi he made a fist (as sign) J.VI,364. As --° often meaning “handful.” --ācariya-muṭṭhi close-fistedness in teaching, keeping things back from the pupil D.II,100; S.V,153; J.II,221, 250; VvA.138; SnA 180, 368. kuṇḍaka° handful of rice powder VvA.5; DhA.I,425. taṇḍula° handful of rice PvA.131. tila° do. of tilaseeds J.II,278. paṁsu° do. of soil J.VI,405. ritta° an empty fist SnA 306=DhA.IV,38 (°sadisa alluding to ignorance).

--yuddha fist-fight, boxing D.I,6. --sammuñjanī “fistbroom” a short broom DhA.II,184. (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】第一，柄，拳，握。muṭṭhika, muṭṭhimalla,【阳】摔交选手，拳击家。muṭṭhiyuddha,【中】拳击。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】第一，柄。 ~ka, ~malla, 【阳】摔交选手，拳击家。 ~yuddha, 【中】拳击。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Muṭṭhika: {'def': '[fr. muṭṭhi] 1. a fist-fighter, wrestler, boxer Vin.II,105 (malla°); J.IV,81 (Np.); VI,277; Vism.31 (+malla). -- 2. a sort of hammer J.V,45. (Page 536)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mā: {'def': '(indecl.) [cp. Vedic mā, Gr. mή] prohibition particle: not, do not, let us hope not, I wish that . . . not [cp. Lat. utinam & ne]. Constructed with various tenses, e. g. 1. with aor. (prohibitive tense): mā evaṁ akattha do not thus DhA.I,7; mā abhaṇi speak not Pv.I,3³; mā cintayittha do not worry DhA.I,12; mā parihāyi I hope he will not go short (or be deprived) of . . . M.I,444; mā bhāyi fear not J.II,159; mā mariṁsu I hope they will not die J.III,55; mā (te) rucci may it not please (you), i. e. please do not Vin.II,198; mā evaṁ ruccittha id. DhA.I,13. -- 2. with imper.: mā gaccha J.I,152; mā detha J.III,275. mā ghāta do not kill: see māghāta. -- 3. with pot.: mā anuyuñjetha Dh.27; mā bhuñjetha let him not eat Mhvs 25, 113; mā vadetha J.VI,364. ‹-› 4. with indic. pres.: mā paṭilabhati A.V,194. -- A peculiar use is found in phrase ānemi mā ānemi shall I bring it or not? J.VI,334. -- 5. mā=na (simple negation) in māsakkhimhā we could not Vin.III,23. (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】月亮(the short form of māsa)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】月亮。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '（禁止词：不要）别，莫。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. Vedic mā), (否定词)勿、莫、不应(prohibition particle: not, do not, let us hope not)。表达否定的命令、劝告，常配合aor.。mā evaṁ akattha, 不要这样(do not thus DhA.I,7)。mā abhaṇi, 勿说(speak not Pv.I.33)。mā cintayittha, 勿忧虑(do not worry DhA.I,12)。mā parihāyi, 勿衰退(I hope he will not go short (or be deprived) of…M.I,444)。mā bhāyi, 勿怖(fear not J.II.159; mā mariṁsu, 勿死(I hope they will not die J.III.55; mā (te) rucci may it not please (you), i. e. please do not Vin.II,198)。mā evaṁ ruccitth, 勿死(id. DhA.I,13)。2. with imper.: mā gaccha, 勿去(J.I.152)。mā detha, 勿施(J.III.275)。mā ghāta, 勿杀(do not kill: see māghāta)。3. with pot.: mā anuyuñjetha, (Dh.27)。mā bhuñjetha, 勿吃(let him not eat Mhvs 25, 113)。mā vadetha, 勿说(J.VI.364)。4. with indic. pres)。mā paṭilabhati, (A.V,194. -- A peculiar use is found in phrase ānemi mā ānemi, (shall I bring it or not? J.VI.334)。5. mā=na (simple negation) in māsakkhimhā, 我们不能(we could not Vin.III,23)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mādisa: {'def': '【形】象我的。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. mādrw & mādrwa, maṁ+ drw),【形】像我的(one like me)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Epic & Class. Sk. mādṛś & mādṛśa, maṁ+ dṛś] one like me Sn.482; Mhvs 5, 193; VvA.207; DhA.I,284; PvA.76, 123. (Page 528)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māgadha: {'def': 'māgadhaka, 【形】属于摩揭陀国的。 ~dhī, 【阴】摩揭陀国的语言。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. Magadha] scent-seller, (lit. “from Magadha”) Pv.II,9³⁷ (=gandhin PvA.127). (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Māgadhaka,【形】摩揭陀国的。Māgadhī,【阴】摩揭陀国的语言。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Māgadhaka: {'def': '(nt.) [māgadha+ka, lit. “from Magadha”] garlic Vin.IV,259 (lasuṇaṁ nāma māgadhakaṁ vuccati). (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māgadhikā: {'def': 'Māgadhī f. [＜Magadha] マガダ語.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Māgasira: {'def': '【阳】摩揭斯喇月(月名，大约十一月至十二月之间，农历10月16至11月15)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】摩揭斯喇月（月名，大约十一月至十二月之间）。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Māgavika: {'def': '【阳】猎人（捕鹿者）。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】猎人(捕鹿者)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[guṇa- form to *mṛga=P. miga; Sk. mārgavika] a deerstalker, huntsman A.II,207; Pug.56; Miln.364, 412; PvA.207. (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māgha: {'def': '【阳】摩伽月(月名，大约一月至二月之间，农历12月16至1月15)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】摩伽月（月名，大约一月至二月之间）。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Māghāta: {'def': '【阳】禁杀令(不可杀生的旨令)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】禁杀令（不可杀生的旨令）。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [lit. mā ghāta “kill not”] the injunction not to kill, non-killing order (with ref. to the killing of animals J.III,428 (°bheri, the drum announcing this order); IV,115; VI,346 (uposatha°). (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māla: {'def': 'mālaka, 【阳】圆围墙的场地，圆院子。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'mālaka,【阳】圆围墙的场地，圆院子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(māḷa) [?] 1. mud [is it mis-spelling of mala?], in pakka-m°-kalala (boiling mud) J.VI,400. Kern, Toev. s. v. believes to see the same word in phrase mālā-kacavara at J.II,416 (but very doubtful). -- 2. perhaps= froth, dirty surface, in pheṇa° Miln.117 (cp. mālin 2), where it may however be māla (“wreaths of foam”). ‹-› 3. in asi° the interpretation given under asi (as “dirt” see above p. 88) has been changed into “sword-garland,” thus taking it as mālā. (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mālaka: {'def': '(Māḷaka) [fr. māla or māḷa] a circular (consecrated) enclosure, round, yard (cp. Geiger, Mhvs. trsl. 99: “m. is a space marked off and usually terraced, within which sacred functions were carried out. In the Mahāvihāra (Tiss’ārāma) at Anurādhapura there were 32 mālakas; Dpvs XIV.78; Mhvs 15, 192. The sacred Bodhi-tree e. g. was surrounded by a malaka”). -- The word is peculiar to the late (Jātaka-) literature, & is not found in the older texts. -- J.I,449 (vikkama°); IV,306; V,49 (visāla°), 138 (id., spelling maḷaka); Mhvs 15, 36 (Mahā-mucala°); 16, 15; 32, 58 (saṅghassa kamma°, encl. for ceremonial acts of the S., cp. 15, 29); DhA.IV,115 (°sīmā); Vism.342 (vitakka°). (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mālatī: {'def': '(f.) [fr. mālā] the great-flowered jasmine Abhp 576. Cp. mālikā. (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】大花素馨(great-flowered jasmine﹐见 Jātisumanā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】大花素馨（见 Jātisumanā）。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mālika: {'def': 'mālī, 【形】有花环的，有花的。 ~linī, 【阴】女人戴着花环。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Mālī,【形】1.有花环的，有花的。2.(人名)胜鬘夫人，为舍卫城波斯匿王之女，母名末利。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. mālā or mala?] name of a dice J.VI,281. (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [fr. mālā] a gardener, florist Abhp 507. (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mālikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. mālā] double jasmine Dāvs 5, 49. (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mālin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. mālā] 1. wearing a garland (or row) of flowers (etc.) Pv III,9¹ (=mālābhārin PvA.211); f. mālinī Vv 36² (nānā-ratana°); Mhvs 18, 30 (vividhadhaja° mahābodhi). -- 2. (perhaps to māla) bearing a stain of, muddy, in pheṇa° with a surface (or is it garland? ) of scum Miln.260. -- 3. what does it mean in pañca°, said at J.VI,497 of a wild animal? (C. not clear with explⁿ “pañcaṅgika-turiya-saddo viya”). (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mālinī: {'def': '【阴】女人戴著花环。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Māluka: {'def': '(m. or f.?) [of uncertain origin] a kind of vessel, only in camma° leather bag (?) J.VI,431 (where v. l. reads camma-pasibbakāhi vālukādīhi), 432 (gloss c.‹-› pasibbaka). (Page 531)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māluta: {'def': '【阳】风。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[the proper Pali form for māruta, the a-stem form of maru²=Vedic marut or māruta] wind, air, breeze S.IV,218; Th.I,2; II,372; J.I,167; IV,222; V,328; VI,189; Miln.319; Vism.172 (=vāyu); VvA.174, 178.

--īrita (contracted to māluterita) moved by the wind, fanned by the breeze Th.1, 754; II,372; Vv 44¹²=81⁶; Pv.II,12³. See similar expressions under īrita. (Page 531)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】风。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Māluvā: {'def': '【阴】攀缘植物生长在树上而慢慢地破坏那棵树。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】一种攀缘植物，生长在树上而慢慢地破坏那棵树。Māluvāsipāṭikā,葛之果皮(葛藤子)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. BSk. mālu] a (long) creeper M.I,306; S.I,207; A.I,202 sq.; Sn.272; Dh.162, 334; J.III,389; V,205, 215, 389; V,205, 215, 389; VI,528 (phandana°); DhA.III,152; IV,43. -- On maluvā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 123. (Page 531)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mālya: {'def': 'see malya. (Page 531)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】花环。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】花环。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mālā: {'def': '【阴】花环，花圈，花，一串。mālākamma,【中】花环手工，壁画。mālākāra,【阳】制造花环者，花匠。mālāgaccha,【阳】开花植物。mālāguṇa,【阳】一串花。mālāguḷa,【中】花丛。mālācumbaṭaka,【阳】花冠〔戴在头上的花串〕。mālādāma,【阳】花串。mālādhara,【形】戴著花环的。mālādhārī, mālābhārī,【形】戴著花圈的。mālāpuṭa,【阳】花的容器。mālāvaccha,【中】花圃，多花的床。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. mālā] garland, wreath, chaplet; collectively=flowers; fig. row, line Sn.401; Pug.56; Vism.265 (in simile); Pv.II,3¹⁶ (gandha, m., vilepana, as a “lady’s” toilet outfit); II,4⁹ (as one of the 8 or 10 standard gifts to a bhikkhu: see dāna, deyyadhamma & yañña); PvA.4=J.III,59 (ratta-kaṇavera° a wreath of red K. flowers on his head: apparel of a criminal to be executed. Cp. ratta-māla-dhara wearing a red garland J.III,179, an ensign of the executioner); PvA.51, 62. --asi °-kamma the sword-garland torture (so correct under asi!) J.III,178; Dāvs III,35; dīpa° festoons of lamps Mhvs 5, 181; 34, 77 (°samujjota); nakkhatta° the garland of stars VvA.167; puppha° a garland or wreath of flowers Mhvs 5, 181. -- On mālā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 123. In compⁿ māla° sometimes stands for mālā°.

--kamma garland-work, garlands, festoons VvA.188. --kāra garland-maker, florist, gardener (cp. Fick, Sociale Gleiderung 38, 182) J.V,292; Miln.331; DhA.I,208, 334; VvA.170, 253 (°vīthi). --kita adorned with garlands, wreathed Vin.I,208. --guṇa “garland-string,” garlands, a cluster of garlands Dh.53 (=mālā-nikaṭi “makeup” garlands DhA.I,419; i. e. a whole line of garlands made as “ekato-vaṇṭika-mālā” and “ubhato-v.-m.,” one & two stalked g., cp. Vin.III,180). mālā guṇaparikkhittā one adorned with a string of gs., i. e. a marriageable woman or a courtesan M.I,286=A.V,264. --guḷa a cluster of gs., a bouquet Vin.III,139; SnA 224; VvA.32, 111 (v. l. guṇa). --cumbaṭaka a cushion of garlands, a chaplet of flowers DhA.I,72. --dāma a wreath of flowers J.II,104. --dhara wearing a wreath J.III,179 (ratta°, see also above). --dhārin wearing a garland or wreath (on the head) Pv III,1¹ (kusuma°; v. l. BB °bhārin); PvA.169 (v. l. °bhārin); f. dhārinī Vv 32³ (uppala°, of a Petī. See also bhārin). --puṭa a basket for flowers DhA.III,212. --bhārin wearing a wreath (chaplet) [the reading changes between °bhārin & °dhārin; the BSk. prefers °dhārin, e. g. MVastu I.124 & °dhāra at Divy 218] J.IV,60, 82; V,45; PvA.211 (v. l. °dhārin); f. °bhārinī J.III,530; VvA.12; & bhārī Th.1, 459 (as v. l.; T. reads °dhārī). Cp. °dhārin. --vaccha [vaccha here= vṛkṣa] a small flowering tree or plant, an ornamental plant Vin.II,12; III,179; Vism.172 (v. l. °gaccha); DhA.II,109 (q. v. for explⁿ: taruṇarukkha-puppha). (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】花环，花圈，花，一串。 ~kamma, 【中】花环手工，壁画。 ~kāra,【阳】制造花环者，花匠。 ~gaccha, 【阳】开花植物。 ~guṇa, 【阳】一串花。 ~guḷa, 【中】花丛。 ~cumbaṭaka, 【阳】花冠〔戴在头上的花串〕。 ~dāma, 【阳】花串。 ~dhara, 【形】戴着花环的。 ~dhārī, ~bhārī,【形】戴着花圈的。 ~puṭa, 【阳】花的容器。 ~vaccha, 【中】花圃，多花的床。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mālūra: {'def': '【阳】孟加拉苹果树(见 Billa)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[late Sk.] the tree Aegle marmelos Abhp 556. (Page 531)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】孟加拉苹果树（见 Billa）。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Māmaka: {'def': '(‹mama, lit. “mine” ),【形】专心於…的，亲爱的(one who shows affection (not only for himself), making one’s own, i.e. devoted to, loving)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】专心于…的，亲爱的。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. mama] lit. “mine,” one who shows affection (not only for himself), making one’s own, i.e. devoted to, loving Sn.806 (=Buddha°, Dhamma°, Saṅgha° Nd¹ 125; =mamāyamāna SnA 534), 927 (same explⁿ at Nd¹ 382); Miln.184 (ahiṁsayaṁ paraṁ loke piyo hohisi māmako ti), -- Buddha° devoted to the B. J.I,299; DhA.I,206. f. °māmikā J.III,182. ‹-› In Voc. f. māmike at Th.2, 207 (cp. ThA.172) “mother,” we may perhaps have an allusion to mā “mother” [cp. Sk. māma uncle, Lat. mamma mother, and mātā]. --amāmaka see sep.; this may also be taken as “not loving.” (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māna: {'def': '【阳】自豪，自负。 ~tthaddha, 【形】自傲顽固的（死爱面子）。 ~da,【形】激发尊敬的。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [fr. mā: see mināti; Vedic māna has 2 meanings, viz. “measure,” and “building” (cp. māpeti)] 1. measure Vin.III,149 (abbhantarima inner, bāhirima outer); DA.I,140. --°kūṭa cheating in measure, false measure Pug.58; PvA.278. -- 2. a certain measure, a Māna (cp. mānikā & manaṁ) J.I,468 (aḍḍha° half a M., according to C. equal to 8 nāḷis). (Page 528)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'māṇa,【中】测量，度量。mānakūṭa,【阳】错误的尺寸。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[late Vedic & Epic Sk. māna, fr. man, orig. meaning perhaps “high opinions” (i. e. No. 2); hence “pride” (No. 1). Def. of root see partly under māneti, partly under mināti] 1. pride, conceit, arrogance (cittassa uṇṇati Nd¹ 80; Vbh.350). Māna is one of the Saññojanas. It is one of the principal obstacles to Arahantship. A detailed analysis of māna in tenfold aspect is given at Nd¹ 80=Nd² 505; ending with defⁿ “māno maññanā . . . ketukamyatā” etc. (cp. Vbh.350 & see under mada). On term see also Dhs.§ 1116; Dhs.trsl. 298 (=²275) sq. -- D.III,234; S.I,4; Sn.132, 370; 469, 537, 786, 889, 943, Dh.74, 150, 407; Nd¹ 298; Pug.18; Vbh.345 sq., 353 sq., 383 (7 fold), 389 (9 fold); VbhA.486 sq. (“seyyo’ham asmī ti” etc.); Tikp 166, 278; DhA.III,118, 252; Sdhp.500, 539. --asmi° pride of self, as real egoism D.III,273. -- 2. honour, respect J.V,331 (+pūjā). Usually in cpd. bahumāna great respect Mhvs 20, 46; PvA.50. Also as māni° in compⁿ with karoti: see mānikata. Cp. vi°, sam°

--âtimāna pride & conceit, very great (self-) pride. or all kinds of conceit (see 10 fold māna at Nd¹ 80= Nd² 505) D.III,86; Sn.245, 830, 862; Nd¹ 170, 257. --atthe at Th.1, 214 read mânatthe=mā anatthe. --ânusaya the predisposition or bad tendency of pride M.I,486; D.III,254, 282; Sn.342. Cp. mamaṅkāra. --âbhisamaya full grasp (i. e. understanding) of pride (with sammā°) M.I,122 (which Kern. Toev. s. v. interprets wrongly as “waanvoorstelling”); S.IV,205 sq., 399; Sn.342 (=mānassa abhisamayo khayo vayo pahānaṁ SnA 344). --jātika proud by nature J.I,88. --thaddha stubborn in pride, stiff-necked J.I,88, 224. --da inspiring respect Mhvs 33, 82. --mada (-matta) (drunk with) the intoxicating draught of pride J.II,259; PvA.86. --saññojana the fetter of pride or arrogance D.III,254; Dhs.1116=1233. See under saññojana & cp. formulæ under mada 2. --satta cleaving to conceit Sn.473. --salla the sting or dart of pride Nd¹ 59 (one of the 7 sallāni, viz. rāga, dosa, moha etc., expl^d in detail on p. 413. See other series with similar terms & māna at Nd² p. 237 s. v. rāga). (Page 528)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】自豪，自负，(我)慢，贡高。mānatthaddha,【形】自傲顽固的(死爱面子)。mānada,【形】激发尊敬的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'māṇa, 【中】测量，度量。 ~kūṭa, 【阳】错误的尺寸。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mānana: {'def': '(nt.) & Mānanā (f.) [fr. māna¹] paying honour or respect; reverence, respect S.I,66; J.II,138; Pug.19, 22; Miln.377 (with sakkāra, vandana, pūjana & apaciti); Dhs.1121; DhsA.373. -- Cp. vi°, sam°. (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】敬礼，尊敬。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】敬礼，尊敬。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mānasa: {'def': '【中】心意，意图。【形】(在【合】中) 有意图的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】心意，意图。【形】 (在【合】中) 有意图的。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [a secondary formation fr. manas=mano, already Vedic lit. “belonging to mind”] intention, purpose, mind (as active force), mental action. Almost equivalent to mano Dhs.§ 6. In later language mānasa is quite synonymous with hadaya. The word, used absolutely, is more a t. t. in philosophy than a living part of the language. It is more frequent as --° in adj. use, where its connection with mano is still more felt. Its absolute use probably originated from the latter use. -- DhsA.140 (=mano); Vbh.144 sq. (in definition of viññāṇa as cittaṁ, mano, mānasaṁ, hadayaṁ etc.: see mano II.3); DhA.II,12 (paradāre mānasaṁ na bandhissāmi “shall have no intention towards another’s wife,” i. e. shall not desire another’s wife); Mhvs 4, 6 (sabbesaṁ hita-mānasā with the intention of common welfare); 32, 56 (rañño hāsesi mānasaṁ gladdened the heart of the king). -- As adj. (-°): being of such & such a mind, having a . . . mind, with a . . . heart; like: ādīna° with his mind in danger S.V,74 (+apatiṭṭhitacitta); uggata° lofty-minded VvA.217; pasanna° with settled (peaceful) mind Sn.402 and frequently; mūḷha° infatuated Mhvs 5, 239; rata° PvA.19; sañcodita° urged (in her heart) PvA.68; soka-santatta° with a heart burning with grief PvA.38. (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mānassin: {'def': '(adj. n.) [prob. fr. manassin (*manasvin) under influence of māna. Cp. similar formation mānavant] proud Vin.II,183 (expl^d by Bdhgh in a popular way as “mana-ssayino māna-nissitā”). The corresponding passage at J.I,88 reads māna-jātikā māna-tthaddhā. (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mānasāna: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. mānasa, secondary formation]= mānasa in adj. use Sn.63 (rakkhita°). (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mānatta: {'def': '(nt.) [a doubtful word, prob. corrupted out of something else, maybe omānatta, if taken as der. fr. māna¹. If however taken as belonging to māna² as an abstr. der., it might be expl^d as “measuring, taking measures,” which suits the context better. The BSk. form is still more puzzling, viz. mānāpya “something pleasant”: Mvyut § 265] a sort of penance, attached to the commission of a saṅghādisesa offence DhsA.399 (+parivāsa). °ṁ deti to inflict penance on somebody Vin.II,7 (+parivāsaṁ deti); IV,225. mānatt’âraha deserving penance Vin.II,55, 162 (parivāsika+). See on term Vin. Texts II.397. (Page 528)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐摩那埵，谓於大众面前告白忏悔之治罪法。pakkhamānattaṁ caritabbaṁ(行半月摩那埵)，指犯僧残(重罪)之比丘尼必须在比丘、比丘尼两部众之间接受半月的摩那埵。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mānava: {'def': 'see Māṇava. (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mānavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. māna¹] possessed of pride, full of conceit; neg. a° not proud Th.1, 1222. (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māneti: {'def': '(man+e), 尊敬，崇敬，看重，器重。【过】mānesi。【现分】mānenta。【独】mānetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(man + e), 尊敬，崇敬，看重，器重。【过】 mānesi。【现分】 mānenta。【独】 mānetvā。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of man, cp. Sk. mānayati, Lat. moneo to admonish. Ger. mahnen, Ags. manian. The Dhtp 593 gives root as mān in meaning “pūjā”] to honour, revere, think highly of PvA.54 (aor. mānesuṁ,+garukariṁsu+pūjesuṁ). -- pp. mānita. (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mānikata: {'def': '[pp. of a verb māni-karoti, which stands for māna-karoti, and is substituted for mānita after analogy of purakkhata, of same meaning] lit. “held in high opinion,” i. e. honoured, worshipped S.II,119 (garukata m. pūjita). (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mānikā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. māna² 2] a weight, equal to 4 Doṇas SnA 476 (catudoṇaṁ mānikā). Cp. BSk. mānikā, e. g. Divy 293 sq. (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mānin: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. mana¹] proud (of) Sn.282 (samaṇa°), 889 (paripuṇṇa°); Dh.63 (paṇḍita° proud of his cleverness, cp. DhA.II,30); J.I,454 (atireka°); III,357 (paṇḍita°); Sdhp.389, 417. -- f. māninī Mhvs 20, 4 (rūpa° proud of her beauty). (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mānita: {'def': '[pp. of māneti] revered, honoured Ud.73 (sakkata m. pūjita apacita). -- A rather singular by-form is mānikata (q. v.). (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(māneti 的【过分】)。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '﹐[māneti尊敬] 的【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mānusa: {'def': '【形】人。【阳】男人。mānusaka,【形】人。mānusī,【阴】女人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】人。【阳】男人。 ~ka, 【形】人。 ~sī, 【阴】女人。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj. n.) [cp. Vedic mānuṣa; fr. same base (manus) as manussa] 1. (adj.) human Sn.301 (bhoga); It.94 (kāmā dibbā ca mānusā); Pv.II,9²¹ (m. deha); 9⁵⁶ (id.). --amānusa divine Vv 35⁶; Pv.II,12²⁰; ghostly (=superhuman) Pv IV.3⁶; f. amānusī Pv III,7.⁹ -- 2. (n. m.) a human being, a man Mhvs 15, 64; f. mānusī a (human) woman J.IV,231; Pv.II,4¹. --amānusa a superhuman being Pv IV.1⁵⁷. -- pl. mānusā men Sn.361, 644; Pv.II,11⁷. As nt. in collective sense=mankind Pv.II,11³ (v. l. mānussaṁ; C.=manussaloka). (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mānusaka: {'def': '=mānusa, viz. 1. (adj.) human: A.I,213 (sukhaṁ); Sn.524 (brahma-khettaṁ); Dh.417 (yogaṁ= m. kāyaṁ DhA.IV,225); Vv 35⁶; J.I,138 (kāmā). -- f. manusikā Vism.407. -- 2. a human being, man Pv IV.1⁵⁷. Also nt. (collectively) pl. mānusakāni human beings, men DhA.I,233. (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mānī: {'def': '【阳】骄傲的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】骄傲的人。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Māpaka: {'def': '【阳】造物主，建设者。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(-°) (adj. n.) [fr. māpeti] one who measures, only in doṇa° (a minister) measuring the d. revenue (of rice) J.II,367, 381; DhA.IV,88; and in dhañña° measuring corn or grain J.III,542 (°kamma, the process of . . .); Vism.278 (in comparison). (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】造物主，建设者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Māpeti: {'def': '(mā+āpe), 建立，构造，产生，神变(以神通力变出)。【过】māpesi。【独】māpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(mā + āpe), 建立，构造，产生，神变（以神通力变出）。【过】 ~esi。【独】 māpetvā。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of mā, see mināti. The simplex mimīte has the meaning of “erect, build” already in Vedic Sk.] 1. to build, construct S.II,106 (nagaraṁ); Mhvs 6, 35 (id.); Vv 84⁵³; VvA.260. -- 2. to create, bring about, make or cause to appear by supernatural power (in folkoristic literature, cp. nimmināti in same sense) J.II,111 (sarīraṁ nāvaṁ katvā māpesi transformed into a ship); IV,274; Mhvs 28, 31 (maggaṁ caused a road to appear). -- 3. to measure out (?), to declare (?), in a doubtful passage J.IV,302, where a misreading is probable, as indicated by v. l. BB (samāpassiṁsu for T. tena amāpayiṁsu). Perhaps we should read tena-māsayiṁsu. (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māpita: {'def': '(māpeti 的【过分】), 已产生。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(māpeti 的【过分】), 已产生。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Māra: {'def': '(fr. mr, later Vedic, māra killing, destroying, bringing death, pestilence)【阳】魔王，弊魔，撒旦，死亡的化身(death; usually personified as Np. Death, the Evil one, the Tempter)。mārakāyika,【形】魔天的。māradheyya,【中】魔界。mārabandhana,【中】死亡的脚镣。mārasenā,【阴】魔军。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': "(lit. 'the killer'), is the Buddhist 'Tempter-figure. He is often called 'Māra the Evil One' (pāpimā māro) or Namuci (lit. 'the non-liberator', i.e. the opponent of liberation). He appears in the texts both as a real person (i.e. as a deity) and as personification of evil and passions, of the totality of worldly existence, and of death. Later Pāḷi literature often speaks of a 'fivefold Māra' (pañca-māra): 1. M. as a deity (devaputta-māra), 2. the M. of defilements (kilesa-m.), 3. the M. of the aggregates (khandha-m.), 4. the M. of the kamma-formations (kamma-m.), and 5. Māra as death (maccu-m.).

As a real person, M. is regarded as the deity ruling over the highest heaven of the sensuous sphere (kāmāvacara ), that of the paranimmitavasavatti-devas, the 'deities wielding power over the creations of others' (Com. to M. 1). According to tradition, when the Bodhisatta was seated under the Bodhi-tree, Māra tried in vain to obstruct his attainment of Enlightenment, first by frightening him through his hosts of demons, etc., and then by his 3 daughters' allurements. This episode is called 'Māra's war' (māra-yuddha). For 7 years M. had followed the Buddha, looking for any weakness in him; that is, 6 years before the Enlightenment and one year after it (Sn. v. 446). He also tried to induce the Buddha to pass away into Parinibbāna without proclaiming the Dhamma, and also when the time for the Buddha's Parinibbāna had come, he urged him on. But the Buddha acted on his own insight in both cases. See D. 16.

For (3) M. as the aggregates, s. S. XXIII, 1, 11, 12, 23. See Padhāna Sutta (Sn. v. 425ff.); Māra Saṃyutta (S. IV).", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}; {'def': '[fr. mṛ, later Vedic, māra killing, destroying, bringing death, pestilence, cp. Lat. mors death, morbus illness, Lith. māras death, pestilence] death; usually personified as Np. Death, the Evil one, the Tempter (the Buddhist Devil or Principle of Destruction). Sometimes the term māra is applied to the whole of the worldly existence, or the realm of rebirth, as opposed to Nibbāna. Thus the defⁿ of m. at Nd² 506 gives “kammâbhisaṅkhāra-vasena paṭisandhiko khandha- māro, dhātu°, āyatana°. -- Other general epithets of M (quasi twin-embodiments) are given with Kaṇha, Adhipati, Antaka, Namuci, Pamattabandhu at Nd¹ 489=Nd² 507; the two last ones also at Nd¹ 455. The usual standing epithet is pāpimā “the evil one,” e. g. S.I,103 sq. (the famous Māra-Saṁyutta: see Windisch, Māra & Buddha); Nd¹ 439; DhA.IV,71 (Māravatthu) & freq. -- See e. g. Sn.32, 422, 429 sq., 1095, 1103; Dh.7, 40, 46, 57, 105, 175, 274; Nd¹ 475; Vism.79, 228, 376; KhA 105; SnA 37, 44 sq., 225, 350 sq., 386 sq.; Sdhp.318, 449, 609. Further refs. & details see under Proper Names.

--âbhibhū overcoming M. or death Sn.545=571. --kāyika a class of gods Miln.285; KvuA 54. --dhītaro the daughters of M. SnA 544. --dheyya being under the sway of M.; the realm or kingdom of Māra A.IV,228; Sn.764; Dh.34 (=kilesa-vaṭṭa DhA.I,289). --bandhana the fetter of death Dh.37, 276, 350 (=tebhūmaka-vaṭṭasaṅkhātaṁ DhA.IV,69). --senā the army of M. Sn.561, 563; SnA 528. (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】魔王，撒旦，死亡的化身。 ~kāyika, 【形】属于魔天的。 ~dheyya,【中】魔界。 ~bandhana, 【中】死亡的脚镣。 ~senā, 【阴】魔军。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '魔;魔罗;恶魔;死神', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Māraka: {'def': '【形】带来死亡的，杀人者。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(-°) [fr. māreti] one who kills or destroys, as manussa° man-killer J.II,182; hatthi° elephant-killer DhA.I,80. -- m. in phrase samāraka (where the --ka belongs to the whole cpd.) see under samāraka. (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】带来死亡的，杀人者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Māratta: {'def': '(nt.) [*Māra-tvaṁ] state of, or existence as a Māra god, Māraship Vbh.337. (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māraṇa: {'def': '【中】杀。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹caus. māreti),【中】杀，屠杀，屠宰(killing, slaughter, death)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. Caus. māreti] killing, slaughter, death D.II,128; Sdhp.295, 569. (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māretar: {'def': '[n. ag. to māreti] one who kills, slayer, destroyer S.III,189. (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māreti: {'def': '[Caus. of mṛ] to kill: see under marati. -- pp. mārita. (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(mar + e), 杀。【过】 māresi。【现分】 mārenta。【独】 māretvā。【不】 māretuŋ。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(mar+e), 杀。【过】māresi。【现分】mārenta。【独】māretvā。【不】māretuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Māretu: {'def': '【阳】凶手。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】凶手。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mārisa: {'def': '【形】(只在【处】) 爵士，先生，阁下。SA.1.1./I,17.：Mārisāti devatānaṁ piyasamudācāravacanametaṁ.(‘友’是诸天人的亲切表示的(称呼)语言)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [perhaps identical with mādisa] only in Voc. as respectful term of address, something like “Sir,” pl. “Sirs.” In sg. mārisa M.I,327; A.III,332; Sn.814, 1036, 1038, 1045 etc.; Nd¹ 140=Nd² 508 (here expl^d by same formula as āyasmā, viz. piya-vacanaṁ garu-vacanaṁ etc.); J.V,140; Pv.II,13³; Mhvs 1, 27. -- pl. mārisā Sn.682; J.I,47, 49; Vism.415; PvA.75. Explained by Buddhaghosa to mean niddukkha K.S. I.2 n. (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】 (只在【处】) 爵士，先生，阁下。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mārita: {'def': '(māreti 的【过分】)。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(māreti 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of māreti] killed S.I,66; Vin.III,72; J.II,417 (aññehi m.-bhāvaṁ jānātha). (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māruta: {'def': '【阳】风。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】风。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[for the usual māluta] the wind S.I,127; Mhbv 8. (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mārāpana: {'def': '【中】令人被杀。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】令人被杀。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mārāpeti: {'def': '(mareti 的【使】), 使被杀。【过】mārāpesi。【过分】mārāpita。【独】mārāpetvā。【现分】mārāpenta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(mareti 的【使】), 使被杀。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 mārāpita。【独】 ~petvā。【现分】 ~penta。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. II. of mṛ]: see marati. -- pp. mārāpita. (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mārāpita: {'def': '[pp. of mārāpeti] killed J.II,417; III,531. (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mārāpitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. mārāpita] being incited to kill DhA.I,141. (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māsa: {'def': '2(Vedic māsa, Phaseolus indica, closely related to another species: mudga Phaseolus mungo), 【阳】菜豆、绿豆(一种直立灌木状一年生豆类 (Phaseolus aureus)，可能原产印度，现广泛栽培於温暖地区，作绿肥或饲料，种子可食，通常绿色或黄色，是中国烹调中豆芽的主要原料)(a bean；Phaseolus indica or radiata); usually combd with mugga. Also used as a weight (or measure?) in dhañña-māsa, which is said to be equal to 7 lice: VbhA 343。pl. māse Vv 806 (=māsa-sassāni VvA 310)。odaka bean-water KhA 237。khetta a field of beans VvA 808; VvA 308。-bīja bean-seed DhA III.212。-vana plantation J V.37 (+mugga°).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '³ [identical with māsa²] a small coin (=māsaka) J.II,425 (satta māsā=s. māsakā C.). (Page 531)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [Vedic māṣa, Phaseolus indica, closely related to another species: mudga Phaseolus mungo] a bean (Phaseolus indica or radiata); usually comb^d with mugga, e. g. Vin.III,64; Miln.267, 341; DA.I,83. Also used as a weight (or measure?) in dhañña-māsa, which is said to be equal to 7 lice: VbhA.343. -- pl. māse Vv 80⁶ (=māsa-sassāni VvA.310).

--odaka bean-water KhA 237. --khetta a field of beans VvA.80⁸; VvA.308. --bīja bean-seed DhA.III,212. --vana plantation J.V,37 (+mugga°). (Page 531)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1(cp. Vedic māsa, & mās),【阳】【中】一个月(a month)。māsasika,【形】每个月都发生的，一个月一次的。印度月份相当於中国农历月份：Citta=2月16~3月15﹐Vesākha=3月16~4月15﹐ Jeṭṭha=4月16~5月15﹐āsāḷha=5月16~6月15，Sāvaṇa=6月16~7月15﹐Poṭṭhapāda= 7月16~8月15﹐Assayuja=8月16~9月15﹐Kattika=9月16~10月15﹐Māgasira=10月16~11月15﹐Phussa=11月16~12月15﹐Māgha=12月16~1月15﹐Phagguna=1月16~2月15。addhamāsa,半月。sukka-pakkha, 白分(白月，阴历初一至十五日，由月盈至满)。kaṇha-pakkha, 黑分(黑月，自阴历十六日至二九或三十日(印度则说黑月一日至十四或十五日)，由月亏至晦)。antotemāse, 在三个月内。āsāḷhi-māsa VvA 307 (=gimhānaṁ pacchima māsa); pl. dve māsā PvA 34 (read māse); cattāro gimhāna-māsā KhA 192 (of which the 1st is Citra, otherwise called Paṭhama-gimha “1st summer” and Bāla-vasanta “premature spring”). -- Instr. pl. catūhi māsehi Miln. 82; PvA I.1012. -- Acc. pl. as adv.: dasamāse 10 months J I.52; bahu-māse PvA 135; also nt. chammāsāni 6 months S III.155. Freq. Acc. sg. collectively: a period of . . ., e. g. temāsaṁ(=temāsī?) 3 months DhsA 15; PvA 20; catu° DA I.83; PvA 96; satta° PvA 20; dasa° PvA 63; aḍḍha° a fortnight Vin IV.117. -- On māsa (& f. māsī), as well as shortened form °ma see puṇṇa.%b\xa0\xa0--puṇṇatā fullness or completion of the month DA I.140; --mattaṁ (adv.) for the duration of a month PvA 19.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '3(identical with māsa2), 摩沙(迦)(a small coin=māsaka) (satta māsā=satta māsakā C.).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】一个月，绿豆（一种直立灌木状一年生豆类 (Phaseolus aureus)，可能原产印度，现广泛栽培于温暖地区，作绿肥或饲料，种子可食，通常绿色或黄色，是中国烹调中豆芽的主要原料）。 ~sika, 【形】每个月都发生的，一个月一次的。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [cp. Vedic māsa, & mās; Gr. mήn (Ionic meiζ); Av. māh (moon & month); Lat. mensis; Oir. mī; Goth. mēna=moon; Ohg. māno, mānōt month. Fr. *mē to measure: see mināti] a month, as the 12^th part of the year. The 12 months are (beginning with what chronologically corresponds to our middle of March): Citta (Citra), Vesākha, Jeṭṭha, Āsāḷha, Sāvaṇa, Poṭṭhapāda, Assayuja, Kattika, Māgasira, Phussa, Māgha, Phagguna. As to the names cp. nakkhatta. Usually in Acc., used adverbially; Nom. rare, e. g. aḍḍha-māso half-month VvA.66; Āsāḷhi-māsa VvA.307 (=gimhānaṁ pacchima māsa); pl. dve māsā PvA.34 (read māse); cattāro gimhāna-māsā KhA 192 (of which the 1^st is Citra, otherwise called Paṭhama-gimha “1^st summer” and Bāla-vasanta “premature spring”). -- Instr. pl. catūhi māsehi Miln. 82; PvA.I,10¹². -- Acc. pl. as adv.: dasamāse 10 months J.I,52; bahu-māse PvA.135; also nt. chammāsāni 6 months S.III,155. Freq. Acc. sg. collectively: a period of . . ., e. g. temāsaṁ 3 months DhsA.15; PvA.20; catu° DA.I,83; PvA.96; satta° PvA.20; dasa° PvA.63; aḍḍha° a fortnight Vin.IV,117. -- On māsa (& f. māsī), as well as shortened form °ma see puṇṇa.

--puṇṇatā fullness or completion of the month DA.I,140; --mattaṁ (adv.) for the duration of a month PvA.19. (Page 531)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māsaka: {'def': '【阳】小硬币（大约相等于一盘米饭的价值）。(p255)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. māsa²+ka=māsa³] lit. a small bean, used as a standard of weight & value; hence a small coin of very low value. Of copper, wood & lac (DhsA.318; cp. KhA 37; jatu°, dāru°, loha°); the suvaṇṇa° (golden m.) at J.IV,107 reminds of the “gold” in fairy tales. That its worth is next to nothing is seen from the descending progression of coins at DhA.III,108=VvA.77, which, beginning with kahāpaṇa, aḍḍha-pāda, places māsaka & kāhaṇikā next to mudhā “gratis.” It only “counts” when it amounts to 5 māsakas. -- Vin.III,47, 67; IV,226 (pañca°); J.I,112 (aḍḍha-māsakaṁ na agghati is worth nothing); IV,107; V,135 (first a rain of flowers, then of māsakas, then kahāpaṇas); DhA.II,29 (pañca-m.-mattaṁ a sum of 5 m.); PvA.282 (m+aḍḍha° half-pennies & farthings, as children’s pocket-money). (Page 531)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】直译：摩沙迦(当时的钱币)。规定偷窃五摩沙迦(古译：五钱)或五摩沙迦以上的物品构成死罪，是比照印度摩揭陀当时的国法。五个摩沙迦相当於一个pāda。《五分律》《四分律》《十诵律》皆译为「钱」，《僧祇律》译为「分」。aḍḍhamāsaka﹐【阳】半分钱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Māsakkhimhā: {'def': 'at Vin.III,23 is for mā asakkhimhā “we could not”; mā here stands for na. (Page 531)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māsalu: {'def': '[reading uncertain] only Instr. māsalunā Miln.292, Trenckner says (note p. 428): “m. is otherwise unknown, it must mean a period shorter than 5 months. Cp. Sk. māsala.” -- Rh. D. (trsl. II.148) translates “got in a month,” following the Sinhalese gloss. ‹-› The period seems to be only a little shorter than 5 months; there may be a connection with catu in the word. (Page 531)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māsati: {'def': 'Māsana, Māsin [fr. mṛṣ, for massati etc.; see masati| touch, touching, etc. in sense of eating or taking in. So is probably to be read for āsati etc. in the foll. passages, where m precedes this ā in all cases. Otherwise we have to refer them to a root ās=as (to eat) and consider the m as partly euphonic. --dumapakkāni-māsita J.II,446 (C. reads māsita & expl^ns by asita, dhāta); visa-māsita Milo 302 (T. reads visamāsita) having taken in poison; visa-māsan-ûpatāpa (id.) Vism.166; tiṇa-māsin eating grass J.VI,354 (=tiṇakhādaka C.). -- A similar case where Sandhi-m- has led to a wrong partition of syllables and has thus been lost through syncope may be P. eḷaka¹, as comp^d with Sk. methi (cp. Prk. meḍhi), pillar, post. (Page 531)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māsi: {'def': '【阴】一个月。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Māsika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. māsa¹] 1. of a month, i. e. a month old Miln.302. -- 2. of a month, i. e. consisting of months, so many months (old) (-°), as aḍḍha° at intervals of half a month D.I,166; M.I,238, 343; Pug.55; dve° two months old Pv.I,6⁷. -- 3. monthly, i. e. once a month Th.1, 283 (bhatta). -- Cp. māsiya. (Page 531)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māsiya: {'def': '(adj.) [=māsika] consisting of months D.II,327 (dvādasa° saṁvacchara the year of 12 months). (Page 531)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māsācita: {'def': '[māsa¹+ācita] filled by the (say 6 or more) month(s), i. e. heavy (alluding to the womb in advanced pregnancy), heaped full M.I,332 (kucchi garu-garu viya māsācitaṁ maññe ti; Neumann trsl^s “wie ein Sack voll Bohnen,” thus taking m.=māsa², and ācita as “heap” which however is not justified). This passage has given rise to a gloss at Vbh.386, where māsācitaṁ maññe was added to kāyo garuko akammañño, in meaning “heavy, languid.” The other enum^ns of the 8 kusīta-vatthūni (A.IV,332; D.III,255) do not give m. m. It may be that the resemblance between akam‹-› mañño and maññe has played a part in reminding the Commentator of this phrase. The fact that Bdhgh comments on this passage in the VbhA.(p. 510) shows, that the reading of Vbh.386 is a very old one. Bdhgh takes māsa in the sense of māsa² & expl^s māsācita as “wet bean” (tinta māso), thus omitting explⁿ of ācita. The passage at VbhA.510 runs: “ettha pana māsācitaṁ nāma tintamāso, yathā tintamāso garuko hoti, evaṁ garuko ti adhippāyo.” (Page 531)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mātalī: {'def': '【阳】摩多梨(因陀神的战车御者的名字)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】摩多梨（因陀神的战车御者的名字）。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mātar: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic mātā, stem mātar°, Av. mātar-, Gr. mήthr (Doric mάthr) Lat. māter, Oir. māthir, Ohg. muoter, Ags. modor=mother; Cp. further Gr. mήtra uterus, Lat. mātrix id., Sk. mātṛkā mother, grandmother, Ger. mieder corset. From Idg. *ma, onomat. part., cp. “mamma”] mother. -- Cases: Nom. sg. mātā Sn.296; Dh.43; J.IV,463; V,83; VI,117; Nd² 504 (def. as janikā); Gen. mātu Th.1, 473; Vin.I,17; J.I,52; mātuyā J.I,53; Mhvs 10, 80; PvA.31; and mātāya J.I,62; Dat. mātu Mhvs 9, 19; Acc. mātaraṁ Sn.60, 124; Dh.294; Instr. mātarā Th.2, 212; Loc. mātari Dh.284 -- pl. does not occur. In combⁿ with pitā father, mātā always precedes the former, thus mātā-pitaro (pl.) “mother & father” (see below). --mātito (Abl.-adv.) from the mother’s side (cp. pitito) D.I,113; A.III,151; PvA.29. -- On mātā in simile see J.P.T.S. 1907, 122; cp. Vism.321 (simile of a mother’s solicitude for her children). Similarly the pop. etym. of mātā is given, with “mamāyatī ti mātā” at VbhA.107. -- The 4 bases of m. in compⁿ are: mātā°, māti°, mātu°, & matti°. -- 1. mātā°: --pitaro mother & father D.III,66, 188 sq.; Sn.404; Miln.12. See also pitā. --pitika having mother & father DhA.II,2. --pitiṭṭhāna place of m. & f. DhA.II,95. --pettika having m. & f., of m. & f. Nd² 385 (nāma-gotta). --petti-bhāra supporting one’s m. & f. S.I,228; J.I,202; VI,498. --maha maternal grandfather J.IV,146; DhA.I,346. -- 2. māti°: --devatā protector or guardian of one’s mother J.III,422 (gloss: mātu-devatā viya). --pakkha the mother’s side DhA.I,4 (+pitipakkha). --posaka supporting one’s m. J.III,422 (v. l. mātu°). -- 3. mātu°: --upaṭṭhāna (spelt mātupaṭṭh°) reverence towards one’s m. DhA.IV,14. --kucchi m’s womb D.II,12; Vism.560 (°gata); VbhA.96; DhA.I,127. --gāma “genex feminarum,” womanfolk, women (collectively cp. Ger, frauen-zimmer) A.II,126; Vin.IV,175; M.I,448, 462; III,126; S.IV,239 sq.; J.I,201; III,90, 530. (pl. °gāmā p. 531); Pug.68; SnA 355; PvA.271; VvA.77. --ghāta & (usually) °ka a matricide (+pitu-ghātaka; see abhiṭhāna) Vin.I,168, 320; Miln.310; Tikp 167 sq.; VbhA.425. --ghātikamma matricide Tikp. 281. --bhūta having been his mother PvA.78. --mattin (see matta¹ 4) whatever is a mother S.IV,110 (°īsu mātucittaṁ upaṭṭhapeti foster the thought of mother towards whatever is a mother, where in sequence with bhaginī-mattin & dhītumattin). --hadaya a mother’s heart PvA.63. -- 4. matti°: see matti-sambhava. (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mātaṅga: {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. mātaṅga, dial.] an elephant Dh.329, 330 (here as Ep. of nāga); J.III,389; VI,47; Vv 43⁹; Miln.368. -- 2. a man of a low class [cp. BSk. mātaṅgī Divy 397] SnA 185 sq. (as Np.). (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】象，贱民。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】象，贱民。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mātika: {'def': '【形】和母亲连接的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】和母亲连接的。 ~kā, 【阴】水道，河道，目次，波提木叉 (Pātimokkha) 的编码。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mātikā: {'def': '(f.) [*Sk. mātṛkā] 1. a water course Vism.554 (°âtikkamaka); Mhvs 35, 96; 37, 50; SnA 500 (=sobbha); DhA.II,141 (its purpose: “ito c’ito ca udakaṁ haritvā attano sassa-kammaṁ sampādenti”); VvA.301. -- 2. tabulation, register, tabulated summary, condensed contents, esp. of philosophical parts of the Canonical books in the Abhidhamma; used in Vinaya in place of Abhidhamma Piṭaka; probably the original form of that (later) Piṭaka Vin.I,119, 337; II,8 [cp. semantically in similar sense Lat. mātrix=E. matric, i. e. register. In BSk. mātrikā Divy 18, 333] A.I,117 (Dhamma-dhara, Vinaya-dhara, Mātikā-dhara; here equivalent to Abhidhamma); Vism.312 (so pañcavasso hutvā dve mātikā paguṇaṁ katvā pavāretvā); SnA 15; KhA 37, 99, 117.

--nikkhepa putting down of a summary, tabulation Vism.536, 540. The summary itself is sometimes called nikkhepa, e. g. the 4^th part of the Atthasālinī (DhsA.pp. 343--409) is called nikkhepa-kaṇḍa or chapter of the summary; similarly m.--nikkhepa vāra at Tikp. 11. (Page 528)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵mātrkā),【阴】水道，河道，目次(本母)，音译：摩怛理迦。mātikādhara﹐忆持论母的人，持论母师。《顺正理论》卷一(T29.330中)中说明「摩怛理迦」(mātrkā)，举四念处、四正勤等三十七道品等为首的法数为例，并说：「…及《集异门》、《法蕴》、《施设》，如是等类，一切总谓‘摩怛理迦’。」。而且在《顺正理论》(T29.595中)中，说明十二分教的「论议」(upadewa)，认为「论议」便是摩怛理迦，并视同阿毗达磨。《阿育王传》卷四(T50.113.3)也以「摩得勒伽藏」表示论藏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mātipakkha: {'def': '【阳】母系。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】母系。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mātiya: {'def': '(adj. n.) [the diæretic form of macca, used in verse, cp. Sk. martya & Vedic (poetical) martia] (a) mortal J.VI,100 (C. macca; gloss māṇava). (Page 528)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mātu: {'def': '【阴】母亲。 ~kucchi, 【阳】母胎。 ~gāma, 【阳】女人。 ~ghāta, 【阳】弑母。 ~ghātaka, 【阳】弑母。 ~upaṭṭhāna, 【中】照料母亲。 ~posaka, 【形】赡养母亲的。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(mātar),- mātu,【阴】母亲。单.主.mātā；复.主mātaro；单.呼.māta﹑mātā﹑māte(罕)；复.呼mātaro；单.宾.mātaraṁ；复.宾.mātare﹑mātāro；单.具.﹑离.mātarā﹑mātuyā；复.具.﹑离.mātarehi﹑mātarebhi﹑mātūbhi﹑mātūhi；单.与.﹑属.mātuyā﹑mātu；复.与.﹑属.mātarānaṁ﹑mātānaṁ﹑mātūnaṁ；单.处.mātari﹑mātuyā﹑mātuyaṁ；复.处.mātaresu﹑mātūsu。mātukucchi,【阳】母胎。mātugāma,【阳】女人，女人家。mātughāta,【阳】弑母。mātughātaka,【阳】弑母。mātupaṭṭhāna,【中】孝顺母亲(照料母亲)。mātuposaka,【形】赡养母亲的。mātito,【离.单】由母系(by the mother’s side)。ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca sajsuddha-gahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahā-yugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jāti-vādena.(父母两方血统纯净，(上溯至)第七代祖先时代确实无混杂，论血统无可指责。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mātucchā: {'def': '【阴】姨母（母亲的姊妹）。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(梵 mātr-svasā),【阴】姨母(母亲的姊妹mother’s sister, maternal aunt)。mātucchā-putta, 姨母的儿子(aunt’s son, male first cousin (from mother’s sister’s side))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. mātṛ-ṣvasā] mother’s sister, maternal aunt Vin.II,254, 256; J.IV,390; Miln.240. -- putta aunt’s son, male first cousin (from mother’s sister’s side) S.II,281; Ud.24; DhA.I,119. Cp. mātula-dhītā. (Page 528)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mātuka: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. māṭṛka, fr. mātṛ=mātar] “genetrix,” matrix, origin, cause Th.1, 612. (Page 528)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mātula: {'def': '(Sk. mātula),【阳】舅父(a mother’s brother, an uncle)。\xa0mātuladhītā, 舅父的女儿(uncle’s daughter, female first cousin (from mother’s brother’s side)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】舅父。 ~lānī, 【阴】舅母。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. mātula & semantically Lat. matruus, i. e. one who belongs to the mother] a mother’s brother, an uncle J.I,225; DhA.I,15; PvA.58, 60.

--dhītā (the complement of mātucchā-putta) uncle’s daughter, female first cousin (from mother’s brother’s side) J.II,119; DhA.III,290; PvA.55. (Page 528)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mātulaka: {'def': '=mātula DhA.I,182. (Page 528)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】舅父=mātula DhA.I,182.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mātuluṅga: {'def': '【阳】香橼树（一种多刺的常绿灌木或小树 (Citrus medica)，原产于印度，果实在外表和结梗上类似于柠檬，但比柠檬更大和没有顶乳头）。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. mātulunga; dialectical?] a citron J.III,319 (=mella; v. l. bella). (Page 528)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. mātulunga),【中】香橼树(critron﹐一种多刺的常绿灌木或小树 (Citrus medica)，原产於印度，果实在外表和结梗上类似於柠檬，但比柠檬更大和没有顶乳头) (=mella; v. l. bella)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mātulānī: {'def': '(Sk. mātulānī),【阴】舅母。(a mother’s brother’s wife, an aunt)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. mātulānī, semantically cp. Lat. mater tera] a mother’s brother’s wife, an aunt J.I,387; IV,184; PvA.55, 58. (Page 528)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mātu°: {'def': 'see mātā. (Page 528)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mātāmaha: {'def': '【阳】外公。mātāmahī,【阴】外婆。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】外公。 ~mahī, 【阴】外婆。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mātāpettika: {'def': '【形】来自父亲和母亲的。mātāpettibhara,【形】赡养父母的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】来自父亲和母亲的。 ~pettibhara, 【形】赡养父母的。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mātāpitu: {'def': '【阳】父母，母亲和父亲。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】父母，母亲和父亲。A.2.4./I,62.：Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, mātāpitaro assaddhe saddhāsampadāya samādapeti niveseti patiṭṭhāpeti, dussīle sīlasampadāya samādapeti niveseti patiṭṭhāpeti, maccharī cāgasampadāya samādapeti niveseti patiṭṭhāpeti, duppaññe paññāsampadāya samādapeti niveseti patiṭṭhāpeti, ettāvatā kho, bhikkhave, mātāpitūnaṁ katañca hoti paṭikatañcā”ti.(比丘们！凡是父母不信，为了〔使父母〕具足信，劝导之，令入〔信〕，令住〔信〕；〔父母〕悭悋，为了〔使父母〕具足施舍，劝导之，令入〔施舍〕，令住〔施舍〕；〔父母〕恶慧，劝导之，令入〔正慧〕，令住〔正慧〕。比丘们！〔作到〕此程度，已对父母尽了赡养。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Māyu: {'def': '[*Sk. māyu] bile, gall Abhp 281. (Page 530)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māyā: {'def': '【阴】欺骗(deceptive appearance, fraud)，僞善( hypocrisy)。《清净道论》(Vism.107)把诳归属於贪，但以覆藏相来看，它可归属於瞋；AA.2.16./II,163.：「一切悭相，作覆藏相，称为‘诳’。」Taṁ sabbampi maccharāyanalakkhaṇaṁ. Katapaṭicchādanalakkhaṇā māyā. )。māyā vuccati vañcanikā cariyā.(欺骗的行为称为‘欺骗’)(Nd1 422)。māyākāra,【阳】变戏法者。māyāvī,【形】骗人的，僞善的，魔术家。saṭhā māyāvino﹐狡诈欺蒙。S.42.13./IV,342.︰Māyaṁ cāhaṁ, gāmaṇi, pajānāmi, māyāya ca vipākaṁ, yathāpaṭipanno ca māyāvī kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati tañca pajānāmi”.((婆多利耶)村长(Pāṭaliyo gāmaṇi)！倘若我知道於幻，幻的果，也知道施幻术，身坏命终之后，堕於无幸处、恶趣、险难处、地狱。)。sambarimāyā﹐参婆罗幻术(可令持诵者堕地狱)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'f. [〃] = Mahāmāyā 摩耶夫人 [釈尊の生母].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic māyā. Suggestions as to etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. manticulor] 1. deceptive appearance, fraud, deceit, hypocrisy Sn.245, 328 (°kata deceit), 469, 537, 786, 941 (: māyā vuccati vañcanikā cariyā Nd¹ 422); Vbh.357, 361, 389; Miln.289; Vism.106 (+sātheyya, māna, pāpicchatā etc.), 479 (māyā viya viññāṇaṁ); VbhA.34 (in detail), 85, 493 (def.). Is not used in Pali Abhidhamma in a philosophical sense. ‹-› 2. mystic formula, magic, trick M.I,381 (āvaṭṭanī m.). khattiya° the mystic formula of a kh. J.VI,375; Miln.190; DhA.I,166. In the sense of “illusion” often comb^d with marīci, e. g. at J.II,330; V,367; Nd² 680^A.II,-- 3. jugglery, conjuring Miln.3. -- On māyā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 122; on term in general Dhs.trsl.² 255 (“ilḷusion”); Expos. 333, 468ⁿ. -- As adj. in amāya (q. v.) & in bahu-māye rich in deceit SnA 351. -- Note. In the word maṁ at KhA 123 (in pop. etym. of man-gala) the ed. of the text sees an Acc. of mā which he takes to be a contracted form of māyā (=iddhi).

--kāra a conjurer, magician S.III,142; Vism.366 (in comparison); VbhA.196. (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】欺骗，魔术，戏法。 ~kāra, 【阳】变戏法者。 ~vī, 【形】骗人的，伪善的，魔术家。(p254)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Māyāvin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. māyā, cp. Vedic māyāvin] deceitful, hypocritical D.III,45, 246; Sn.89, 116, 357; Pug.19, 23; PvA.13. See also amāyāvin. (Page 529)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māḷa: {'def': '(& Māla) [Non-Aryan, cp. Tamil māḍam house, hall] a sort of pavilion, a hall D.I,2 (maṇḍala°, same at Sn.p. 104, which passage SnA 447 expl^ns as “savitānaṁ maṇḍapaṁ”); Vin.I,140 (aṭṭa, māla, pāsāda; expl^d at Vin.III,201. In the same sequence of Vbh.251 expl^d at VbhA.366 as “bhojana-sālā-sadiso maṇḍala-māḷo; Vinay’aṭṭha-kathāyaṁ pana eka-kūṭasaṅgahito caturassa-pāsādo ti vuttaṁ”); Miln.46, 47. -- Cp. mālaka.-- [The BSk. form is either māla, e. g. MVastu II.274, or māḍa, e. g. Mvyut 226, 43.] (Page 531)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māḷaka: {'def': '[a Non-Aryan word, although the Dhtm 395 gives roots mal & mall in meaning “dhāraṇa” (see under mala). Cp. malorika] a stand, viz. for alms-bowl (patta°) Vin.II,114, or for drinking vessel (pānīya°) J.VI,85. (Page 531)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māṅgalya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. maṅgala] auspicious, fortunate, bringing about fulfilment of wishes J.VI,179. (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Māṇava: {'def': '(cp. Sk. māṇava),【阳】年轻人(a youth, young man, esp. a young Brahmin)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. māṇava] a youth, young man, esp. a young Brahmin Sn.1022, 1027, 1028; J.IV,391 (brāhmaṇa°); DA.I,36=satto pi coro pi taruṇo pi; DhA.I,89. pl. māṇavā men Th.2, 112. -- The spelling mānava occurs at Sn.456, 589, & Pv.I,8⁷ (=men Th.II,112; kumāra PvA.41). (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'māṇavaka, 【阳】年轻人。 ~vikā, ~vī, 【阴】年轻未婚女子。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Māṇavaka: {'def': '(‹fr. māṇava), 年轻人。nāgamāṇavaka﹐﹐年轻的蛇。māṇavikā, māṇavī,【阴】年轻未婚女子。nāgamāṇavaka﹐年轻的雌蛇(a young female serpent)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. māṇava] a young man, youth a Brahmin Miln.101; in general: young, e. g. nāga° a young serpent J.III,276; f. °ikā a Brahmin girl J.I,290; Miln.101; nāga° a young female serpent J.III,275; DhA.III,232. (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mīna: {'def': '【阳】鱼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】鱼。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mīyati: {'def': '死。参考 Miyyati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 Miyyati。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see miyyati (Pass. of marati). Mīlati [mīl, given at Dhtp 267 & 614 with “nimīlane”] to wink, only in cpd. nimīlati to close the eyes (opp. um°). (Page 534)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mīḷha: {'def': '[pp. of mih, Vedic mehati to excrete water, i. e. urine, only with ref. to the liquid; Sk. mīḍha=Lat. mictus, pp. of mingo, to urinate. Cp. Av. maēƶaiti to urinate, meƶ urine; Gr. o)mixeίn & o)/mixma id.; Ags. mīgan to ur.; in Ohg. mist & Ags. miox the notion refers more to the solid excrement, as in Pāli. -- A related root *meigh to shed water is found in megha, cloud (watershedder), q. v. for further cognates] excrement M.I,454 =III,236 (°sukhaṁ vile pleasure); A.III,241, 242; Th.1, 1152; J.II,11; VI,112; Vv 52¹¹ (with ref. to the gūthaniraya); Pv III,4⁵ (=gūtha PvA.194); DhA.II,53 (°ṁ khādituṁ).

--kūpa pit of excr., cesspool Pgdp 22. (Page 534)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】排泄物，(家畜的)粪。mīḷhaka, 粪虫(dung beetle)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】排泄物，（家畜的）粪。(p256)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mīḷhakā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. mīḷha; cp. BSk. mīḍha-ghaṭa] cesspool S.II,228 (so read for T. piḷhakā; v. l. BB miḷhakā). See also piḷhakā. The trsl. (K.S. II.155) gives “dungbeetle.” (Page 534)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mū: {'def': 'is given as root as Dhtp 216 in meaning “bandhana.” (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mūga: {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic mūka; see etym. under mukha] dumb Vin.I,91 (andha, m., badhira); Sn.713; DhA.II,102 (andha, m., badhira); SnA 51 (in simile); Sdhp.12. Freq. comb^d with eḷa, deaf (q. v.). (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】哑的，哑巴。jaccamūga, 天生哑巴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】哑的，哑巴。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mūla: {'def': '【中】根，钱，现金，脚，底部，起源，因素，基础，开始。 ~kanda,【阳】球茎根。 ~dhana, 【中】被存放的钱。 ~bīja, 【中】发芽的根。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】根，钱，现金，脚，底部，起源，因素，基础，开始。mūlakanda,【阳】球茎根。mūladhana,【中】被存放的钱。mūlabīja,【中】根种(子)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic mūra & mūla. The root is given as mūl in 2 meanings, viz. lit. “rohane” Dhtm 859, and fig. “patiṭṭhāyaṁ” Dhtm 391] 1. (lit.) root A.II,200= M.I,233; DhA.I,270; IV,200 (opp. patti); Vism.270 (rukkha°=rukkha-samīpaṁ); Pv.II,9⁶ (sa° with the root); PvA.43 (rukkhassa mūle at the foot of). -- 2. foot, bottom Vin.II,269 (patta°); PvA.73 (pāda°), 76 (id.). rukkha° foot of a tree: see under rukkha for special meaning. -- 3. (appl^d) ground for, reason, cause, condition, def^d as “hetu, nidāna, sambhava” etc. at Nd² s. v.; Sn.14=369 (akusalā mũlā n. pl.=ākāra or patiṭṭhā SnA 23); Pv.II,3³³ (sa° with its cause); Dukp 272, 297, 312, 320; Miln.12 (& khandha-yamaka, with ref. to the Yamaka). Very freq. in this sense as referring to the three lobha, dosa, moha as conditioning akusala (& absence of them=kusala), e. g. at D.III,214, 275; A.I,201; 203; Vbh.106 sq., 169, 361; Yam I.1; Vism.454; cp. Nd² 517; VbhA.382. -- 4. origin, source, foundation, root (fig.) Vin.I,231=D.II,91 (dukkhassa); Vin.II,304; Sn.916, 968 (cp. Nd¹ 344, 490); Th.1, 1027 (brahmacariyassa); Dh.247, 337. Freq. in formula (may be taken to no. 1) [pahīna] ucchinna-mūla tālâvatthukata etc. with ref. to the origin of saṁsāra, e. g. at S.II,62, 88; III,10, 27, 161, 193; IV,253, 292, 376. See Nd² p. 205 s. v. pahīna, in extenso. -- 5. beginning, base, in mūladivasa the initial day DA.I,311; also in phrase mūlakāraṇato right from the beginning VvA.132 (cp. BSk. mūlaṁ kramataś ca id. Divy 491). -- 6. “substance,” foundation, i. e. worth, money, capital, price, remuneration Miln.334 (kamma°); DhA.I,270 (?); PvA.273; Mhvs 27, 23. amūla unpaid Mhvs 30, 17 (kamma labour). --iṇa° borrowed capital D.I,71.

--kanda eatable tuber DhA.III,130; IV,78 (mūlaka°). See also kanda. --kammaṭṭhāna fundamental k. or k. of causes SnA 54. --ghacca radically extirpated Dh.250, 263. --ṭṭha one who is the cause of something, an instigator Vin.III,75. --dassāvin knowing the cause or reason Sn.1043, cp. Nd² 517. --phala (eatable) fruit, consisting of roots; roots as fruit Sn.239. --bandhana fundamental bond (?) or set of causes (?) Sn.524 sq., 530 sq., cp. SnA 429--431. --bīja having seeds in roots, i. e. propagated by roots, one of the classes of plants enum^d under bījagāma (q. v.). --rasa taste of roots, or juice made fr. roots VbhA.69; see under rasa. (Page 539)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mūlaka: {'def': '(‹mūla),【形】(在【合】中)受…制约，源於(being caused by, having its reason through or from, conditioned by, originating)。2.【中】根本(=mūla, i. e. root, bulb)。3.微红(radish; only in cpd. mūlaka-kanda radish (-root))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】微红。【形】 (在【合】中) 受…制约，源于。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj. nt.) [fr. mūla] 1. (adj.) (a) (-°) being caused by, having its reason through or from, conditioned by, originating in Vbh.390 (taṇhā° dhammā); Tikp. 233 sq., 252 sq., 288 sq. & passim; VbhA.200 sq., 207 sq. (saṅkhāra°, avijjā° etc. with ref. to the constituents of the Paṭicca-samuppāda); PvA.19. -- (b) having a certain worth, price, being paid so much, dear Mhvs 27, 23 (a °ṁ kammaṁ unpaid labour); DhA.I,398 (nahāna-cuṇṇa °ṁ catu-paṇṇāsa-koṭi dhanaṁ, as price); II,154 (pattha-pattha-mūlakā bhikkhā); III,296 (kiṁ mūlakaṁ how dear?). -- 2. (nt.)=mūla, i. e. root, bulb, radish, only in cpd. mūlaka-kanda radish (-root) J.IV,88, 491; DhA.IV,78. -- See also pulaka. (Page 540)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mūlakammaṭṭhāna: {'def': '【中】根本业处(一向修行、专注的业处)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mūlaŋ: {'def': 'mūlā, 【中】尾宿（二十七星宿之一）。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mūlaṁ: {'def': 'mūlā,【中】尾宿(二十七星宿之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mūlika: {'def': '【形】基本的，初步的。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】基本的，初步的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. mūla] 1. (m.) root-vendor Miln.331. -- 2. (adj. --°) belonging to the feet (pāda°), a footman, lackey J.I,122, 438; II,300 sq. (N. of the king of Janasandha, Gāmaṇi-caṇḍa); III,417; V,128; VI,30. -- 3. in rukkha° one who lives at the foot of a tree: see under rukkha, where also °mūlikatta. (Page 540)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mūlya: {'def': '【中】付款，薪水。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】付款，薪水。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mūsika: {'def': '(m.) & mūsikā (f.) [Vedic mūṣikā, fr. mūṣ] a mouse D.II,107=Pug.43 (f.); Vism.109 (m.), 252= KhA 46 (m.); Mhvs 5, 30 (m.); VbhA.235.

--cchinna (auguries from the marks on cloth (gnawed by mice) D.I,9 (mūsikā°; DA.I,92 mūsika°=undurakhāyitaṁ; cp. Dial. I.17). --darī a mouse-hole J.I,462 (mūsikā°, so read for musikā°). --patha “Mouseroad” N. of a road Nd¹ 155, 415 (here mūsikā°). --potikā the young of a mouse J.IV,188 (mūsika°). --vijjā mouse craft D.I,9 (cp. DA.I,93). (Page 540)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】mūsikā,【阴】鼠，老鼠。mūsikacchinna,【形】被老鼠咬破的。mūsikavacca,【中】老鼠粪。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 Mūsikā, 【阴】鼠，老鼠。 ~cchinna, 【形】被老鼠咬破的。 ~vacca, 【中】老鼠粪。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mūsā: {'def': '【阴】坩锅。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】坩锅(crucible)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mūsī: {'def': '(f.) [Venic mūṣ & mūḥ mouse or rat; cp. Lat. mūs Gr. mu_s, Ohg. mūs=E. mouse. Not to muṣ to steal, but to same root as Lat. moveo, to move] a mouse S.II,270 (mudu° a tender, little m.). (Page 540)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mūḷha: {'def': '[Vedic mūḍha, pp. of muh; cp. also muddha¹= Vedic mugdha] 1. gone astray, erring, having lost one’s way (magga°) D.I,85 ≈ (°ssa maggaṁ ācikkhati); Pv IV.1⁴⁸ (id. with pāvadati); PvA.112 (magga°). -- 2. confused, infatuated, blinded, erring, foolish D.I,59; Pv IV.3³⁴ (sa°, better to be written sam°).

--gabbhā (f.) a woman whose “fœtus in utero” has gone astray, i. e. cannot be delivered properly, a woman difficult to be delivered J.I,407=DhA.IV,192; Miln.169; VbhA.96. --rūpa foolish Dh.268; DhA.III,395. (Page 540)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(muyhati 的【过分】), 已走入歧途，已搞乱，已犯错，已干傻事。(p258)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(muyhati’忘记﹑痴暗’的【过分】), 已走入歧途，已搞乱，已犯错，已干傻事。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

N: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中的 n。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中的 n。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Na: {'def': '【无】(否定虚词), 没有，不(no, 也是否定虚词，有强调之意)。Kadā,【副】什么时候? na koci﹐无人(no one﹐not anyone)。na kassaci﹐无人的(of no one)。na kiñci﹐无事、无物(nothing﹐not anything)。na kathañci﹐无法(no way﹐not in anyway﹐under no circumstances)。na kadāci﹐无任何时候、从不(never)。na katthaci﹐无论任何地方(nowhere﹐not anywhere)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [Sk. na (in cana) & nā (in nānā, vi-nā) Idg. pron. base *no, cp. Gr. nή, nai/; Lat. nē, nae surely, also encl. in ego-ne & in question utruṁne, nam; fuller form *eno, as in Sk. anā (adv.) anena, anayā (Instr. pron. 3rd); Gr. e)/nh “that day”; Lat. enim] expletive-emphatic particle, often used in comparative-indefinite sense: just so, like this, as if, as (see cana & canaṁ) J.V,339 (Com. cttha na-kāro upamāne). Also as naṁ (cp. cana› canaṁ) Vin.II,81, 186 (kathaṁ naṁ=kathaṁ nu); J.II,416; V,302; VI,213 (Com. p. 216: ettha eko na-karo pucchanattho hoti); Th.1, 1204; Miln.177. Perhaps at Sn.148 (kattha-ci naṁ, v. l. BB na; but Com. KhA 247= etaṁ). To this na belongs na³; see also nu & nanu. (Page 344)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ [identical with na¹] base of demonstr. pron. 3rd pers. (=ta°), only in foll. cases: Acc. sg. naṁ (mostly enclitic), fuller form enaṁ him, her, that one etc. Sn.139, 201, 385, 418, 980, 1076; It.32; Dh.42, 230; J.I,152, 172, 222; III,281; KhA 220; DhA.I,181; III,173; PvA.3, 68, 73.

-- Acc. pl. ne them It.110 (v. l. te); Sn.223 (=te manusse KhA 169); J.II,417; III,204; V,458; DhA.I,8, 13, 61, 101, 390; VvA.299. -- Gen. Dat. pl. nesaṁ D.I,175, 191; It.63; J.I,153; DhA.IV,41; VvA.37, 136.; PvA.54, 201, 207. See also cna; cp. nava². (Page 344)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】 (否定虚词), 没有，不。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [Ved. na=Idg. *ně; Lat. ne in n’unquam etc., Goth. ni; Sk. na ca=Lat. neque=Goth. nih. Also Sk. nā= Idg. *nē, cp. Lat. Goth. nē] negātive & adversative particle “not” (Nd² 326: paṭikkhepa; KhA 170: paṭisedhe) 1. often apostr. N’: n’atthi, n’etaṁ etc.; or contracted: nāhaṁ, nāpi etc., or with cuphonic consonant y: nayidaṁ (It.29, J.IV,3), nayidha (It.36, 37), nayimaṁ (It.15) etc. As double negation implying emphatic affirmation: na kiñci na all, everything J.I,295. -- 2. In disjunctive clauses: na . . . na neither-nor, so-or not so. In question: karoti na karoti (“or not”) J.II,133. Cp. mā in same use. ‹-› Often with added pi (api) in second part: na-nāpi neither-nor (“not-but also not”) S.II,65; M.I,246; Pv.I,11⁹. -- 3. In syntactic context mostly emphasized by var. negative & adversative particles, viz. nāpi (see under 2); n’eva indeed not, not for all that J.III,55; or not KhA 219; n’eva-na neither-nor D.I,33, 35; M.I,486; A.V,193; J.I,207, 279; Vin.II,185; DhA.I,328; II,65; DA.I,186, 188; n’eva-na pana id. D.I,24; na kho not indeed J.II,134; na ca but not (=this rather than that) J.I,153; na tāva=na kho Vv 37¹³; na nu (in quest.= noQne) is it not? PvA.74, 136; na no surely not Sn.224; na hi [cp. Gr. ou/xi/ not at all; nai/xi certainly] certainly not Dh.5, 184; Sn.666; Kh VII.6; na hi jātu id. Sn.152. -- See also nu, nū, no. -- 4, na is also used in the function of the negative prefix a- (an-) in cases where the word-negation was isolated out of a sentence negation or where a negated verb was substantified, e. g. (a) nacira (=acira) short, napparūpa abundant, napuṁsaka neuter, neka (=aneka) several; (b) natthi, natthika etc. (q. v.). (Page 344)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nabbho: {'def': '=nābhiyo, Nom. pl. of nābhi (q. v.). (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nabbāpana: {'def': '【中】冷却，熄，消失。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nabha: {'def': '【阳】【中】天空(mist, vapour, clouds, sky)。(在【合】中取nabho 的词形。例：nabhogata = 存在天空中。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) & Nabhas (in oblique cases) [Sk. nabhas; Gr. nέfos & nefέlh, Lat. nebula, Oir. nēl, Ags. nifol (darkness), Ohg. nebul. See also abbha] mist, vapour, clouds, sky A.I,242; II,50 (nabhā), III,240, Sn.687 (nabhasi-gama, of the moon); Vv 32³, 35² (=ākāsa VvA.161), 53⁴ (id. 236), 63²⁷ (id. 268); PvA.65; Mhvs VII.9 (nabhasā Instr.). (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳、中】天空。（在【合】中取 nabho 的词形。例： nabhogata= 存在天空中。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nacca: {'def': '(‹naṭ跳舞),【中】舞蹈，表演。naccaṭṭhāna,【中】剧场，舞场。A.3.103./I,261.︰Ummattakamidaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyassa vinaye yadidaṁ naccaṁ.(诸比丘！於圣者之律，舞蹈是疯子。)受八戒时，「离舞蹈」之一项，《小诵注释》：naccaṁ nāma yaṁkiñci naccaṁ.(舞蹈：任何舞蹈。) (KhA.CS:p.26)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Ved. nṛtya=Anglo-Ind. nautch, etym. uncertain, cp. naccati & naṭati] (pantomimic) dancing; usually comb^d with singing (gīta, q. v.) & instrumental music (vādita). -- nacca: A.I,261; D.III,183; J.I,61, 207; DA.I,77; PvA.231. -- nacca-gīta: J.I,61; Pv IV.7²; DhA.III,129; VvA.131, 135. -- nacca-gīta-vādita (+visūkadassana): Vin.I,83; D.I,5, 6; KhA 36; cp. Vv 81¹⁰ (naccagīte suvādite). (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】舞蹈，表演。 ~ṭṭhāna, 【中】剧场，舞场。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Naccaka: {'def': '[Sk. *nṛtyaka, distinguished from but ultimately identical with naṭaka, q. v.] a dancer, (pantomimic) actor Miln.191, 331, 359 (naṭa°). -- f. naccakī Vin.II,12. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】舞者，演员。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】舞者，演员。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Naccana: {'def': '(nt.) [Ved. *nṛtyana, cp. naṭana] dance, dancing VvA.282, 315. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Ved. *nrtyana, cp. Naṭana), 跳舞(dance, dancing)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Naccati: {'def': '[Ved. nṛtyati nṛt, cp. nacca & naṭati] to dance, play Vin.II,10; J.I,292; Vv 50¹ (=naṭati VvA.210); 64²¹. ‹-› pp. naccento D.I,135; fut. naccissati Vin.II,12; aor. nacci J.III,127; inf. naccituṁ J.I,207. -- Caus. naccāpentī to make play Vism.305 (so read for nacch°). (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(naṭ(梵 nrt )舞蹈+ya,(=naṭati VvA.210)), 跳舞，表演(to dance, play)。【过】nacci。【现分】naccanta, naccanto(m.s.Nom., D.I,135)。【独】naccitvā。fut. naccissati ; inf. naccituṁ.。caus. naccāpentī(to make play Vism.305 (so read for nacch°))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(naṭ + ya), 跳舞，演出。【过】 nacci。【现分】 naccanta。【无】naccitvā。【动名】 naccana。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nacira: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. nacira=na+cira] not of long duration, short Sn.694; gen nacirass’eva after a short time, shortly Sn.p. 16; J.IV,2, 392; Miln.250. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nacirassaŋ: {'def': '【副】不久。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nacirassaṁ: {'def': '【副】不久。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nadana: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. nadanu] roaring J.I,19 (sīhanāda° the sound of a lion’s roar). (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】吼声。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】吼声。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nadati: {'def': '(nad + a), 吼，制造噪音。【过】 nadi。【现分】 nadanta。【过分】nadita。【无】 naditvā。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nad制造噪音+a), 吼，制造噪音。【过】nadi。【现分】nadanta。【过分】nadita。【独】naditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Ved. nadati, nad of unknown etym.] to roar, cry, make a noise (nadaṁ nadati freq.) Sn.552 (sīha), 684 (id.), 1015; J.I,50, 150; II,110; aor. nadi J.III,55 & anādisuṁ J.IV,349. Caus. nadāpeti to make roar J.II,244. See also nadī & nāda, & cp. onadati. (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Naddha: {'def': '[Sk. naddha pp. of nah, see nayhati] tied, bound, fastened, put on J.I,175 (rathavarattaṁ); Bu I.31 (camma°, of a drum); Mhvs VII.16 (°pañcāyudha); Miln.117 (yuga°); DhsA.131. Cp. onaddha, vi°, san°. (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(nandhati 的【过分】), 已打结，已包装，已以…拧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nandhati 的【过分】), 已打结，已包装，已以…拧。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Naddhi: {'def': '【阴】皮带。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】皮带。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nadika: {'def': '那低卡，一那低卡等於24分钟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nadita: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. nādita, pp. of caus. nadayati] roar, noise J.II,110. (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nadī: {'def': '【阴】河。nadīkūla,【中】河岸。nadīdugga,【中】因为有河而不能达到的地方。nadīmukha,【中】河口。nadīsota,【中】河流。Gaṅgā, Yamunā, Sarabhū, Aciravatī, Mahī, (印度五大河：)恒何(恒伽)、摇尤那、舍牢浮、阿致罗筏底河、摩企。) Aññaṁ uppajjate cittaṁ, aññaṁ cittaṁ nirujjhati; Avīcimanusambandho, nadīsotova vattatīti.(一心生起，另一心灭去；相续不断，滚滚如河流。)(DA.2./I,193.；MA.10./I,261.；SA.47.2./III,190.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Ved. nadī, from nadati=“the roaring,” cp. also nandati] a river; often characterised as mahā° in opp. to kun° rivulet; pl. nadiyo also collect. “the waters.” -- D.I,244 (Aciravatī nadī); S.II,32, 118, 135; V,390; A.I,33, 136, 243 (mahā°); II,55, 140 (mahā°); III,52; IV,101 (m°), 137; Sn.425, 433, 568, 720; Dh.251; J.I,296; II,102; III,51; III,91 (Kebukā); V,269 (Vetaraṇī°); VI,518 (Ketumatī); Pv IV.3⁵⁴; Vism.468 (sīghasotā); PvA.256 (m°); Sdhp.21, 194, 574. -- Gen. sg. nadiyā J.I,278; It.113; Instr. nadiyā J.I,278; PvA.46; pl. Nom. nadiyo Miln.114 (na tā n. dhuva-salilā), najjo PvA.29 (mahā°); & najjāyo J.VI,278; gen nadīnaṁ Vin.I,246=Sn.569 (n. sāgaro mukhaṁ). -- kunnadī a small river S.I,109; II,32, 118; V,47, 63; A.II,140; IV,100; V,114 sq. -- On n. in similes see J.P.T.S. 1906, 100.

--kuñja a river glen DA.I,209; --kūla the bank of a river Cp. III,7¹; --tīra=°kūla J.I,278; --dugga a difficult ford in a river S.II,198; --vidugga=°dugga A.I,35; III,128. (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】河。 ~kūla, 【中】河岸。 ~dugga, 【中】因为有河而不能达到的地方。 ~mukha, 【中】河口。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nadī-kassapa: {'def': 'm. 那提迦葉 [三迦葉兄弟の一, 事火外道から仏弟子へ].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'm. 那提迦葉 [三迦葉兄弟之一, 原本為事火(祭火拜火)外道,後來轉為佛弟子].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Naga: {'def': '[Sk. naga tree & mountain, referred by Fausböll & Uhlenbeck to na+gacchati, i. e. immovable (=sthāvara), more probably however with Lidén (see Walde under nāvis) to Ohg. nahho, Ags. naca “boat=tree”; semantically mountain=trees, i. e. forest] mountain S.I,195= Nd² 136^A (nagassa passe āsīna, of the Buddha); Sn.180 (=devapabbata royal mountain SnA 216; or should it mean “forest”?); Th.1, 41 (°vivara), 525; Pv.II,9⁶¹ (°muddhani on top of the Mount, i. e. Mt. Sineru PvA.138; the Buddha was thought to reside there); Miln.327 (id.); Vv 16⁶ (°antare in between the (5) mountains, see VvA.82). (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】山。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】山。gāmā gāmaṁ nagā nagaṁ, 从这村到那村，从这山到那山。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nagara: {'def': '(nt.) [Ved. nagara, Non-aryan? Connection with agāra is very problematic] a stronghold, citadel, fortress; a (fortified) town, city. As seat of the government & as important centre of trade contrasted with gāma & nigama (village & market-place or township) Vin.III,47 (°bandhana), 184; cp. gāma 3 b. deva° deva-city JI. 3, 168, 202; DhA.I,280 etc.; cp. yakkha° J.II,127. -- Vin.I,277, 342, 344; II,155, 184; D.II,7; S.II,105 sq.; IV,194 (kāyassa adhivacanaṁ); V,160; A.I,168, 178; IV,106 sq. (paccantima); V,194 (id.) Dh.150 (aṭṭhīnaṁ); Sn.414, 1013 (Bhoga°); J.I,3, 50 (Kapilavatthu°); II,5; III,188; VI,368 etc.; Pug.56; DhA.IV,2; PvA.3, 39, 73; Dpvs XIV.51 (+pura). Cp. nāgara.

--ûpakārikā a town fortified with a wall covered with cement at its base D.I,105, cp. DA.I,274; --ûpama like a citadel (of citta) Dh.40, cp. DhA.I,317 & Nagaropama sūtra Divy 340; --kathā town-gossip D.I,7; --guttika superintendent of the city police J.III,30, 436; IV,279; Miln.345 (dhammanagare n-g.), DhA.IV,55. Cp. Kern, Toev. p. 167; --vara the noble town (of Rājagaha) Vv 16⁶, cp. VvA.82; --vīthi a city street J.II,416; --sobhinī the city belle, a town courtesan J.II,367 (°anā); III,435 (Sulasā), 475 (°anī); DhA.I,174; II,201; PvA.4 (Sulasā); Miln.350. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】城镇，城堡，要塞。nagaraguttika,【阳】市长。nagaravara,【中】皇家城市。nagaravāsin,【阳】市民。nagarasodhaka,【阳】清道夫。nagarasobhinī,【阴】城市的美女，城镇的妓女。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】城镇，城堡，要塞。 ~guttika, 【阳】市长。 ~vara, 【中】皇家城市。 ~vāsī, 【阳】市民。 ~sodhaka, 【阳】清道夫。 ~sobhinī, 【阴】城市的美女，城镇的妓女。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nagaraka: {'def': '(nt.) a small city D.I,146=169, quoted J.I,391. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nagga: {'def': '(Ved. nagna)(=niccola PvA. 32),【形】赤裸的，裸的(naked, nude)。naggacariyā,【阴】裸露。naggasamaṇa,【阳】裸行者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】赤裸的，裸的。 ~cariyā, 。【阴】裸露。 ~samaṇa, 【阳】裸行者。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Ved. nagna=Lat. nudus (fr. *nogǔedhos) Goth. naqaps=Ohg. naccot, Ags. nacod=naked; Oir. nocht; perhaps Gr. gumnόs] naked, nude Vin.II,121; J.I,307; Pv.I,6¹ (=niccola PvA.32); II,1⁵; 8¹; PvA.68, 106.

--cariyā going naked Dh.141; DhA.III,78; cp. Sk nagnacaryā Divy 339; --bhogga one whose goods are nakedness, an ascetic J.IV,160; V,75; VI,225. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Naggatta: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. nagnatva]=naggiya nakedness PvA.106. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Naggiya: {'def': '【中】裸露。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. *nagnyaṁ] naked state, nudity Vin.I,292, 305; S.IV,300; Sn.249. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】裸露。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Naggiyā: {'def': '(adj. f.) [Sk. nagnikā]=naggā, naked Pv.II,3¹². (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nahuta: {'def': '【中】一万，万数，直译︰那由他。Mv.I,41.︰“bahukehi kappanahutehīti.(无数万劫中)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】一万，万数。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. nayuta (m. pl.) of unknown etym. Is it the same as navuti? The corresponding v›y›h is frequent, as to meaning cp. nava 3] a vast number, a myriad Sn.677; J.I,25, 83; Pv IV.1⁷; DhA.I,88; PvA.22, 265. (Page 349)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nahāmin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [=nahāpaka; Kern, Toev. asks: should it be nahāpin?] a barber, a low-class individual Pv III,1¹⁴ (=kappaka-jātika PvA.176). (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nahāna: {'def': 'nhāna, 【中】沭浴，洗澡。 ~niya, 【中】沭浴粉（洗澡用的肥皂粉），任何对沭浴有用的东西。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'nhāna,【中】沐浴，洗澡。《南海寄归内法传》卷三︰“又洗浴者,并须饥时，浴已方食，有其三益︰一则身体清虚,无诸垢秽。二则痰癊消散，能餐饮食。”nahāniya,【中】沐浴粉(洗澡用的肥皂粉)，任何对沐浴有用的东西。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. snāna] bathing, a bath Vin.I,47, 51= II.224; I,196 (dhuva° constant bathing), 197; S.I,183; V,390 (fig.); J.I,265; PvA.50; Vism.27.

--kāla bathing time PvA.46; --koṭṭhaka bath-room DhA.III,88; --garuka fond of bathing Vin.I,196; --cuṇṇa bath powder (cp. nahāniya°) DhA.I,398; --tittha a shallow place for bathing DhA.I,3; III,79. (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nahāniya: {'def': '(adj.) belonging to a bath, bath-; in °cuṇṇa bath-powder PvA.46. (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nahāpaka: {'def': '【阳】沐浴待人(服务沐浴的员工)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】沭浴待人（服务沐浴的员工）。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. snāpaka, fr. Caus, nahāpeti; cp. nahāpita] a barber, bath attendant D.I,74; A.III,25; DA.I,157 (=ye nahāpenti); PvA.127 (=kappaka). (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nahāpana: {'def': '【中】(服务他人)沐浴，(给人)洗澡。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) bathing, washing (trs.) D.I,7, 12; A.I,62, 132; II,70; IV,54; It.111 (ucchādana+); VvA.305 (udakadāna+). (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】（服务他人）沭浴，（给人）洗澡。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nahāpeti: {'def': '(nah+āpe), (给人)沐浴，洗，洗礼(to bathe (trs. & intr.), to wash, to perform an ablution)。【过】nahāpesi。【过分】nahāpita。【现分】nahāpenta。【独】nahāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. snāpayati, Caus. of nahāyati] to wash, to give a bath, bathe J.I,166; PvA.49; VvA.68, 305. (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(nah + āpe), （给人）沭浴。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 nahāpita。【现分】 nahāpenta。【无】 nahāpetvā。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nahāpita: {'def': '【阳】理发师。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】理发师。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. only snāpaka (see nahāpaka); new formation fr. Caus. nahāpeti as n. ag. with a- theme instead of ar-, cp. sallakatta for sallakattar] a barber, who has also the business of preparing & giving baths (cp. Ger. “bader”) a bath-attendant (see kappaka). Barbers ranked as a low class socially, and rebirth in a barber’s family was considered unfortunate. Vin.I,249 (°pubba who had formerly been a barber); D.I,225; J.I,137; II,5; III,451; IV,138 (eight kahāpaṇas as a barber’s fee); DA.I,157 (=kappaka); VvA.207 (°sālā a barber’s shop). (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nahāru: {'def': '& Nhāru [Sk. snāyu, Idg. *snē to sew, cp. Gr. nέw, nήqw, nhμa (thread); Ohg. nājan; also Gr. neu_ron (=Lat. nervus); Ags. sinu (=sinew); Ohg. senawa; Goth. nepla=Ags. n&amacremacr;dl (=needle); Oir. snātha (thread); Ohg. snuor (cord)=Ags. snōd] sinew, tendon, muscle. In the anatomy of the body n. occupies the place between maṁsa (flesh, soft flesh) & aṭṭhi (bone), as is seen from ster. sequence chavi, camma, maṁsa, nahāru, aṭṭhi, aṭṭhi-miñja (e. g. at Vin.I,25; J.III,84). See also defⁿ in detail at SnA 246 sq. & KhA 47. ‹-› Vin.I,25 (nh°); M.I,429 (used for bow strings); A.I,50; III,324; IV,47 sq. (°daddula), 129; Kh 111.; Sn.194 (aṭṭhi°) Nd² 97 (nh°); DhA.III,118; ThA.257 (nh°); PvA.68 (aṭṭhi-camma°), 80 (camma-maṁsa°); Sdhp.46, 103. (Page 349)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'nhāru(sk.snāyu),【阳】筋，腱，筋缠。nahārusambandha(nahāru + sambandha‹ saṁ+bandh绑),【阳】以筋连结的。Vism.253︰Nhārūti nava nhārusatāni. (腱︰有九百的腱)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'nhāru, 【阳】肌肉，筋肉，腱。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nahāta: {'def': 'nhāta (nahāyati 的【过分】), 已经沐浴(的人)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'nhāta (nahāyati 的【过分】), 已经沭浴（的人）。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. snāta, see nahāyati] one who has bathed Vin.II,221; J.I,266; DhA.IV,232 (°kilesatā washed off moral stain). (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nahātaka: {'def': '[Ved. snātaka, cp. nahāta & nahāyati] “one who has bathed,” a brahmin who has finished the studies M.I,280; A.IV,144; Dh.422 (expl. at DhA.IV,232 with ref. to perfection in the Buddha’s teaching: catusaccabuddhatāya buddha); cp. Sn.521 (one who has washed away all sin), 646. (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nahāyati: {'def': '(nhā + ya), 洗澡。【过】 nahāyi。【现分】nahāyanta。【无】 nahāyitvā。【不】nahāyituŋ。【动名】 nahāyana, 【中】。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nhā+ya), 洗澡。【过】nahāyi。【现分】nahāyanto, nahāyamāno。【独】nahāyitvā, nahātvā。【不】nahāyituṁ。3s.opt. nahāyeyya, nhāyeyya。grd. nahāyitabbaṁ(Vin.II,220, 280)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(rarely nhāyati) [Ved. snāti & snāyati, snā=Gr. nήxw (to swim), narόs, *nhreuζ (Nereid), nh_sos (island); Lat. nare (to swim); cp. also Sk. snauti, Gr. nάw, nέw; Goth. sniwan] to bathe (trs. & intr.), to wash, to perform an ablution (esp. at the end of religious studentship or after the lapse of a lustrative period) Vin.II,280; J.I,265; VI,336; PvA.93. ppr. nahāyanto (PvA.83) & nahāyamāna (Vin.II,105); inf. nahāyituṁ (Vin.I,47; PvA.144); ger. nahāyitvā (J.I,50; VI,367; PvA.42) & nahātvā (J.I,265; III,277; DhA.III,88; PvA.23, 62) (after mourning), 82; grd. nahāyitabba (Vin.II,220, 280). (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Najjuha: {'def': '[Sk. dātyūha] a kind of cock or hen J.VI,528, 538. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nakha: {'def': '[Ved. nakha, cp. Sk. aṅghri foot; Gr. o]/nuc (claw, nail), Lat. unguis=Oir. inga; Ohg. nagal=E. nail] a nail of finger or toe, a claw Vin.II,133; Sn.610 (na aṅgulīhi nakhehi vā); J.V,489 (pañcanakhā sattā five-nailed or --toed beings); Kh II.=Miln.26, cp. taca (pañcatacakaṁ); KhA 43; VvA.7 (dasa-nakhasamodhāna putting the 10 fingers together); PvA.152, 192; Sdhp.104. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳、中】指甲，爪。 ~pañjara, 【阳】爪。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】【中】指甲，爪。nakhapañjara,【阳】爪。nakhasikha, 【阴】指端。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nakhaka: {'def': '(adj.) belonging to, consisting of or resembling a claw, in hatthi° like elephants’claws, Ep. of a castle (pāsāda) Vin.II,169 (Bdhgh on p. 323: hatthikumbhe patiṭṭhitaṁ, evaṁ evaṁkatassa kir’etaṁ nāmaṁ) (?). (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nakhin: {'def': '(adj.) having nails J.VI,290 (tamba° with coppercoloured nails). (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nakhī: {'def': '【形】有爪的。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有爪的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nakka: {'def': '【阳】海龟。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】龟(turtle)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nakkhatta: {'def': '【中】星座，星宿(ㄒㄧㄡˋ，台语chinn siu3)，星，庆祝。nakkhattakīḷā,【阴】nakkhattakīlana,【中】在某些星座的出现而庆祝的节日。nakkhattapāṭhaka,【阳】占星家。nakkhattayoga。【阳】行星的连接，占星术。nakkhattarāja,【阳】星王(月亮)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Ved. nakṣatra collect. formation from naktiḥ & naktā=Gr. nu/c, Lat. nox, Goth. nahts, E. night=the nightly sky, the heavenly bodies of the night, as opposed to the Sun: ādicco tapataṁ mukhaṁ Vin.I,246] the stars or constellations, a conjunction of the moon with diff. constellations, a lunar mansion or the constellations of the lunar zodiac, figuring also as Names of months & determinant factors of horoscopic and other astrological observation; further a celebration of the beginning of a new month, hence any kind of festival or festivity. -- The recognised number of such lunar mansions is 27, the names of which as given in Sk. sources are the same in Pāli, with the exception of 2 variations (Assayuja for Aśvinī, Satabhisaja for Śatatāraka). Enum^d at Abhp. 58--60 as follows: Assayuja [Sk. Aśvinī] Bharaṇī, Kattikā, Rohiṇī, Magasiraṁ [Sk. Mṛgaśīrṣa] Addā [Sk. Ārdrā], Punabbasu, Phussa [Sk. Puṣya], Asilesā, Maghā, Pubba-phaggunī [Sk. Pūrva-phalgunī]. Uttara°, Hattha, Cittā [Sk. Chaitra], Sāti [Svātī], Visākhā, Anurādhā, Jeṭṭhā, Mūlaṁ, Pubb-āsāḷha [°āṣāḍha], Uttar°, Savaṇa, Dhaniṭṭhā, Satabhisaja [Śatatāraka], Pubba-bhaddapadā, Uttara°, Revatī. -- It is to be pointed out that the Niddesa speaks of 28 N. instead of 27 (Nd¹ 382: aṭṭhavīsati nakkhattāni), a discrepancy which may be accounted by the fact that one N. (the Orion) bore 2 names, viz. Mṛgaśīrṣa & Agrahayanī (see Plunkett, Ancient Calendars etc. p. 227 sq.). -- Some of these Ns. are more familiar & important than others, & are mentioned more frequently, e. g. Āsāḷha (Āsālhi°) J.I,50 & Uttarāsāḷha J.I,63, 82; Kattikā & Rohiṇī SnA 456. -- nakkhattaṁ ādisati to augur from the stars, to set the horoscope Nd¹ 382; oloketi to read the stars, to scan the constellations J.I,108, 253; ghoseti to proclaim (shout out) the new month (cp. Lat. calandae fr. cālāre to call out, scil. mensem), and thereby announce the festivity to be celebrated J.I,250; n. ghuṭṭhaṁ J.I,50, 433; saṅghuṭṭhaṁ PvA.73; ghositaṁ VvA.31; kīḷati to celebrate a (nakkhatta-) festival J.I,50, 250; VvA.63; DhA.I,393 (cp. °kīḷā below). n. ositaṁ the festival at an end J.I,433. -- nakkhatta (sg.) a constellation Sn.927; collect. the stars Vv 81¹ (cando nparivārito). nakkhattāni (pl.) the stars: nakkhattānaṁ mukhaṁ chando (the moon is the most prominent of the lights of night) Th.2.143; Vin.I,246=Sn.569 (but cp. expl. at SnA 456: candayogavasena “ajja kattikā, ajja Rohiṇī” ti paññāṇato ālokakāraṇato sommabhāvato ca nakkhattānaṁ mukhaṁ cando ti vutto); D.I,10 (nakkhattānaṁ pathagamanaṁ & uppatha-gamanaṁ a right or wrong course, i. e. a straight ascension or deviation of the stars or planets); II,259; III,85, 90; A.IV,86; Th.2, 143 (nakkhattāni namassantā bālā).

--kīḷana=kīḷā DhA.III,461; --kīḷā the celebration of a festival, making merry, taking a holiday J.I,50; ThA.137; VvA.109; --ggāha the seizure of a star (by a demon: see gāha), the disappearance of a planet (transit?) D.I,10 (expl. at DA.I,95 as nakkhattasa aṅgārakādi-gahasamāyoga); --patha “the course of the stars,” i. e. the nocturnal sky Dh.208; --pada a constellation Vin.II,217; --pāṭhaka an astrologer, soothsayer, augur Nd¹ 382; --pīḷana the failing or obscuration of a star (as a sign of death in horoscopy) DhA.I,166; -- mālā a garland of stars VvA.167; --yoga a conjunction of the planets, a constellation in its meaning for the horoscope J.I,82 253; DhA.I,174 (+tithi-karaṇa); °ṁ oloketi to set the horoscope DhA.I,166, °ṁ uggaṇhāti id. Pv III,5⁴. --rājā the king of the nakkhattas (i. e. the moon) J.III,348. (Page 344)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】星座，星宿，星，庆祝。 ~kīḷā, 【阴】 ~kīlana, 【中】在某些星座的出现而庆祝的节日。 ~pāṭhaka, 【阳】占星家。 ~yoga。【阳】行星的连接，占星术。 ~rāja, 【阳】星王（月亮）。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nakula: {'def': '【阳】猫鼬。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】猫鼬(mungoose)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Ved. nakula, cp. nakra crocodile] a mungoose, Viverra Ichneumon A.V,289 sq.; J.II,53; VI,538; Miln.118, 394. (Page 344)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nala: {'def': '& Naḷa [Ved. naḍa & Sk. naḷa, with dial.ḍ(ḷ) for *narda, cp. Gr. naρdhc] a species of reed; reed in general Vin.IV,35; A.II,73; Dh.337; Nd² 680II; J.I,223; IV,141, 396 (n. va chinno); Pv.I,11⁶ (id.); DhA.III,156; IV,43. See also nāḷa, nāḷī & nāḷikā.

--âgāra a house built of reeds S.I,156; IV,185 (+tiṇāgāra); A.I,101 (+tiṇāgāra); Nd² 40^d (id.), Miln.245; cp. AvŚ Index II.228 (naḍāgāra); --aggi a fire of reeds J.VI,100 (°vaṇṇaṁ pabbataṁ); --kalāpī a bundle of r. S.II,114; --kāra a worker in reeds, basket-maker; D.I,51 (+pesakāra & kumbhakāra); J.V,291; ThA.28; PvA.175 (+vilīvakāra); DhA.I,177; --daṇḍaka a shaft of r. J.I,170; --maya made of r. Vin.II,115; --vana a thicket of reeds J.IV,140; Miln.342; --sannibha reedcoloured J.VI,537 (Com.: naḷa-puppha-vaṇṇa rukkhasunakha); --setu a bridge of reeds Sn.4. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nalinī: {'def': '【阴】莲花池。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. nalinī] a pond J.IV,90; Vism.84, 17. (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】莲花池。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nalāṭa: {'def': '(nt.) [Ved. lalāṭa=rarāṭa; on n›l cp. naṅgala] the forehead S.I,118; J.III,393; IV,417 (nalāṭena maccuṁ ādāya: by his forelock); Vism.185; DhA.I,253. --anta the side of the forehead J.VI,331; --maṇḍala the round of the f. D.I,106; Sn.p. 108. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】额。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】额。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nalāṭikā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. lalāṭikā] “belonging to the forehead,” a frown Vin.II,10 (nalāṭikaṁ deti to give a frown). (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Namakkāra: {'def': '(梵namaskāra),【阳】尊崇，尊敬，顶礼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】尊崇，尊敬，顶礼。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Namana: {'def': '(nt.) [a philosophical term constructed by Bdhgh. from nāma, cp. ruppana-rūpa] naming, giving a name KhA 78; DhsA.52 (see nāma²); Vism.528. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Namanā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. to namati, cp. Sk. namana nt.] bent, application, industry Vbh.352. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Namassana: {'def': '(nt.) (?) veneration J.I,1. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】namassnā,【阴】尊敬，崇拜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 ~nā, 【阴】尊敬，崇拜。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Namassati: {'def': '[Ved. namasyati, denom. fr. namo] to pay honour to, to venerate, honour, do homage to (often with pañjalika & añjaliṁ katvā) Sn.236, 485, 598, 1058, 1063; Nd² 334; J.III,83; Pv.II,12²⁰; KhA 196; pot. namasseyya It.110; Dh.392, 1st pl. namassemu Sn.995; ppr. namassaṁ Sn.334, 934; namassanto SnA 565, & (usually) namassamāna Sn.192, 1142; Nd¹ 400; J.II,73; VvA.7. -- aor. namassiṁsu Sn.287. -- ger. namassitvā J.I,1. -- grd. (as adj.) namassaniya (venerable), Miln.278. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(namas + a), 敬礼，尊敬。【过】 namassi。【过分】 ~sita。【现分】 santa。【无】 ~sitvā, ~namassiya。【不】~situŋ。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(namas+a；Ved. namasyati, denom. fr. namo), 敬礼，尊敬(to pay honour to, to venerate, honour, do homage to (often with pañjalika & añjaliṁ katvā)。【过】namassi, namassiṁsu。【过分】namassita。【现分】namassaṁ, namassanto, namassamāna。【独】namassitvā, namassiya。【不】namassituṁ。【使】namassāpeti。pot. namasseyya, 1st pl. namassemu; ppr.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Namassiyā: {'def': '(namassā) (f.) [Sk. namasyā] worship, veneration Miln.140. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Namaste: {'def': '(namas+te), namaskar, 【印】我敬礼你，你好(Literally “I bow to you.”)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Namataka: {'def': '(nt.) [word & etym. doubtful; cp. nantaka & Bdhgh. Vin.II,317: matakan (sic) ti satthakavedhanakaṁ (=veṭhanakaṁ) pilotikakhaṇḍaṁ] a piece of cloth Vin.II,115 (satthaka), 123, 267 (°ṁ dhāreti). (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Namati: {'def': '(nam弯曲+a), 鞠躬，顶礼。【过】nami。【过分】nata。【现分】namanta。【独】namitvā。【义】namitabba。bhāsāya cittaṁ namati.(把心转向於论说)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nam + a), 鞠躬，顶礼。【过】 nami。【过分】 nata。【现分】 namanta。【无】 namitvā。【潜】 namitabba。【动名】 namana, 【中】。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Ved. namati, Idg. *nem to bend; also to share out, cp. Gr. nέmw, Goth. niman=Ger. nehmen. See cognates in Walde Loc. cit. under nemus] to bend, bend down (trs. & Instr.) direct, apply S.I,137 (cittaṁ); Sn.806; J.I,61 (aor. nami, cittaṁ). -- Caus. nameti (not nāmeti, Fsb. to Sn.1143 nāmenti, which is to be corrected to n’âpenti) to bend, to wield Dh.80=145 (namayati). As nāmeti at J.VI,349. pp. namita (q. v.). (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Namita: {'def': '[pp. nameti] bent on, disposed to (-°), able or capable of J.III,392 (pabbajjāya-namita-citta); Miln.308 (phalabhāra°). (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nammadā: {'def': '【阴】印度的一条河名。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】印度的一条河名。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Namo: {'def': '【无】我敬礼。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) & Nama (nt.) [Ved. namas, cp. Av. n∂mo prayer; Gr. nέmos, Lat. nemus (see namati)] nomage, veneration, esp. used as an exclamation of adoration at the beginning of a book (namo tassa Bhagavato Arahato Sammāsambuddhassa) Sn.540, 544; PvA.1, 67. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '& Nama (Ved.﹑梵 namas),【无】敬礼、归敬、归依、归命(nomage, veneration)。音译：南牟、那谟、南谟、那摩、曩莫、纳莫等。多使用於念诵前的礼敬语，如：Namo tassa Bhagavato Arahato Sammāsambuddhassa. 南摩达色巴鹅瓦多阿拉哈多三妈三菩达色归依彼有幸福者、世尊阿罗汉等 | 正觉namo ta bhagavant arahant sammā+sambuddhaind. m.s.Dat. m.s.Dat. m.s.Dat. m.s.Dat.皈依世尊‧阿罗汉‧正自觉者(三遍) namo te atthu : 我礼敬您(namo … atthu : 直译是「让礼敬…存在」，意译是︰我礼敬！。te‹ta, s.Dat.对他，在此「他」，是指「您」，一种尊敬的用法。)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Namuci: {'def': '【阳】破坏者，死亡；魔王。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(Np.) a name of Māra. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】破坏者，死亡。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nanandar: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. nanāndṛ & nanāndā, to nanā “mother”] husband’s sister J.V,269 (=sāmikassa bhaginī p. 275). (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nanandā: {'def': '【阴】丈夫的姊妹。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】丈夫的姊妹。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nanda: {'def': 'm. 難陀 [佛的異母弟].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '（比库名）难达，（古音译：）难陀', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': 'nandaka,【形】1.庆祝的，欢庆的。2.人名。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'nandaka, 【形】庆祝的，欢庆的。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'm. 難陀 [仏の異母弟].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'at Pv.II,6⁷ used either as interj. (=nanu, q. v.) or as Voc. in the sense of “dear”; the first explⁿ to be preferred & n. probably to be read as nanu (v. l. nuna) or handa (in which case nanu would be gloss). (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nandaka: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. nandikā] giving pleasure, pleasing, full of joy; f. nandikā J.IV,396 (+khiḍḍā), either as adj. or f. abstr. pleasure, rejoicing (=abhindandanā Com.). (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nandana: {'def': 'n. 歓喜園 [三十三天の園林].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【中】庆祝，难陀园(在忉力天，因陀罗城的一个花园名)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】庆祝，难陀园（在天国，因陀罗城的一个花园名）。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'n. 歡喜園 [三十三天的園林].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Nandanā: {'def': '【阴】庆祝。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. nandanā] rejoicing, delight, pleasure S.I,6=Sn.33. (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】庆祝。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nandati: {'def': '[Ved. nandati, nand=nad (cp. vind›vid etc.) orig. to utter sounds of joy] to be glad, to rejoice, find delight in, be proud of (c. Instr.) S.I,110; A.IV,94 sq.; Sn.33; Dh.18. -- Caus. nandeti to please, to do a favour J.IV,107 (nandaya=tosehi Com.); PvA.139 (=toseti). -- ppr. nandayanto J.VI,588. -- Cp. ānandati. (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(nand + a), 很高兴，欢喜，嗜好。【过】 nandi。【过分】 nandita。【现分】 nandamāna。【潜】 nanditabba。【无】 nanditvā。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nand高兴+a), 很高兴，欢喜，嗜好。【过】nandi。【过分】nandita。【现分】nandamāna。【义】nanditabba。【独】nanditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nandha: {'def': 'see yuga°. (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nandhati: {'def': '(nadh + ŋ-a), 裹，拧，系。【过】 nandhi。【无】 nandhitvā。参考 Vinandhati。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nandh绑+ṁ-a) (for nayhati, der. fr. naddha after analogy of baddha›bandhati), 裹，拧，系(to bind, to cover)。【过】nandhi。【独】nandhitvā。参考 Vinandhati, apiḷandhati, upanandhati, onandhati, pariyonandhati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[for nayhati, der. fr. naddha after analogy of baddha›bandhati] meaning not so much “to bind” as “to cover”: see apiḷandhati, upanandhati, onandhati, pariyonandhati. (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nandhi: {'def': 'Nandi, (Sk. naddhrī to naddha, pp. of nah to bind)【阴】皮带(a strap, thon)。参考 Naddhi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】参考 Naddhi。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) (usually spelt nandi) [Sk. naddhrī to naddha, pp. of nah to bind] a strap, thong J.I,175 (rathassa cammañ ca nandiñ ca); Sn.622=Dh.398 (+varatta); SnA 400; DhA.I,44, IV.160. (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nandi: {'def': '² =nandhi. (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ & (freq.) Nandī (f.) [Sk. nandi, but cp. BSk. nandī Divy 37] 1. joy, enjoyment, pleasure, delight in (c. Loc.) S.I,16, 39, 54; II,101 sq. (āhāre); III,14 (=upādāna); IV,36 sq.; A.II,10 (kāma°, bhava°, diṭṭhi°), III,246; IV,423 sq. (dhamma°); Sn.1055 (+nivesana); Nd² 330 (=taṇhā); Pug.57; Dhs.1059≈(in def. of taṇhā); Vbh.145, 356, 361; DhsA.363; ThA.65, 167. -- For nandī at Miln.289 read tandī. -- 2. a musical instrument: joy-drum [Sk. nandī] Vin.III,108 (=vijayabheri). Cp. ā°.

--(y)āvatta “turning auspiciously” (i. e. turning to the right: see dakkhiṇāvatta), auspicious, good Nett 2, 4, 7, 113 (always attr. of naya); --ûpasecana (rāgasalla) sprinkled over with joy, having joy as its sauce Nett 116, 117; cp. maṁsûpasecana (odana) J.III,144=VI,24; --kkhaya the destruction of (finding) delight S.III,51; --(ṁ)jaha giving up or abandoning joy Sn.1101 (+okañjaha & kappañjaha); Nd² 331; --bhava existence of joy, being full of joy, in °parikkhīṇa one in whom joy is extinct (i. e. an Arahant), expl^d however by Com. as one who has rid himself of the craving for rebirth (tīsu bhavesu parikkhīnataṇha DhA.IV,192=SnA 469) S.I,2, 53; Sn.175, 637=Dh.413; --mukhī (adj.-f.) “joyfaced,” showing a merry face, Ep. of the night (esp. the eve of the uposatha) Vin.I,288 (ratti); II,236 (id.); --rāga pleasure & lust, passionate delight S.II,227; III,51; IV,142, 174, 180; M.I,145; Dhs.1059≈, 1136; esp. as attr. of taṇhā in phrase n-r-sahagata-taṇhā (cp. M Vastu III,332: nandīrāgasahagatā tṛṣṇā) Vin.I,10; S.III,158; V,425 sq.; Ps.II,137; Nett 72; --saṁyojana the fetter of finding delight in anything Sn.1109, 1115; Nd² 332; --samudaya the rise or origin of delight M.III,267. (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】快乐，欢喜，高兴，渴望。 ~kkhaya, 【阳】喜尽（渴望的耗尽）。 ~rāga, 【阳】喜贪（热情的高兴）。 ~saŋyojana, 【中】喜结（渴望的桎梏）。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】快乐，欢喜，高兴，渴望。nandikkhaya,【阳】喜尽(渴望的耗尽)。nandirāga,【阳】喜染(热情的高兴)。nandisaṁyojana,【中】喜结(渴望的桎梏)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nandin: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. nandin] finding or giving delight, delighting in, pleasurable, gladdening S.II,53 (vedanā); A.II,59, 61; It.112. (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nanikāma: {'def': '(adj.) [na+nikāma=anikāma] disagreeable, unpleasant Dh.309 (°seyyā an uncomfortable bed). (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nantaka: {'def': '(nt.) [a contamination of namataka (Kern, Toev. p. 169), maybe Sk. naktaka “cover for nakedness” (Trenckner, Notes 81¹), unless it be non-Aryan] a shred, rag, worn-out cloth, usually expl^d by jiṇṇapilotika (J.III,22) or khaṇḍabhūtā pilotikā (PvA.185) or pilotika only (VvA.311). -- S.V,342; A.III,187; IV,376 (°vāsin as v. l.; text has nantikavāsin); Vv 80⁷ (anantaka); Pv III,2¹⁴; J.III,22 (°vāsin clad in rags). (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nanu: {'def': '(indecl.) [Ved. nanu] 1. part. of affirmation (cp. na¹): surely, certainly Pv.II,6⁷ (so to be read for nanda? v. l. BB nuna); Manor. Pūr. on A.V,194 (Andersen P. R. 91). -- 2. part. of interrogation (=Lat. nonne) “is it not” (cp. na²): J.I,151; III,393; DhA.I,33. (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】(肯定虚词)不是吗？确定地，当然。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】（肯定虚词）不是吗？确定地，当然。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Napuŋsaka: {'def': '【阳】 1. 太监。 2. 中性。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Napuṁsaka: {'def': '(adj.) [Ved. napuṁsaka=na+puṁs “notmale”] of no sex; lit. Vism.548, 553; ThA.260; Vbh.417; in gram. of the neuter gender KAcc. 50; PvA.266 (is reading correct?) (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(napuṁsaka=na+puṁs “notmale”),【形】【阳】太监，中性(of no sex;; in gram. of the neuter gender)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nara: {'def': '[Ved. nara, cp. nṛtu; Idg. *ner to be strong or valiant =Gr. a)nήr, a)g-ήnwr (valiant), drw/y (*nrw/y); Lat. neriosus (muscuḷar), Nero (Sabinian, cp. Oscan ner= Lat. vir); Oir. nert] man (in poetry esp. a brave, strong, heroic man), pl. either “men” or “people” (the latter e. g. at Sn.776, 1082; Pv.I,11¹²). -- A.I,130; II,5; III,53; Sn.39, 96, 116, 329, 591, 676, 865 etc.; Dh.47, 48, 262, 309, 341; J.III,295; Nd¹ 12=Nd² 335 (definition); VvA.42 (popular etymology: narati netī ti naro puriso, i. e. a “leading” man); PvA.116=Dh.125.

--âdhama vilest of men Sn.246; --âsabha “man bull,” i. e. lord of men Sn.684, 996; --inda “man lord,” i. e. king Sn.836; J.I,151; --uttama best of men (Ep. of the Buddha) S.I,23; D.III,147; Sn.1021; --deva god-man or man-god (pl.) gods, also Ep. of the B. “king of men” S.I,5; Pv IV.3⁵⁰; --nārī (pl.) men & women, appl. to male & female angelic servants (of the Yakkhas) Vv 32⁴, 33⁷, 53⁸; Pv.II,11²; --vīra a hero (?), a skilled man (?) Th.1, 736 (naravīrakata “by human skill & wit” Mrs. Rh. D.). --sīha lion of men J.I,89. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】人，人类。naradeva,【阳】国王。naravīra,【阳】英雄，佛陀。narasīha,【阳】人中狮，佛陀。narāsabha,【阳】人中君王(人的统治者)。nararuttama,【阳】人之最。narādhama,【阳】坏人，恶劣的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】人，人类。 ~deva, 【阳】国王。 ~vīra, 【阳】英雄，佛陀。~sīha, 【阳】人中狮，佛陀。 ~rāsabha, 【阳】人中君（人的统治者）。~ruttama, 【阳】人之最。 ~rādhama, 【阳】坏人，恶劣的人。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Narada: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. nalada, Gr. naρdos, of Semitic origin, cp. Hebr. nīrd] nard, ointment J.VI,537. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Naraggi: {'def': '【阳】地狱火。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Naraka: {'def': '炼狱，地狱，音译：那落迦。cf. niraya,【阳】地狱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. naraka; etym. doubtful, problematic whether to Gr. nέrteros (=inferus), Ags. nord=north as region of the underworld] 1. a pit D.I,234; Th.1, 869; J.IV,268 (°āvāṭa PvA.225). -- 2. a name for Niraya, i. e. purgatory; a place of torment for the deceased (see niraya & cp. list of narakas at Divy 67) S.I,209; Sn.706; PvA.52; Sdhp.492 (saṁsāraghora°), 612.

--aṅgāra the ashes of purgatory Sdhp.32. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '炼狱，地狱。 ~ggi, 【阳】地狱火。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nassana: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. naśana] disappearance, loss, destruction A.III,54 (°dhamma adj. doomed to perish). (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】不见，损失，破坏。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】不见，损失，破坏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nassati: {'def': '(nas消失+a), 毁灭，消失。【过】nassi。【过分】naṭṭha。【现分】nassanta。【独】nassitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nas + a), 毁灭，消失。【过】 nassi。【过分】 naṭṭha。【现分】 nassanta。【无】 nassitvā。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(v. intr.) [Ved. naś; naśyati & naśati, cp. Gr. nέkus, nekrόs (corpse), nέktar (“overcoming death” =nec+tṛ, cp. tarati); Lat. neco, noceo, noxius] to perish, to be lost or destroyed, to disappear, come to an end Sn.666 (na hi nassati kassaci kammaṁ); It.90; J.I,81, 116, 150; pret. nassaṁ (prohib.) Sn.1120, pl. anassāma M.I,177; aor. nassi A.III,54 (mā nassi prohib.); J.IV,137 (cakkhūni °iṁsu: the eyes failed); fut. nassisati J.I,5; cond. nassissa J.II,112. -- Caus. nāseti (q. v.). See also pa°. (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nata: {'def': '(namati 的【过分】)( Sk. nata, pp. of namati)﹐已弯曲，已弯下，已倾向(bent (on) )。【反】anata﹐已不弯曲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. nata, pp. of namati, q. v.] bent (on) S.I,186 (a°); Sn.1143; Nd² 327. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(namati 的【过分】)。已弯曲，已弯下，已倾向。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nati: {'def': '【阴】弯曲，倾向，弯腰。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. nati of nam] bending, bent, inclination S.II,67; IV,59; M.I,115. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】弯曲，倾向，弯腰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Natta: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. nakta, see nakkhatta] night, Acc. nattaṁ by night, in nattam-ahaṁ by day & by night Sn.1070 (v. l. BB and Nd² rattamahaṁ). (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nattamāla: {'def': '【阳】水黄皮（产于亚洲的一种豆科乔木(Pongamia glabra)，具羽状复叶，有光泽；花序总状，花乳白色，芳香，用作遮荫树和一种照明油的来源）。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】水黄皮(产於亚洲的一种豆科乔木 (Pongamia glabra)，具羽状复叶，有光泽；花序总状，花乳白色，芳香，用作遮荫树和一种照明油的来源)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nattar: {'def': '[Sk. naptṛ, analogy-formation after mātṛ etc. from Ved. napāt; cp. Lat. nepos; Ags. nefa=E. nephew; Ohg. nevo] grandson J.I,60 (nattu, Gen.), 88; Ud.91, 92; PvA.17 (nattu-dhītā great-grand-daughter), 25 (nattā Nom.). (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Natthi: {'def': '(na+atthi), 没有，不，不呈现。natthika-diṭṭhi,【阴】断见(否认死后还会以任何形式存在，因此不承认业有善恶)。natthikavāda,【阳】断见论。natthikavādī,【阳】持断见的人。natthitā,【阴】缺席。natthibhāva,【阳】缺席。natthī ti (=na atthi ti)(ti之连音「连音规则」)没有。natthipaccaya﹐无有缘。《发趣论》(Paṭṭhāna)(CS:p.1.9)：22. Natthipaccayoti-samanantaraniruddhā cittacetasikā dhammā paṭuppannānaṁ cittacetasikānaṁ dhammānaṁ natthipaccayena paccayo.(无有缘：(前一名聚)诸心心所法等无间灭去，对於现在诸心心所法来说，是由无有缘而为缘。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(na + atthi), 没有，不，不呈现。 ~kadiṭṭhi, 【阴】断见。 ~kavādī, 【阳】持断见的人。 ~tā, 【阴】 bhāva, 【阳】缺席。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Natthibhāva: {'def': '[n’atthi-bhāva] non-existence DhA.III,324. (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Natthika: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [Sk. nāstika] one who professes the motto of “natthi,” a sceptic, nihilist S.I,96; usually in cpds.

--diṭṭhi scepticism, nihilistic view, heresy Sn.243 (=micchāditthi Com.); VvA.342; PvA.244; --vāda one who professes a nihilistic doctrine S.III,73; M.I,403; A.II,31; PvA.215 (+micchādiṭṭhika). (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Natthitā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. nāstitā, fr. n’atthi] nihilism S.II,17; J.V,110. (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Natthu: {'def': '【阴】鼻子。natthukamma,【中】鼻子的治疗(采用倒油等)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. nas f. & nasta, see etym. under nāsā] 1. the nose J.V,166 (=nāsā Com.). -- 2.=°kamma, medical treatment through the nose Vin.III,83 (deti).

--kamma nose-treatment, consisting in the application of hot oil (DA.I,98: telaṁ yojetvā n-karaṇaṁ) D.I,12; Vin.I,204; M.I,511; DhA.I,12; --karaṇī a pockethandkerchief Vin.I,204. (Page 346)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】鼻子。 ~kamma, 【中】鼻子的治疗（采用倒油等）。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nattu: {'def': '【阳】孙子。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】孙子。nattupanattakā(nattu+pa-nattakā), 孙子的孙子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nava: {'def': '【形】1.新的。2.九。navakamma,【中】新的工作。navakammika,【形】建筑的专家。navaṅga,【形】有九部分的。navanavuti,【阴】九十九。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 1. 新的。 2. 九。 ~kamma, 【中】新的工作。 ~kammika, 【形】建筑的专家。 ~ṅga, 【形】有九部分的。 ~navuti, 【阴】九十九。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [Ved. nava, Idg. *neǔ n̊ (cp. nava¹)=Lat. novus, Gr. nέos (*nέvos), Lith. navas; Goth. niujis etc.=E. new; also Sk. navya=Gr. neίos, Lat. Novius. May be related to na³] 1. new, fresh; unsoiled, clean; of late, lately acquired or practised (opp. pubba & purāṇa). Often syn. with taruṇa. Sn.28, 235 (opp. purāṇaṁ), 944 (id.), 913 (opp. pubba); Pv.I,9² (of clothes=costly); J.IV,201 (opp. purāṇa); Miln.132 (salila fresh water). -- 2. young, unexperienced, newly initiated; a novice Vin.I,47 (navā bhikkhū the younger bhs., opp. therā); S.I,9 (+acira-pabbajita); II,218; Sn.p. 93 (Gotamo navo pabbajjāya “a novice in the Wanderer’s life”); DhA.I,92 (bhikkhu).

--kamma building new, making repairs, “doing up,” mending Vin.II,119, 159; III,81; J.I,92; IV,378; Nd² 385; --kammika an expert in making repairs or in building, a builder (cp. vaḍḍhaki) Vin.II,15; IV,211; --ghata fresh ghee J.II,433 (v. l. °sappi). (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (num.) [Ved. navan, Idg. *neǔ n̊, cp. Lat. novem (*noven), Gr. e]nnέa, Goth. niun, Oir. nōin, E. nine. Connection with nava² likely because in counting by tetrads (octo=8 is a dual!) a new series begins with No. 9] number nine. Gen.-Dat. navannaṁ (Sn.p. 87); Instr.-Abl. navahi (VvA.76), Loc. navasu.

Meaning and Application: The primitive-Aryan importance of the “mystic” nine is not found in Buddhism and can only be traced in Pali in folkloristic undercurrents (as fairy tales) & stereotype traditions in which 9 appears as a number implying a higher trinity=3². 1. navabhūmaka pāsāda (a palace 9 stories high more freq. satta°, 7) J.I,58; nava-hiraññakoṭīhi (w. 9 koṭis of gold) VvA.188; nava yojana DhA.II,65. -- 2. navaṅgabuddhasāsana “the 9 fold teaching of Buddha,” i. e. the 9 divisions of the Buddh. Scriptures according to their form or style, viz. suttaṁ geyyaṁ veyyākaraṇaṁ gāthā udānaṁ itivuttakaṁ jātakaṁ abbhutadhammaṁ vedallaṁ M.I,133; A.II,103, 178; III,86 sq., 177 sq.; Pug.43; Miln.344; Dpvs.IV,15; PvA.2. Cp. chaḷaṅga.-nava sattāvāsā “9 abodes of beings” Kh IV. (in exemplifying No. 9), viz. (see D.III,263=KhA 86, 87 cp. also A.IV,39 sq.) (1) manussā, devā, vinipātikā; (2) Brahmakāyikā devā; (3) Ābhassarā; (4) Subhakiṇhā; (5) Asaññasattā; (6) Ākāsanañcâyatana-upagā; (7) Viññāṇanañcâyatana°; (8) Ākiñcaññāyatana°; (9) Nevasaññâsaññâyatana°. -- nava sotā (Sn.197) or nava dvārā (VvA.76; v. l. mukhā) 9 openings of the body, viz. (SnA 248) 2 eyes, ears, nostrils, mouth, anus & urethra (cp. S.B.E. 39, 180; 40, 259 sq.). -- nava vitakkā 9 thoughts Nd² 269 (q. v.). -- 3. a trace of the week of 9 days is to be found in the expression “navuti-vassasatasahass-āyukā” giving the age of a divinity as 9 million years (=a divine week) VvA.345. -- Cp. navuti. (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Navaka: {'def': '【阳】初学者，新人，年轻人。【中】九个一组。~tara, 【形】较年轻的（年纪较小者）。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [Sk. navaka] young; a young man, a newly ordained bhikkhu (opp. thera), novice (cp. Divy 404) J.I,33 (saṅgha°); PvA.76 (id.). -- Freq. in compar. navakatara a younger one, or the youngest (opp. theratara) D.II,154; J.I,218; Miln.24. (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】初学者，新人，年轻人。【中】九个一组。navatara,【形】较年轻的(年纪较小者)。bhikkhū navakatarā﹐诸较年轻的比丘。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Navama: {'def': '【形】第九。navamī,【阴】农历初九〔白月初九〕(或农历廿四日〔黑月初九〕)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】第九。 ~mī, 【阴】农历初九〔白月初九〕（或农历廿四日〔黑月初九〕）。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(num. ord.) [Sk. navama=Oir. nōmad; cp. Lat. nonus; Gr. e)/natos, Goth. niunda with diff. superl. suffixes] the ninth Sn.109; f. °ī VvA.72. (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Navanīta: {'def': '(nt.) & nonīta [cp. Ved. navanīta] fresh butter Vin.I,244 (cp. gorasa); D.I,201; M.III,141; Pv III,5⁵ (nonīta); Pug.69, 70; Miln.41, Dhs.646, 740; DhA.I,417; PvA.199. (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】鲜奶油。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】鲜奶油。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Navattabbārammaṇa: {'def': '【中】当新的所缘(=现在所缘)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Naviya: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. navya, either grd. of navate to praise; or=nava, q. v.] praiseworthy Miln.389. (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Navuti: {'def': '【阴】九十。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】九十。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(num.) [Ved. navati] number ninety VvA.345 & in compⁿ eka° 91 D.II,2 (i. e. 92 minus 1; in expr. ekanavuto kappo, v. l. ekanavuti kappe); dvā° 92 (see dvi A.II,& B III,); PvA.19, 21; aṭṭhā° 98; Sn.311 (diseases sprung fr. orig. 3). (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Navutiya: {'def': '(adj.) worth ninety J.V,485. Cp. nāvutika. (Page 348)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Naya: {'def': '【阳】方法，计划，方式，推论，正确的结论。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】方法，计划，方式，推论，正确的结论。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [from nayati, to lead, see neti] “leading”; usually m: way (fig.), method, plan, manner; inference; sense, meaning (in grammar); behaviour, conduct A.II,193=Nd² 151 (°hetu through inference); Nett 2 (method), 4 (id.), 7, 113; Miln.316 (nayena=nayahetu); KhA 74; VvA.112 (sense, context, sentence); PvA.1 (ways or conduct), 117 (meaning), 126 (id.), 136, 280. -- nayaṁ neti to draw a conclusion, apply an inference, judge, behave S.II,58=Vbh.329; J.IV,241 (anayaṁ nayati dummedho: draws a wrong conclusion); PvA.227 (+anumināti). -- With °ādi° N. has the function of continuing or completing the context= “and similarly,” e. g. °ādinaya-pavatta dealing with this & the following VvA.2; . . . ti ādinā nayena thus & similarly, & so forth J.I,81; PvA.30. -- Instr. nayena (-°) as adv. in the way of, as, according(ly): āgata° according to what has been shown or said in . . . J.I,59; VvA.3; PvA.280; purima° as before J.I,59; IV,140; vutta° as said (above) (cp. vutta-niyāmena) PvA.13, 29, 36, 71, 92 etc. -- sunaya a sound judgment J.IV,241; dunnaya a wrong principle, method or judgment, or as adj.: wrongly inferred, hard to be understood, unintelligible A.III,178=Nett 21; J.IV,241. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nayana: {'def': '【中】眼睛。【动名】携带。 ~āvudha, 【阳】眼睛即武器（即：阎摩王 Yama）。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】眼睛。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. nayana, to nayati=the leader cp. also netra=P. netta] the eye Th.2, 381; Vv 35³; Dhs.597; Vbh.71 sq.; Miln.365; ThA.255; VvA.161 (=cakkhu); PvA.40 (nettāni nayanāni), 152; Sdhp.448, 621. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nayati: {'def': '(ni+a), 带领，指导，引导。【过】nayi。参考 Neti。【独】natvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ni + a), 带领，指导，引导。【过】 nayi。参考 Neti。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see neti. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nayhana: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. nahana] tying, binding; bond, fetter DhA.IV,161. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nayhati: {'def': '(nah + ya), 系，绑，裹，拧。【过】 nayhi。【过分】 naddha。【动名】 nayhana。【无】 nayhitvā。(p167)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nah +ya), 系，绑，裹，拧。【过】nayhi。【过分】naddha。【独】nayhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Ved. nahyati, Idg. *nedh as in Lat. nodus & Ved. nahu] to tie, bind; only in comp. with prep. as upanayhati (cp. upāhanā sandal), pilandhati etc. -- pp. naddha (q. v.). See also nandhi, nāha; onayhati, unnahanā, piḷayhati. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nayidaṁ: {'def': '(na不+ y +idaṁ那么)﹐那么，不…。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nayāvudha: {'def': '【阳】眼睛即武器(即：阎摩王 Yama)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Naḷa: {'def': '【阳】芦苇，管。 ~kāra, 【阳】编篮工人，芦苇业员工。 ~kalāpa, 【阳】一捆芦苇。 ~mīṇa, 【阳】虾。 ~agāra, 【中】茅屋（以芦苇制成的小屋）。(p168)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】芦苇，管。naḷakāra,【阳】编篮工人，芦苇业员工。naḷakalāpa,【阳】一捆芦苇。naḷamīṇa,【阳】虾。naḷagāra,【中】茅屋(以芦苇制成的小屋)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Naḷapin: {'def': 'a water-animal J.VI,537. (Page 347)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Naṁ: {'def': '1.ta的中.单.主(另外两种taṁ (the usual form) ﹑tad(older))。2. ta的阳.单.宾或ta的中.单.宾。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Naṅgala: {'def': '【中】犁。 ~phāla, 【阳】（犁）铧，铧头。 ~līsā, 【阴】犁辕。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Ved. lāṅgala; naṅgala by dissimilation through subsequent nasal, cp. Milinda›Menandros. Etym. unknown, prob. dialectical (already in RV IV. 57⁴), because unconnected with other Aryan words for plough. Cp. Balūčī naṅgār] a plough S.I,115; III,155; A.III,64; Sn.77 (yuga° yoke & plough); Sn.p. 13; J.I,57; Th.2, 441 (=sīra ThA.270); SnA 146; VvA.63, 65; PvA.133 (dun° hard to plough); DhA.I,223 (aya°); III,67 (id.).

--īsā the beam of a plough S.I,104 (of an elephant’s trunk); --kaṭṭhakaraṇa ploughing S.V,146=J.II,59; --phāla [mod. Ind. phār] ploughshare (to be understood as Dvandva) DhA.I,395. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】犁。naṅgalaphāla,【阳】(犁)铧，铧头。naṅgalalīsā,【阴】犁辕。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Naṅgalin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) having or using a plough, ploughman, in mukha° “using the mouth as plough” Th.1, 101 (maulvergnügt, Neumann) (Mrs. Rh. D. harsh of speech). (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Naṅgula: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. Lāṅg & uhacekmacr; la to laṅga & lagati (q. v.). cp. Gr. laggάzw, Lat. langueo] a tail Th.1, 113=601 (go°). (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Naṅguṭṭha: {'def': '【中】尾。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】尾。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [dial. for *naṅgūlya›*naṅguḷhya?]= naṅgula A.II,245; J.I,194 (of a bull); II,19 (of an elephant); III,16 (sūci°), 480 (panther); IV,256 (of a deer); DhA.I,275 (of a fish); II,64. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Naṭa: {'def': 'naṭaka, naṭṭaka, nattaka,【阳】舞者(dancer)，演员。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. naṭa dial. ṭ, cp. Prk. naḍa, of nṛt, see naccati] a dancer, player, mimic, actor Vin.IV,285; S.IV,306 sq.; DhA.IV,60 (°dhītā), 65 (°karaka), 224 (°kīḷā); Miln.359 (°naccaka); Sdhp.380. -- Cp. naṭaka & nāṭaka. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'naṭaka, naṭṭaka, nattaka, 【阳】舞者，演员。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Naṭaka: {'def': '[Sk. naṭaka]=naṭa Vin.IV,285; Miln.331; PvA.3. -- f. naṭikā DA.I,239. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Naṭati: {'def': '[Sk. naṭati, of nṛt, with dial. ṭ, cp. naccati] to dance, play VvA.210 (=naccati). (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Naṭṭa: {'def': 'natta, nattana, 【中】舞蹈，表演。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'natta, nattana,【中】舞蹈，表演，演艺。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Naṭṭha: {'def': '(nassati 的【过分】), 已遗失，已毁灭。(p166)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nassati 的【过分】), 已遗失，已毁灭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. naṣṭha, pp. of nassati (naśyati), q. v.] perished, destroyed; lost A.II,249; J.I,74; 267. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Naṭṭhana: {'def': '(nt.) [Der. fr. naṭṭha] destruction Miln.180, 237. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Naṭṭhāyika: {'def': '[cp. Sk. naṣṭhārtha, i. e. naṣṭha+artha] bankrupt Miln.131, 201. (Page 345)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ne: {'def': '﹐【阳】他们，它们。与‘te’同属【复.主】、【复.宾】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Necayika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. nicaya] rich, wealthy D.I,136, 142 (read nevāsika cp. naivasika M Vastu III,38); A.V,149 (v. l. BB nerayika, Com. nevāsiko ti nivāsakaro). (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Negama: {'def': '【形】属于市镇的。【阳】镇议会。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】市镇的。【阳】镇议会。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. nigama] the inhabitant of a (small) town; citizen; also collect.=jana, people Vin.I,268, 273; D.I,136, 139; J.IV,121; VI,493; Dāvs III,3; DA.I,297. Often comb^d with °jānapadā (pl.) “townsmen & countryfolk” S.I,89; D.III,148, 172; J 149. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Neka: {'def': '【形】一些的，许多的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】一些的，许多的。(p183)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. naika=na eka, cp. aneka] not one, several, many Sn.308; Vv 53⁶ (°citta variegated=nānāvidhacitta VvA.236), 64¹ (id.=anekacitta VvA.275); Tikp 366. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nekada: {'def': '=anekadā (frequently). (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nekatika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. nikati] deceitful, fraudulent; a cheat D.III,183; Th.1, 940; Miln.290; PvA.209; J.IV,184. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】欺骗。【形】欺诈的。(p183)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹nikati),【阳】欺骗，骗子。【形】欺诈的(deceitful, fraudulent; a cheat)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nekkha: {'def': '[Vedic niṣka; cp. nikkha] a golden ornament, a certain coin of gold S.I,65; A.I,181; II,8, 29; Dh.230 (=DhA.III,329 jambonada nikkha); Vism.48; v. l. at Vv 20⁸, 43⁸. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic niska; cp. nikkha),【中】大金币(a golden ornament, a certain coin of gold)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】大金币。(p183)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nekkhamma: {'def': '离欲;出离', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '(nt.) [formally a derivation fr. nikkhamma (ger. of nikkhamati)=Sk. *naiṣkramya, as shown also by its semantic affinity to nikkhanta, in which the metaphorical sense has entirely superseded the literal one. On the other hand, it may be a bastard derivation fr. nikkāma=Sk. *naiṣkāmya, although the adj. nikkāma does not show the prevailing meaning & the wide range of nikkhanta, moreover formally we should expect nekkamma. In any case the connection with kāma is pre-eminently felt in the connotation of n., as shown by var. passages where a play of word exists between n. & kāma (cp. kāmānaṁ nissaraṇaṁ yad idaṁ nekkhammaṁ It.61, cp. Vin.I,104; A.III,245; also M.I,115). The use of the similar term abhinikkhamana further warrants its derivation fr. nikkhamati] giving up the world & leading a holy life, renunciation of, or emancipation from worldliness, freedom from lust, craving & desires, dispassionateness, self-abnegation, Nibbāna Vin.I,18 (°e ānisaṁsa); D.I,110 (id.), III,239, 275, 283; M.III,129; A.I,147 (=khema, i. e. nibbāna); III,245; IV,186 (ānisaṁsa), 439 sq.; Sn.424 (°ṁ daṭṭhu khemato); Dh.181; Ps.I,107 sq.; II,169 sq.; Nd² 370; Vism.116, 325; J.I,19; 137; Vv 84⁴² (=nibbāna VvA.348); Nett 53, 87, 106 sq.; Miln.285 (°ṁ abhinikkhanta); DhA.III,227; ThA.266.

--âdhimutta bent on self-abnegation (enum^d with 5 other ideals of Arahantship: paviveka, avyāpajjha, upādānakkhaya, taṇhakkhaya, asammoha) Vin.I,183; A.III,376; --âbhirata fond of renunciation A.IV,224; V,175; Ps.II,173; --dhātu the sphere or element of dispassionateness S.II,152; Vbh.86; Nett 97; Vism.487. --ninna merging into or bent on a holy life S.III,233; --vitakka a thought of self-abnegation S.II,152; A.I,275; II,252; It.82; --saṅkappa=prec. S.II,152; A.III,146; Vbh.104, 235; --sita based or bent on a holy life (opp. geha° q. v.) S.IV,232; --sukha the joy or happiness of Arahantship M.III,110; A.I,80; Dh.267, 272; DhA.III,400. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】放弃世俗生活，放弃，远离。nekkhammavitakka, nekkhammasaṅkappa,【阳】无欲之思。nekkhammasukha,【中】过著离世生活的快乐。nekkhammabhirata,【形】喜欢放弃的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】放弃世俗生活，放弃，远离。 ~vitakka, ~saṅkappa, 【阳】自我牺牲的思索。 ~sukha, 【中】过着离世生活的快乐。 ~abhirata, 【形】喜欢放弃的。(p183)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nekkhammasaṅkappa: {'def': '【阳】无欲之思。DA.22./III,802-3︰Nekkhammasaṅkappādayo kāmabyāpādavihiṁsāviramaṇasaññānaṁ nānattā pubbabhāge nānā, maggakkhaṇe pana imesu tīsu ṭhānesu uppannassa akusalasaṅkappassa padapacchedato anuppattisādhanavasena maggaṅgaṁ pūrayamāno ekova kusalasaṅkappo uppajjati. Ayaṁ sammāsaṅkappo nāma.(出离思惟等，远离诸欲、瞋、害之想，各种前分；於道刹那之际，斩断已生的这三项不善思之根柢，抵达证得道分，圆满生起善思，这称为‘正思’。) SA.45.8./III,124-5.︰Nekkhammasaṅkappādīsu kāmapaccanīkaṭṭhena kāmato nissaṭabhāvena vā, kāmaṁ sammasantassa uppannoti vā, kāmapadaghātaṁ kāmavūpasamaṁ karonto uppannoti vā kāmavivittante uppannoti vā nekkhammasaṅkappo.( ‘出离思惟’等，与欲相反之义，由欲解放，或彻知已生之欲，或斩断已生之欲的根柢，已作欲的寂静，或已生起隔离欲，这称为‘离欲之思’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nekākāra: {'def': '【形】各种不同的，种种的。(p183)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】各种不同的，种种的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nekāyika: {'def': '(‹nikāya),【形】精通四或五部尼柯耶(versed in the 4 or 5 Nikāyas)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. nikāya] versed in the 4 (or 5) Nikāyas Miln.22; cp. Cunningham, Stupa of Bharhut 142, 52. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】精通五部经典的，属于一个教派的。(p183)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nela: {'def': '﹐ neḷa (na+eḷa﹐梵anenas)﹐1.【形】无缺点的，柔和的。nelapatī(=vatī)﹐【阴】柔和。2.【阳】一种花。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nema: {'def': '(cp. nemi),【中】边缘，点，根(edge, point; root; gambhīranema (adj.) with deeply rooted point, firmly established)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. nemi] edge, point; root S.V,445; A.IV,404; gambhīra° (adj.) with deeply rooted point, firmly established S.V,444; A.IV,106. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nemantaṇika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. nimantana] one who lives by invitations M.I,31. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nemi: {'def': '【阴】轮缘，轮圈。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Vedic nemi, perhaps to namati),【阴】轮缘，轮圈(the circumference of a wheel, circumference, rim, edge)。jarāmaraṇanemi, 生死之轮(the rim of old age & death)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic nemi, perhaps to namati] the circumference of a wheel, circumference, rim, edge (cp. nema) A.I,112; Vv 64⁵; Miln.238, 285; Vism.198 (fig. jarāmaraṇa°, the rim of old age & death, which belongs to the wheel of Saṁsāra of the chariot of existence, bhavaratha); DhA.II,124 (°vaṭṭi); VvA.277. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nemindhara: {'def': '【阳】尼民陀罗山、持辐山（一座山的名字）。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】尼民陀罗山、持辐山(山名)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'm. ネーミンダラ山，持軸山［九山の一］，尼民陀罗', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Nemitta: {'def': '【阳】占相者，占星者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. naimitta, fr. nimitti] a fortune-teller, astrologer D.II,16, 19; A.III,243. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nemittaka: {'def': '& Nemittika [Sk. naimittika, fr. nimitta] an astrologer, fortune-teller, soothsayer D.I,8 (i)=DA.I,91; A.III,111; J.IV,124; Miln.19 (i), 229; Vism.210 (i); DhA.II,241 (a). (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nemittika: {'def': '【阳】算命佬，预言者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】算命佬，预言者。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nemittikatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. nemittika]=nimitta-kammaṁ, i. e. prognostication; inquisitiveness, insinuation Vbh.352=Vism.23; expl^d at Vism.28. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵nimittī-kr)﹐现相(欲得他物表欲得相，如言此物好)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nemiya: {'def': '(adj.) [=nemika] (-°) having a circumference etc. J.VI,252. (Page 378)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nepakka: {'def': '(fr. nipaka),【中】审慎(prudence, discrimination, carefulness; usually as satinepakka S.V,197 sq.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. nipaka] prudence, discrimination, carefulness; usually as sati° S.V,197 sq.; M.I,356; A.III,11; IV,15; Nd² 629 B; Vbh.244, 249; Vism.3 (=paññā); DhA.IV,29. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】审慎。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nepuñña: {'def': '(fr. nipuṇa) ,【中】经验，熟练，聪明(experience, skill, cleverness )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. nipuṇa] experience, skill, cleverness Pug.25, 35; Dhs.16, 292; DhsA.147. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】技术。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nerayika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. niraya, cp. BSk. nairayika Divy 165] belonging to niraya or purgatory, hellish; one doomed to suffering in purgatory (n. satta=inhabitant of n.) Vin.II,205 (āpāyiko n. kappaṭṭho); IV,7; D.III,6, 9, 12; A.I,265; II,231 (vedanaṁ vediyati . . . seyyathā pi sattā nerayikā); III,402 sq.; Sn.664; Nd¹ 97 (gati); Vv 52¹, J.IV,3 (sattā); Pug.51; Vbh.412 sq.; Vism.415 (°sattā), 424; Miln.148 (sattā); PvA.27 (id.), 52 (°bhāva), 255; VvA.23; Sdhp.193, 198. (Page 378)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】在地狱出生的，命中注定在地狱受苦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】在地狱出生的，命中注定在地狱受苦。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Neru: {'def': '【阳】尼噜山（最高的山名字，即：须弥山）。参考 Meru。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'm. = Meru, Sumeru, Sineru 須彌山 [被當作在世界中央的山].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'm. =Meru, Sumeru, Sineru 須弥山 [世界の中央にあるとされる山].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【阳】尼噜山(最高的山名字，即：须弥山)。参考 Meru，Sumeru，Sineru。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nerutta: {'def': '(‹nierutta)﹐语源学者，语言学者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. nirutti] based on etymology; an etymologist or philologist ThA.153; Nett 8, 9, 32, 33. (Page 378)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nesajjika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. nisajjā] being & remaining in a sitting position (as an ascetic practice) A.III,220; Th.1, 904, 1120; Nd² 587; J.IV,8; Pug.69; Vism.79; Miln.20, 342. The n-°aṅga is one of the dhūtaṅga-precepts, enjoining the sitting posture also for sleeping, see Vin.V,193, Vism.61, & dhūtaṅga. (Page 378)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】维持坐姿的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】维持坐姿的。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nesāda: {'def': '【阳】猎人。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】猎人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. nisāda; cp. Sk. niṣāda & naiṣāda=one who lies in wait] a hunter; also a low caste Vin.IV,7 (+veṇa & rathakāra); S.I,93 (°kula); A.I,107; II,85; J.II,36; III,330; IV,397, 413; V,110, 337; VI,71; Pug.51 (°kula); Miln.311; DhA.III,24; PvA.176. (Page 378)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Netar: {'def': '[Vedic netṛ, n. ag. of neti] a leader, guide, forerunner Sn.86, 213; Nd¹ 446. Neti (nayati) [Vedic nayati, nī] to lead, guide, conduct; to take, carry (away); fig. to draw a conclusion, to understand, to take as Dh.80, 145, 240, 257; J.I,228; IV,241 (nayaṁ n. to draw a proper conclusion); VvA.42 (narati=nayati); imper. naya Pv.II,11³, & nehi J.II,160; PvA.147; poetic imper. nayāhi see in paṭi°; pot. naye Dh.256 (to lead a cause=vinicchineyya DhA.III,381). fut. nessāmi J.II,159; Pv.II,4⁵; aor. nayi J.IV,137. ger. netvā PvA.5, 6, etc. inf. netuṁ PvA.123, 145 (°kāma), & netave J.I,79=Dh.180. grd. neyya (see sep.), pp. nīta. Pass. nīyati (q. v.). Cp. naya, nīti, netta etc.; also ā°, upa°, paṭi°, vi°. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Netaṁ: {'def': 'ṭhānaṁ vijjati﹐无有是处(这个(或那个)不可能存在)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(na无+eta这﹑那)﹐无这，无那。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Neti: {'def': '(nī带领+a)(=nayati)(Vedic nayati, nī), 带领，指导，拿走(to lead, guide, conduct; to take, carry (away))。【过】nesi。【过分】nīta。【现分】nenta。【义】netabba。【独】netvā。imper. naya & nehi; poetic imper. nayāhi see in paṭinayāhi; pot. naye(to lead a cause=vinicchineyya). fut. nessāmi; aor. nayi. ger. netvā. inf. netuṁ (°kāma), & netave. grd. neyya, Pass. nīyati.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ni + a), 带领，指导，拿走。【过】 nesi。【过分】 nīta。【现分】 nenta。【潜】 netabba。【独】 netvā。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Neto: {'def': '(na+ito)﹐此…无。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Netta: {'def': '² (nt.) [Sk. netra] guidance, anything that guides, a conductor, fig. the eye. S.I,26 (sārathī nettāni gahetvā =the reins); Vin.I,204 (dhūma° for smoke); J.IV,363 (id.); D.I,12 (°tappana, set t. & cp. DA.I,98); Sn.550 (pasanna°), 1120; Nd² 371 (=cakkhu), 669; J.VI,290 (tamba° with red eyes); Pv.I,8³ (eyes=nayanāni Com.); Dhs.597; Vbh.71 sq. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】眼睛。 ~tārā, 【阴】瞳孔。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [Sk. netra, fr. neti] a guide J.III,111; Nett. 130. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Netthar: {'def': '[see nittharati; does any connection exist with Vedic neṣṭṛ?] only in phrase netthāraṁ vattati to behave in such a way as to get rid of blame or fault Vin.II,5; III,183; M.I,442. -- Bdhgh on Vin.II,5 (p. 309) explains: nittharantānaṁ etan ti netthāraṁ yena sakkā nissāraṇā nittharituṁ taṁ aṭṭhārasa-vidhaṁ sammāvattuṁ vattantī ti attho. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Netti: {'def': '【阴】 1. 渴望。 2. 水道。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic netrī, f. to netṛ] a guide, conductor; support (=nettika²) It.37 (āhāra°-pabhava), 38 (bhava°), 94 (netticchinna bhikkhu=Arahant). Cp. nettika² & dhamma°, bhava°. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】1.渴望。2.水道。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Netti-pakaraṇa: {'def': 'n. 導論.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'n. 導論.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Nettika: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [netta+ika] 1. having as guide or forerunner, in Bhagavaṁ°’dhamma M.I,310; A.I,199; IV,158, 351; V,355. -- 2. a conduit for irrigation; one who makes conduits for watering Dh.80 (=udakaṁ nenti nettikā), 145; fig. that which supplies with food or water, in bhava° (“the roots of existence, clinging to existence”) D.I,46 (ucchinna° with the roots of existence cut); sanettika clinging to existence, a bad man A.II,54. Cp. netti. (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】造灌溉水道的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】造灌溉水道的人。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nettiŋsa: {'def': '【阳】刀剑。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nettiṁsa: {'def': '[cp. Sk. nistriṁśa, Halāyudha 2, 317; very doubtful, whether nis+triṁśa (thirty), prob. a dial. distortion] a sword J.II,77 (°vara-dhārin; C. nettiṁsā vuccanti khaggā); IV,118 (C. gives it as adj.=nikkaruṇa, merciless; & says “khaggassa nāmaṁ”); VI,188 (°varadhārin). (Page 377)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】刀剑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Netu: {'def': '【阳】领袖。Netta,【中】眼睛。netutārā,【阴】瞳孔。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】领袖。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Neva: {'def': '(indecl.) [na+eva] see na². -- nevasaññā-nâsañña (being) neither perception nor non-perception, only in cpd. °āyatana & in nevasaññī-nâsaññin: see saññā. (Page 378)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(na无+eva实)﹐实在没有。Neva…na﹐非…非。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nevidha: {'def': 'n’ev’idha, 无此。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nevāpika: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. nivāpa] a deer-feeder M.I,150 sq. (Page 378)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nevāsika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. nivāsa, cp. BSk. naivāsika AvS.I,286, 287] one who inhabits, an inmate; living in a place, local J.I,236 sq.; DhA.II,53 sq. Cp. necayika. (Page 378)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】同住者，同室者（特指在医院、监狱），居民。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. nivāsa, cp. BSk. naivāsika AvS.I,286, 287),【阳】【形】常住者，同室者(特指在医院、监狱)，居民(one who inhabits, an inmate; living in a place, local)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Neyya: {'def': '【形】被引导的，被运的，被推论出的，被了解的。(p184)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of neti; Sk. neya] to be led, carried etc.; fig. to be instructed; to be inferred, guessed or understood Sn.55, 803, 846, 1113; Nd¹ 114, 206; Nd² 372; Pug.41; Nett 9 sq., 125; --attha the meaning which is to be inferred (opp. nītattha) A.I,60; Nett 21. (Page 378)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】被引导的，被运的，被推论出的，被了解的，未了的行者(经过详细解说，精研教义，还要经精进地修习，才可契入道与果)。Pug.PTS:p.42.︰150.Katamo ca puggalo neyyo? Yassa puggalassa uddesato paripucchato yoniso manasikaroto kalyāṇamitte sevato bhajato payirupāsato evaṁ anupubbena dhammābhisamayo hoti– ayaṁ vuccati puggalo “neyyo”.(什么人是‘应被引导者’？哪个人从诵经、从遍问，而从根源作意、被结交、被深交、敬奉诸善友，如此依次第(产生)法现观，这称为被引导者。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Neḷa: {'def': '(& Nela) (adj.) [na+eḷa=Sk. anenas, of enas fault, sin. The other negated form, also in meaning “pure, clean,” is aneḷa (& aneḷaka), q. v. On ḷ: n. cp. lāṅgala; naṅgala; tulā: tūṇa etc.] 1. without fault or sin, blameless, faultless; not hurting, humane, gentle, merciful, innocuous D.I,4 (Bdhgh explains: elaṁ vuccati doso; n’assā (i. e. vācāya) elan ti nelā; niddosā ti attho. “Nelaṅgo setapacchādo” ti ettha vuttanelaṁ viya; DA.I,75); A.II,209; V,205; J.V,156; Vv 50¹⁸, 63⁶ (=niddosa VvA.262); Pug.29, 57; Dhs.1343 (vācā)=niddosa DhsA.397. -- 2. (somewhat doubtful) “clean,” with ref. to big cats (mahā-biḷārā nelamaṇḍalaṁ vuccati), whereas young ones are called “elephants, cubs” (something like “pigs”) (taruṇā bhiṅka-cchāpamaṇḍalaṁ) J.V,418.

--aṅga of faultless limbs or parts, of a chariot (ratha) =running perfectly S.IV,291=Ud.76 (nelagga text, nelaṅga v. l.)=DA.I,75=DhsA.397. --patī (f.)=neḷavatī (of vācā) humane, gentle J.VI,558 (na elapatī elapāta-rahitā madhurā Com.). (Page 378)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nhāna: {'def': '﹐nahāna﹐【中】沐浴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nhāru: {'def': '﹐nhāru﹐【阳】腱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see nahāru. Found e. g. at Vin.I,25. (Page 378)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nhātaka: {'def': '﹐nahātaka﹐【阳】沐浴，沐浴者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nhāyati: {'def': '﹐nahāyati﹐沐浴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ni-: {'def': '﹐【字首】下。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'nir-﹐【字首】否，无，外。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibaddha: {'def': '【形】经常的，连续的，不变的。【过分】被强求。nibaddhaṁ,【副】总是。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [ni+baddha] bound down to, i. e. (1) fixed, stable, sure J.IV,134 (bhattavetana); Miln.398 (a°, unstable, °sayana). At DA.I,243 two kinds of cārikā (wanderings, pilgrimages) are distinguished, viz. nibaddha° definite, regular and anibaddha° indefinite, irregular pilgrimage. -- (2) asked, pressed, urged J.III,277. -- (3) nibaddhaṁ (nt. as adv.) constantly, always, continually J.I,100, 150; III,325; V,95, 459; VI,161; PvA.267 (°vasanaka); DhA.II,41, 52 sq. (Page 361)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】经常的，连续的，不变的。【过分】被强求。 ~aŋ, 【副】总是。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nibandha: {'def': '【阳】 Nibandhana, 【中】绑，系结，硬要。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】nibandhana,【中】绑，系结，硬要。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. nibandha, ni+bandha] binding, bond; attachment, continuance, continuity S.II,17; VvA.259, 260 (perseverance). Acc. nibandhaṁ (often misspelt for nibaddhaṁ) continually VvA.75. Cp. vi°. (Page 361)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibandhana: {'def': '(nt.) [ni+bandhana] tying, fastening; binding, bond; (adj.) tied to, fettered Sn.654 (kamma°); Miln.78, 80. (Page 361)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibandhati: {'def': '[ni+bandhati] 1. to bind Miln.79. -- 2. to mix, apply, prepare Vin.II,151 (anibandhanīya unable to be applied, not binding); J.I,201 (yāgubhattaṁ). ‹-› 3. to press, urge, importune J.III,277. (Page 361)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni + bandh + a), 绑，催促，强求。【过】 nibandhi。【过分】nibaddha。【独】 ~dhitvā。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ni+bandh绑+a), 绑，催促，强求。【过】nibandhi。【过分】nibaddha。【独】nibandhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbahati: {'def': '[nis+bahati] to stretch out J.III,185 (asiṁ); to pull out J.V,269 (jivhaṁ=jivhaṁ balisena n. 275). See also nibbāheti & nibbāhāpeti. (Page 362)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbajjeti: {'def': '[nis+vajjeti] to throw away, to do without, to avoid Th.1, 1105. (Page 362)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbana: {'def': 'nibbanatha, 【形】无渴望的。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) 1. [Sk. nirvana] without forest, woodless J.II,358. -- 2. [an abstr. fr. nibbāna, see nibbāna I.; cp. vana². Freq. nibbāna as v. l. instead of nibbana] without cravings Sn.1131 (nikkāmo nibbano); Dh.283 (nibbanā pl.) Vv 50¹⁴ (better reading nibbāna, in phrase “vanā nibbānaṁ āgataṁ,” as found at A.III,346= Th.1, 691, although the latter has nibbanaṁ in text), expl^d by “nittaṇhabhāvaṁ nibbānam eva upagataṁ” VvA.213. (Page 362)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】1.无森林的(Sk. nirvana；without forest, woodless)。2.无渴望的(an abstr. fr. nibbāna, see nibbāna I.; cp. vana2. freq. nibbāna as v. l. instead of nibbana；without cravings)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbanatha: {'def': '(adj.) [nis+vanatha] free from lust or cravings SI.180, 186 (so ‘haṁ vane nibbanatho visallo); Th.1, 526; Dh.344; Dāvs.I,18. (Page 362)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(nis+vanatha),【形】无渴望的(free from lust or cravings)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbasana: {'def': '(adj.) [nis+vasana] no longer worn, cast off (of cloth) S.II,202, 221. (Page 362)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】弃布（被丢弃的布料）。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nis+vasana),【中】弃布(被丢弃的布料)(no longer worn, cast off (of cloth))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbatta: {'def': '(nibbattati 的【过分】), 已再生，已兴起。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nibbattati 的【过分】), 已再生，已兴起。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pp.) [Sk. nirvṛtta, nis+vaṭṭa, pp. of nibbattati] existing, having existed, being reborn Vin.I,215 (n. bījaṁ phalaṁ fruit with seed); J.I,168; II,111; PvA.10 (niraye), 35 (petayoniyaṁ), 100 (pubbe n.-ṭhānato paṭṭhāya); Miln.268 (kamma°, hetu° & utu°).-Cp. abhi°. (Page 361)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbattaka: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. nibbatta] producing, yielding PvA.26 (phala °ṁ kusalakammaṁ), 126 (=sukha°=sukhāvaha). (Page 361)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'nibbattanaka, 【形】生产的，提出的。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'nibbattanaka,【形】生产的，出现的，提出的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbattana: {'def': '【中】 Nibbatti, 【阴】出生，再生，产品，出现。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. nibbattati] growing, coming forth; (re)birth, existence, life J.II,105; PvA.5 (devaloke n-araha deserving rebirth in the world of gods) 9, 67 etc. (Page 361)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】nibbatti,【阴】出生，再生，产品，出现。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbattanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. nibbattana] 1. arising, coming out, growing ThA.259 (akkhidalesu n. pīḷikā). -- 2. one destined to be reborn, a candidate of rebirth J.III,304 (sagge). (Page 361)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbattati: {'def': '(ni + vat + a), 出生，产生，出现。【过】 nibbatti。【过分】nibbatta。【现分】 ~tanta。【独】 ~titvā。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ni+vat+a), 出生，产生，出现。【过】nibbatti。【过分】nibbatta。【现分】nibbattanta。【独】nibbattitvā。【使】nibbattīyati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[nis+vattati] to come out from (cp. E. turn out), arise, become, be produced, result, come into being, be reborn, ex-ist (=nir-vatt) Dh.338; Pv.I,1¹ (nibbattate); ThA.259 (=jāyati); DhA.III,173; PvA.8 (=uppajjati) 71 (id.); ger. nibbattitvā J.II,158 (kapiyoniyaṁ); PvA.68, 78; aor. nibbatti J.I,221; PvA.14 (Avīcimhi), 67 (petesu), 73 (amaccakule). -- pp. nibbatta (q. v.). Caus. nibbatteti (q. v.). Cp. abhi°. (Page 361)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbatteti: {'def': '[nis+vatteti, Caus. of nibbattati] to produce, bring forth; practise, perform; to bring to light, find something lost (at Miln.218) Nd²=jāneti (s. v.); J.I,66, 140; III,396 (jhānâbhiññaṁ); PvA.76 (jhānāni), 30; Miln.200; Sdhp.470. -- pp. nibbattita (q. v.); 2nd Caus. nibbattāpeti to cause rebirth DhA.III,484; see also nibbattāpana. -- Cp. abhi°. (Page 361)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni + vat + e), 生产，提出。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~tita。【现分】~tenta。【潜】 ~tetabba。【独】 ~tetvā。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ni+vat+e﹐ caus. of nibbattati), 生产，提出(to produce, bring forth; practise, perform; to bring to light, find something lost)。【过】nibbattesi。【过分】nibbatttita。【现分】nibbattenta。【义】nibbattetabba。【独】nibbattetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbatti: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. nirvṛtti, nis+vatti] constitution, product; rebirth J.I,47; Nett 28, 79; Vism.199, 649; VvA.10. Cp. abhi°. (Page 361)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. nirvrtti, nis+vatti),【阴】(constitution, product; rebirth)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbattin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. nibbatti] arising, having rebirth, in neg. anibbattin not to be born again J.VI,573. (Page 361)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹nibbatti),【形】(arising, having rebirth, in neg. anibbattin not to be born again)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbattita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of nibbatteti] done, produced, brought forth PvA.150 (a°kusalakamma=akata). (Page 361)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pp. of nibbatteti,【形】done, produced, brought forth PvA 150 (a°kusalakamma=akata)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbattāpana: {'def': '【中】再现，繁殖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. nibbattāpeti, see nibbatteti] reproduction Miln.97. (Page 361)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】再现，繁殖。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nibbaṅka: {'def': '(adj.) [nis+vaṅka] not crooked, straight DhA.I,288. (Page 362)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbaṭṭa: {'def': '【形】无（种子）的。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'nibbatta(梵nirvrtta, nis+vaṭṭa, nibbattati的【过分】) 【形】已生存(existing)，已再生( having existed, being reborn)。nibbattanibbattaṭṭhāne, 无论投生到何处。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbaṭṭeti: {'def': '(ni + vaṭ + e), 除去。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~ṭita。【独】 ~ṭetvā。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ni+vaṭṭ+e), 除去。【过】nibbṭṭesi。【过分】nibbaṭṭita。【独】nibbṭṭetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbecikicchā: {'def': '=nibbicikicchā certainty, doubtlessness Nd² 185 (opp. savicikicchā). (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbedha: {'def': '[nis+vedha, to vyadh] penetration, insight; adj.: penetrating, piercing, scrutinising, sharp. Freq. in phrase nibbedha-bhāgiya (sharing the quality of penetration), with ref. to samādhi, saññā etc. [cp. BSk. nirvedha° Divy 50; but also nirbheda° AvŚ II.181, of kusalamūlāni; expl^d as lobhakkhandhassa (etc.) nibbijjhanāni at Nett 274] D.III,251, 277; A.III,427; Vbh.330; Nett 21, 48, 143 sq., 153 sq.; Vism.15, 88; DhsA.162. -- Also in nibbedha-gāminī (paññā) It.35; & dunnibbedha (hard to penetrate, difficult to solve Miln.155, 233 (pañha); spelt dunniveṭha at Miln.90). (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】渗透，刺穿。(p177)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹ni+vyadh),【阳】渗透，刺穿，决择(penetration, insight; adj.: penetrating, piercing, scrutinising, sharp)。nibbedhabhāgiya,%9决择分。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbedhaka: {'def': '(adj.) [nis+vedhaka, to vyadh] piercing, sharp, penetrating, discriminating; only in f. nibbedhikā (cp. āvedhikā), appl^d to paññā (wisdom) D.III,237, 268; S.V,197, 199; M.I,356; A.I,45; II,167; III,152; 410 sq., 416; V,15; Ps.II,201; Nd² 235, 3^a (+tikkha-paññā), 415, 689; J.II,9, 297; IV,267. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbedhika: {'def': '【形】决择的，抉择的。nibbedhikā,【阴】决择的。nibbedhikapaññā决择慧。nibbedhikapariyāya(=nibbijjhanakāraṇa(洞察原因)(AA.))﹐抉择的法门。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbejaniya: {'def': 'at S.I,124 should probably be read as nibbeṭhaniya (rejecting, evading). (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbematika: {'def': '(adj.) [nis+vimati+ka] not disagreeing, of one accord, unanimous Vin.II,65; DhA.I,34. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】一致的，无异议的。(p177)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nis+vimati+ka),【形】一致的，无异议的(not disagreeing, of one accord, unanimous)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbeṭhana: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. nirveṣṭana, nis+veṭhana] unwinding, fig. explanation Miln.28. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. nirvesṭana, nis+veṭhana),【中】放松，解释(unwinding, fig. explanation)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】放松，解释。(p177)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nibbeṭheti: {'def': '[Sk. nirveṣṭate, nis+veṭheti, to twist round] 1. to unravel, untwist, unwind; to explain, make clear D.I,54 (nibbeṭhiyamāna, v. l. BB nibbedh°); Pv IV.3²⁹ (°ento=niveṭhīyamāna PvA.253 v. l. BB nibbedh°); Miln.3; Sdhp.153. -- 2. to deny, reject Vin.II,79; D.I,3 (=apanetabba Com.); S.III,12 (v. l. BB °dh°). ‹-› 3. to give an evasive answer Vin.III,162. -- See also nibbejaniya. -- pp. nibbeṭhita, q. v. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni + veṭh + e), 解开，拆开（搓合的绳，线等），阐明。【过】~esi。【过分】 ṭhita。【独】 ~ṭhetvā。(p177)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ni+veṭh+e)(Sk. nirvesṭate, nis+veṭheti, to twist round), 解开，拆开(搓合的绳，线等)，阐明(to unravel, untwist, unwind; to explain, make clear)。【过】nibbeṭhesi。【过分】nibbeṭhita。【独】nibbeṭhetvā。S.22.3./III,12.︰“Niggahitosi; nibbeṭhehi vā sace pahosī’ti.”(汝已堕负处，若能者答辩。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbeṭhita: {'def': '[pp. of nibbeṭheti] explained, unravelled, made clear Miln.123 (su°). (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbhacceti: {'def': '[Sk. nirbhartsayati, nis+bhaccheti] to threaten, revile, scorn J.III,338. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbhaya: {'def': '(adj.) [nis+bhaya] free from fear or danger, fearless, unafraid J.I,274; III,80; V,287; Vism.512. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】大胆的，勇敢的。(p177)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nis+bhaya),【形】大胆的，勇敢的(free from fear or danger, fearless, unafraid )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbhoga: {'def': '(Sk. nirbhoga, nis+bhoga1),【形】无用的，废弃的(deprived of enjoyment; deserted, being of no avail, useless)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[ni+bhoga²] bending, contortion J.II,264 (oṭṭha°). (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. nirbhoga, nis+bhoga¹] deprived of enjoyment; deserted, being of no avail, useless J.VI,556; Pv.I,12. Cp. vi°. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】无用的，废弃的，(p177)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nibbhujati: {'def': '[Sk. ni- or nirbhujati, nis+bhujati] to twist round, bend, wind, contort oneself Miln.253. Cp. vi°. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbicikiccha: {'def': '【形】无疑的，确信的，信任的。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】无疑的，确信的，信任的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbicikicchā: {'def': '(f.) [nis+vicikicchā] surety, reliance, trust S.II,84; V,221 (=nikkaṅkhā); VvA.85 (=ekaṁsikā). (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbiddha: {'def': '[pp. of nibbijjhati] 1. in phrase °piṅgala (with) disgustingly red (eyes) (perhaps=nibbiṇṇa?) J.V,42 (of a giant). -- 2. with ref. to a road: broken up, i. e. much frequented, busy street J.VI,276 (of vīthi, bazaar, in contrast with a-nibbiddha-raccha carriage-road, which is not a thoroughfare. The reading patatthiyo at J.VI,276, for which nibbiddha-vīthiyo is the C. explⁿ is to be corrected into pathaddhiyo). (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbidā: {'def': '(Sk. nirvid, & nirveda),【阴】厌恶，疲倦(weariness, disgust with worldly life, tedium, aversion, indifference, disenchantment.)。“Nibbidāti sikhāpattā vuṭṭhānagāminibalavavipassanā. Virāgoti ariyamaggo. Vimuttīti arahattaphalaṁ. Catubbidhopi hi ariyamaggo arahattaphalassa upanissayapaccayo hoti. Vimuttiñāṇadassananti paccavekkhaṇāñāṇaṁ.” (厌：已达到顶峰(sikhā)，具有有力的毘钵舍那出起(vuṭṭhānagāmi)。离欲：圣道。解脱：阿罗汉果，及四种圣道--阿罗汉果的亲依止缘。解脱智见：省察智。)(Vin.Parivāra-aṭṭhakathā《附随注释》CD.pg.5.208) 《中部古疏》说：saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaṃ sikhāppatta- vipassanā. Keci pana-- “bhaṅgañāṇato paṭṭhāya sikhāpattavipassanā”ti vadanti.(‘行舍智’是‘至顶观’。但是，有些人说，从‘坏灭智’以后的观智是‘至顶观’)(Ps-pṭ I,159)。SA.12.23.：“Virāgoti maggo. So hi kilese virājento khepento uppanno, tasmā virāgoti vuccati. Nibbidāti nibbidāñāṇaṁ. Etena balavavipassanaṁ dasseti. Balavavipassanāti bhayatūpaṭṭhāne ñāṇaṁ ādīnavānupassane ñāṇaṁ muñcitukamyatāñāṇaṁ saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇanti catunnaṁ ñāṇānaṁ adhivacanaṁ.”(离欲：圣道。他生起弃除、耗费烦恼，於此称为‘离欲’。厌：厌智，它指示那有力的毘钵舍那。有力的毘钵舍那：怖畏现起智，过患随观智，欲解脱智，行舍智，四种智的同义词。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】厌恶，疲倦。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. nirvid, f. (also BSk. e. g. Lal. V, 300) & nirveda; to nibbindati] weariness, disgust with worldly life, tedium, aversion, indifference, disenchantment. N. is of the preliminary & conditional states for the attainment of Nibbāna (see nibbāna II B 1) & occurs frequently together with virāga, vimutti & nibbāna in the formula: etaṁ ekanta-nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya . . . sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati “this leads to being thoroughly tired (of the world), to dispassionateness, to destruction (of egoism), to perfect wisdom, to Nibbāna,” e. g. at D.I,189; S.V,82, 179, 255, 361; A.III,83; IV,143; V,216. -- In other connections: Vin.I,15 (nibbidāya cittaṁ saṇṭhāsi); D.III,130 sq.; S.II,30; III,40; 179, 189; IV,86, 141 (read nibbidāya for nibbindāya?); A.I,51, 64; III,19, 200, 325 sq.; IV,99, 336; V,2 sq., 311 sq.; J.I,97; IV,471, 473; Sn.340; Ps.I,195; II,43 sq.; Vbh.330; Nett 27, 29; Vism.650. Cp. abhi°. (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbijja: {'def': '(Nibbijjati的【独】) 被使气馁，被令人厌恶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbijjati: {'def': '(ni + vij + ya), 被使气馁，被令人厌恶。【过】 ~jji。【过分】nibbinna。【独】 nibbijjitvā。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ni+vij发抖+ya), 被使气馁，被令人厌恶。【过】nibbijji。【过分】nibbinna。【独】nibbijjitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbijjhati: {'def': '[nis+vijjhati, vyadh] to pierce, transfix, wound S.V,88 (+padāleti); Sdhp.153 (patodehi). ger. nibbijjha Sn.940 (=paṭivijjhitvā Nd¹ 420). -- pp. nibbiddha. Cp. abhi°. (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni + vidh + ya), 刺穿，突破。【过】 ~jhi。【过分】 nibbiddha。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ni+vidh(梵vyadh / vidh)贯穿+ya), 刺穿，突破。【过】nibbijjhi。【过分】nibbiddha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbikappa: {'def': '[nis+vikappa] distinction, distinguishing Vism.193. (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbikāra: {'def': '【形】不变更的，坚定的。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [nis+vikāra] steady, unchanged, steadfast; persevering J.I,66; PvA.178, 253 (+nicca); SnA 189, 497; Vism.311. (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不变更的，坚定的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbindati: {'def': '[nis+vindati, vid²] to get wearied of (c. Loc.); to have enough of, be satiated, turn away from, to be disgusted with. In two roots A. vind: prs. nibbindati etc. usually in combⁿ with virajjati & vimuccati (cp. nibbāna III, 2). Vin.I,35; S.II,94; IV,86, 140; A.V,3; Dh.277 sq.; It.33; J.I,267; Miln.235, 244; Sdhp.612. ppr. nibbindaṁ S.IV,86; PvA.36 (nibbinda-mānasa); ger. nibbindiya J.V,121 (°kārin). -- B. vid: Pot. nibbide (v. l. BB nibbije) J.V,368 (=nibbindeyya Com.); ger. nibbijjitvā J.I,82, & nibbijja Sn.448=S.I,124 (nibbijjâpema=nibbijja pakkameyya SnA 393). -- pp. nibbiṇṇa. See also nibbidā. (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni+vid2知道+ṁ-a)(nis+vindati), 厌倦，讨厌(to get wearied of)。【过】nibbindi。【过分】nibbinna。【独】nibbindetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ni + vid + ŋ-a), 厌倦，讨厌。【过】 ~ndi。【过分】 nibbinna。【独】 ~detvā。(p177)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nibbiriya: {'def': '(adj.) [nis+viriya] lacking in strength, indolent, slothful, weak J.IV,131; PvA.175 (=alasa, kusīta). (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbisa: {'def': '【中】工资(earnings, wages)。【形】无毒的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】工资。【形】无毒的。(p177)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[to nibbisati] earnings, wages Th.1, 606=1003= Miln.45 (cp. Manu VI,45); SnA 38. (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbisati: {'def': '[nis+visati] to enter into; to earn, gain, find, enjoy, only in pp. anibbisaṁ not finding Th.2, 159 (=avindanto ThA.142); J.I,76=Dh.153. -- pp. nibbiṭṭha. See also nibbisa. (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni+ vis (梵viw), 进入)+a)(nis+visati) , 追求(to enter into; to earn, gain, find, enjoy)。【过】nibbisi。【现分】nibbisanta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ni + vis + a), 追求。【过】 nibbisi。【现分】 ~santa。(p177)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nibbisaya: {'def': '(adj.) [nis+visaya] having no residence, banished, driven from (-°) J.II,401. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbisaṅka: {'def': '(adj.) [nis+visaṅka, Sk. viśaṅkā] fearless, not hesitating, undaunted SnA 61. (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbisesa: {'def': '(adj.) [nis+visesa] showing no difference, without distinction, equal, similar J.II,32; VI,355; Miln.249. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(nis+visesa),【形】相似的，没差别的(showing no difference, without distinction, equal, similar )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】相似的，没差别的。(p177)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nibbisevana: {'def': '(adj.) [nis+visevana] not self-indulgent, selfdenying, meek, tame, gentle J.II,210 (dametvā nibbisevanaṁ katvā), 351; V,34, 381, 456; VI,255; DhA.I,288 (cittaṁ ujuṁ akuṭilaṁ n. karoti), 295; VvA.284 (°bhava =jitindriya). (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbivara: {'def': '(adj.) [nis+vivara] without holes or fissures, without omissions J.V,429; VvA.275 (=atīva saṅgata). (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbiṇṇa: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. nirviṇṇa, pp. of nibbindati] tired of, disgusted with (c. Instr. or Loc.), wearied of, dissatisfied with, “fed up” J.I,347; VI,62; Th.2, 478 (=viratta ThA.286); DhA.I,85 (°hadaya); VvA.207 (°rūpa); PvA.159 (tattha-vāsena n-mānaso tired of living there), 272 (°rūpa), 283 (°rūpa, tired of: purohite). (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbiṭṭha: {'def': '(pp.) [nis+viṭṭha, of nibbisati] gained, earned Vin.IV,265; Sn.25; SnA 38. (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbuddha: {'def': '[Sk. niyuddha, pp. of nibbujjhati] wrestling, fist-fight D.I,6 (=mallayuddhaṁ DA.I,85); DhsA.403. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbujjhati: {'def': '[ni+yujjhati, yudh. Pāli form difficult to explain: niy°=niyy°=nivv°=nibb°] to wrestle, to fight with fists Vin.III,180. -- pp. nibbuddha. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbusitattā: {'def': '(nibbusitattan?) [Sk. *nir-vasit-ātman or *nirvasitatvaṁ (nt. abstr.), to nis-vasati, cp. nirvāsana =nibbisaya] a dislocated or disconcerted mind, unrest, uneasiness D.I,17. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbuta: {'def': '(adj.) [Nibbuta represents Sk. nirvṛta (e. g. AvŚ I.48) as well as nivṛta, both pp. of vṛ, which in itself combines two meanings, as exhibited in cognate languages and in Sk. itself: (a) Idg. ǔer to cover, cover up (Lat. aperio=*apa-verịo to cover up, Sk. varutram upper garment, “cover”) and (b) *ǔel to resolve, roll, move (Lat. volvo=revolve; Gr. e(λic, e)lu/w; Sk. vāṇa reed=Lat. ulva; Sk. ūrmi wave; P. valli creeper, valita wrinkled). *ǔer is represented in P. by e. g. vivarati to open, nivāreti to cover, obstruct, nīvaraṇa, nivāraṇa obstruction; *ǔel by āvuta, khandh-āvāra, parivāra, vyāvaṭa (busy with=moving about), samparivāreti. Thus we gain the two meanings comb^d and used promiscuously in the one word because of their semantic affinity: (a) *nivṛta covered up, extinguished, quenched, and (b) *nirvṛta without movement, with motion finished (cp. niṭṭhita), ceasing, exhaustion, both represented by P. nibbuta. -- In derivations we have besides the rootform vṛ (=P. bbu°) that with guṇa vṝ (cp. Sk. vārayati, vrāyati) or vrā=P.* bbā° (with which also cp. paṭivāṇa=*prativāraṇa). The former is in nibbuti (ceasing, extinction, with meaning partly influenced by nibbuṭṭhi=Sk. nirvṛṣṭi pouring of water), the latter in Instr. nibbāti and nibbāyati (to cease or to go out) and trs. nibbāpeti (Caus.: to make cease, to stop or cool) and further in nibbāna (nt. Instr. abstr.) (the dying out)] (lit.) extinguished (of fire), cooled, quenched (fig.) desireless (often with nicchāta & sītibhūta), appeased, pleased, happy. -- (a) (lit.) aggi anāhāro n. M.I,487; Sn.19 (ginī n.=magga-salila-sekena n. SnA 28); J.IV,391 (anibbute pāyāse); Miln.304 (aggikkhandha), 346 (mahāmeghena n°ṁ pathaviṁ); ThA.154 (anupādānā dīp’accī); KhA 194 (padīpo n.). -- (b) (fig.) comb^d with sītibhūta (& nicchāta): Vin.I,8; M.I,341; A.II,208 =D.III,233=Pug.56, 61; A.IV,410; V,65; Sn.593, 707; Pv.I,8⁷. -- In phrase anupādāya nibbuta: S.II,279; A.I,162; IV,290=Dh.414=Sn.638. -- In other connections: attadaṇḍesu n. sādānesu anādāno S.I,236= Dh.406=Sn.630; aññāya nibbutā dhīrā S.I,24; tadaṅgan. S.III,43; ejânugo anejassa nibbutassa anibbuto It.91; vītataṇho n. Sn.1041; tiṇṇa-sokapariddavo n. Dh.196; rāg’aggimhi n. & n. mātā, pitā, nārī J.I,60; n. veyyākaraṇena Miln.347; upādānānaṁ abhāvena . . . kilesanibbānena n. DhA.IV,194. -- See also abhinibbuta and parinibbuta. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbuti: {'def': '(Sk. nirvrta﹐nivrta, both pp. of vr),【阴】和平，快乐，(痛苦、烦恼、情绪激动等)减轻，涅盘。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. nirvṛti, abstr. to nibbuta] allayment, refreshment, cooling, peace, happiness J.I,3 (khemaṁ pariyessāmi n°ṁ); Sn.228 (nikkāmino n°ṁ bhuñjamānā), 917, 933 (santī ti n°ṁ ñatvā); Nd¹ 399; Pv.I,7⁴ (n°ṁ n’âdhigacchāmi=quenching of hunger & thirst); KhA 185 (=paṭippassaddha-kilesa-daratha). (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】和平，快乐，（痛苦、烦恼、情绪激动等）减轻，涅槃。(p177)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nibbuyhati: {'def': '[Sk. niruhyate, nis+vuyhati, Pass. of vahati, cp. nibbāhati] to be led out to (c. Acc.): susānaṁ Th.2, 468 (=upanīyati ThA.284); to be led out of=to be saved S.I,1, cp. RV I.117, 14; VI,62, 6. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni + vah + ya), 飘浮，浮上。(p177)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ni+vah +ya)( Sk. niruhyate, nis+vuyhati, pass. of vahati, cp. nibbāhati),被引开，被解救(to be led out to, to be saved)。SA.1.1./I,18.：Nibbuyhāmīti ṭhātuṁ asakkonto ativattāmi.(我被救：我超越，站著，不生起。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbāhana: {'def': '【中】移掉，清除。【形】导出的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】移掉，清除。【形】导出的。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. nibbāheti] leading out, removing, saving; (nt.) removal, clearance, refuge, way out Miln.119, 198, 295, 309, 326 (°magga). [Miln. the only references!] (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbāhati: {'def': '[nis+vahati] to lead out, carry out, save from, remove Miln.188. -- 2nd Caus. nibbāhāpeti to have brought out, to unload (a waggon) Vin.II,159 (hiraññaṁ); III,43. See also nibbāhana & nibbuyhati. (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbāna: {'def': '(‹nibbāti被吹灭、被熄灭；巴利文字根来自vr (盖to cover), 不是vā (吹to blow))(cp. BSk. nirvāṇa)【中】1.冷却(the going out of a lamp or fire)，2.健康(health, the sense of bodily well-being)，3.熄灭(The dying out in the heart of the threefold fire of rāga, dosa & moha: lust, ill-will & stupidity)，4.涅盘(the sense of spiritual well-being, of security, emancipation, victory and peace, salvation, bliss.)。nibbānagamana,【形】导致涅盘的。nibbānadhātu,【阴】涅盘的领域。nibbānapatti,【阴】证得涅盘。nibbānasacchikiriyā,【阴】作证涅盘。nibbānasampatti,【阴】涅盘的福佑。nibbānabhirata,【形】乐於涅盘的，喜欢涅盘的。 nibbānārammaṇa﹐以涅盘为所缘。 S.38.1./IV,251.︰“Yo kho, āvuso, rāgakkhayo dosakkhayo mohakkhayo--idaṁ vuccati nibbānan”ti.(友！若染尽，瞋尽，痴尽，这称为涅盘。)「染尽」即(贪)染被灭尽，而涅盘到来(nibbānaṁ āgamma rāgo khīyati)之意。瞋尽，痴尽是同理。M.I,487：aggi anāhāro nibbuto(无燃料而火灭a fire gone out through lack of fuel)。pajjotass’eva nibbānaṁ﹐如灯灭(like the going out of a lamp S.I,159)。Vibhv.PTS:p.59.︰Upādānakkhandhasaṅkhātalokato uttarati anāsavabhāvenāti lokuttaraṁ, maggacittaṁ. Phalacittaṁ pana tato uttiṇṇanti lokuttaraṁ. Ubhayampi vā saha nibbānena lokato uttaraṁ adhikaṁ yathāvuttaguṇavasenevāti lokuttaraṁ.(渡过取蕴的世间，成为无漏的状态，为‘出世间道心’。然而，从此越过，为‘出世间果心’。两者同样是从世间(渡过)而得涅盘，正如说处於无上的、优胜的功德，为‘出世间’。」)涅盘的同义词有︰1无为法(asaṅkhata)、2尽头(anta=anata渴求尽头的消失)、3无漏(anāsava﹐无流向﹐四流向的消失)、4真谛(sacca=paramatthasacca胜义谛)、5彼岸(pāra﹐vaṭṭassa parabhāga回转的另一部分﹐or vaṭṭadukkhato pārametīti从苦回转至另一边)、6微妙(nipuṇa=saṇha细致的)、7难见(sududdasa﹐suṭṭhu duddasatā非常难见的)、8不老(ajajjara﹐jarāya a-jaritatta从老而不老性or niccasabhāvattā恒常之状态)、9坚牢(dhuva=thira牢固的)、10不崩溃(a-palokita=a-palujjana)、11不可见(anidassana﹐cakkhuviññāṇena a-passitabbattā不适合以眼识看到)、12无戏论(nippapa﹐taṇhā-māna-diṭṭhi-papañcānaṁ abhāvena渴爱、慢、邪见诸戏论消失)、13寂静(santa=santabhāva寂静之状)、14无死(amata=maraṇābhāva死亡的不存在)、15极妙(panīta=uttama最好的、优良的)、16吉祥(siva=sassirika光荣的、灿烂的)、17安稳(khema=nirupaddava安心的、无不幸之事的)、18爱尽(taṇhākkhayo=taṇhākkhayassa paccayattā爱尽之因缘性)、19不思议(acchariya=vimhāpanīyaṭṭhena accharaṁ paharitabbayuttakanti以令人惊讶之义，带著适当的不思议)、20稀有(abbhuta=abhūtameva bhūtaṁ ajātaṁ hutvā atthīti vā.有了未生，不真的消失、或真的被发现)、21无灾(anītika=niddukkhattā无苦性，= ītirahita无灾)、22无灾法(anītikadhamma=niddukkhasabhāvattā无苦的自性)、23涅盘(nibbāna=vānābhāva渴望之消失)、24无瞋(avyāpajjha=byābajjhābhāva瞋(=拂逆)之消失)、25离染(virāga﹐virāgādhigamassa paccayato获得离染的因缘)、26清净(suddhi﹐paramatthasuddhita胜义谛清净)、27解脱(mutti﹐tīhi bhavehi muttatāya解脱三有)、28无执著(anālayo﹐kāmālayānaṁ abhāvena欲的执著的消失)、29洲岛(dīpa=patiṭṭha依止处)、30窟宅(leṇa=allīyitabbayutta应与执著连接)、31庇护所(tāṇa=tāyana保护所)、32归依(saraṇa=bhayasaraṇa恐惧的归依)、33归宿(parāyaṇa﹐parā向其他+√i 去﹐paraṁ ayanaṁ gati patiṭṭhāti死者他方道路依止)。(《相应部》S.43.13.~44./IV,368.~373.；SA.43.12-33./III,111~112；Sṭ.CS:p.2.387~8)。《导论》记载涅盘的异名51个，其中1~23个与S.43.13.-44./IV,368.~373.相同，其余的： 34不生(ajāta=anibbatti-sabhāvattā不出生的自性)、35未曾有(abbhūta从(不生)那里正是未曾有。以上两者皆无出生)、无危难(anupaddava=anupaddutattā无骚扰性)、无作(akata﹐na kenaci paccayena katanti不以某因缘作)、无忧(asoka=natthi ettha sokoti这里没有忧愁)、离忧(nisoka﹐sokahetuvigamena以离开忧愁之因)、无祸患(an-upasagga﹐kenaci anupasajjitabbattā以无某事先准备)、无祸患法(anupasagga-dhamma﹐anupasaggabhāvahetuto从无祸患之因)、甚深(gambhīra﹐gambhīrañāṇagocarato从甚深智行境。《瑜伽师地论》卷第八十七(T30.793.1)：涅盘极难知故，最微细故，说名甚深。)、难见(duppassa﹐sammāpaṭipattiṁ vinā passituṁ pattuṁ asakkuṇeyyattā无正行、无获得看的可能性)、上(uttara﹐sabbalokaṁ uttaritvā ṭhitanti住立在克服一切世间)、无上(anuttara﹐natthi etassa uttaranti没有这些「上」的)、无等(asama﹐samassa sadisassa abhāvena相等的、相似的消失)、无比(appaṭisama﹐paṭibhāgābhāvena相似的消失)、最胜(jeṭṭha﹐uttamaṭṭhena以最高之义)、殊胜(seṭṭha﹐pāsaṁsatamattā vā或最高的称赞)、窟宅(leṇa﹐saṁsāra-dukkha-ṭṭitehi letabbato住立在拿掉轮回苦之处)、庇护所(tāṇa﹐tato rakkhaṇato从保护)、无诤(araṇa﹐raṇābhāvena以过失的消失)、无秽的(anaṅgana﹐aṅgaṇābhāvena以污秽的消失)、无污的(akāca﹐niddosatāya无污性)、离垢(vimala﹐rāgādimalāpagamena以染等垢离去)、岛屿(dīpa﹐catūhi oghehi anajjhottharaṇīyato无应该被四瀑流淹没)、乐(sukha﹐saṁsāravūpasamasukhatāya轮回寂止乐)、无可度量(appamāṇa﹐pamāṇakaradhammābhāvato作度量法的消失﹐gaṇetuṁ etassa na sakkāti ca不能计算这些。涅盘极难知故，最微细故，说名甚深。种种非一诸行烦恼断所显故，说名广大。《瑜伽师地论》卷第八十七(T30.793.1)：现量、比量及正教量所不量故，说名无量。)、依止(patiṭṭha﹐saṁsārasamudde anosīdanaṭṭhānatāya不沉没轮回海)、无所有的(akiñcana﹐rāgādikiñcanābhāvena pariggahābhāvena ca染等世间的执著的消失和摄受的消失)、无戏论(appapañca)。(Nettipakaraṇa CS:p.48；Nettippakaraṇa-aṭṭhakathā pg.120)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(Sanskrit nirvāna): lit. \'extinction\' (nir + √vā, to cease blowing, to become extinguished); according to the commentaries, \'freedom from desire\' (nir + vana). Nibbāna constitutes the highest and ultimate goal of all Buddhist aspirations, i.e. absolute extinction of that life-affirming will manifested as greed, hate and delusion, and convulsively clinging to existence; and therewith also the ultimate and absolute deliverance from all future rebirth, old age, disease and death, from all suffering and misery. Cf. Parinibbāna.

"Extinction of greed, extinction of hate, extinction of delusion: this is called Nibbāna" (S. XXXVIII. 1).

The 2 aspects of Nibbāna are:

(1) The full extinction of defilements (kilesa-parinibbāna), also called sa-upādi-sesa-nibbāna (s. It. 41), i.e. \'Nibbāna with the groups of existence still remaining\' (s. upādi). This takes place at the attainment of Arahatship, or perfect holiness (s. ariya-puggala).

(2) The full extinction of the groups of existence (khandha-parinibbāna), also called an-upādi-sesa-nibbāna (s. It. 41, A. IV, 118), i.e. \'Nibbāna without the groups remaining\', in other words, the coming to rest, or rather the \'no-more-continuing\' of this physico-mental process of existence. This takes place at the death of the Arahat. - (App.: Nibbāna).

Sometimes both aspects take place at one and the same moment, i.e. at the death of the Arahat; s. sama-sīsī.

"This, o monks, truly is the peace, this is the highest, namely the end of all formations, the forsaking of every substratum of rebirth, the fading away of craving, detachment, extinction, Nibbāna" (A. III, 32).

"Enraptured with lust (rāga), enraged with anger (dosa), blinded by delusion (moha), overwhelmed, with mind ensnared, man aims at his own ruin, at the ruin of others, at the ruin of both, and he experiences mental pain and grief. But if lust, anger and delusion are given up, man aims neither at his own ruin, nor at the ruin of others, nor at the ruin of both, and he experiences no mental pain and grief. Thus is Nibbāna visible in this life, immediate, inviting, attractive, and comprehensible to the wise" (A. III, 55).

"Just as a rock of one solid mass remains unshaken by the wind, even so neither visible forms, nor sounds, nor odours, nor tastes, nor bodily impressions, neither the desired nor the undesired, can cause such a one to waver. Steadfast is his mind, gained is deliverance" (A, VI, 55).

"Verily, there is an Unborn, Unoriginated, Uncreated, Unformed. If there were not this Unborn, Unoriginated, Uncreated, Unformed, escape from the world of the born, the originated, the created, the formed, would not be possible" (Ud. VIII, 3).

One cannot too often and too emphatically stress the fact that not only for the actual realization of the goal of Nibbāna, but also for a theoretical understanding of it, it is an indispensable preliminary condition to grasp fully the truth of anattā(q.v.), the egolessness and insubstantiality of all forms of existence. Without such an understanding, one will necessarily misconceive Nibbāna - according to one\'s either materialistic or metaphysical leanings - either as annihilation of an ego, or as an eternal state of existence into which an ego or self enters or with which it merges. Hence it is said:

"Mere suffering exists, no sufferer is found;

The deed is, but no doer of the deed is there;

Nibbāna is, but not the man that enters it;

The path is, but no traveler on it is seen."

(Vis.M. XVI)

Literature: For texts on Nibbāna, see Path, 36ff. - See Vis.M. XVI. 64ff. - Anattā and Nibbāna, by Nyanaponika Thera (WHEEL 11); The Buddhist Doctrine of Nibbāna, by Ven. P. Vajiranana & F. Story (WHEEL 165/166).

', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}; {'def': '【中】冷却，熄灭，释放，涅槃。 ~gamana, 【形】导致涅槃的。~dhātu, 【阴】涅槃的领域。 ~patti, 【阴】证得涅槃。 ~sacchikiriyā, 【阴】领悟涅槃。 ~sampatti, 【阴】涅槃的福佑。 ~abhirata, 【形】乐于涅槃的，喜欢涅槃的。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Skt. Nirvāṇa)涅盘', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '涅盘，一切苦(诸行)的止息。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '(nt.). -- I. Etymology. Although nir+vā “to blow”. (cp. BSk. nirvāṇa) is already in use in the Vedic period (see nibbāpeti), we do not find its distinctive application till later and more commonly in popular use, where vā is fused with vṛ in this sense, viz. in application to the extinguishing of fire, which is the prevailing Buddhist conception of the term. Only in the older texts do we find references to a simile of the wind and the flame; but by far the most common metaphor and that which governs the whole idea of nibbāna finds expression in the putting out of fire by other means of extinction than by blowing, which latter process rather tends to incite the fire than to extinguish it. The going out of the fire may be due to covering it up, or to depriving it of further fuel, by not feeding it, or by withdrawing the cause of its production. Thus to the Pali etymologist the main reference is to the root vṛ (to cover), and not to vā (to blow). This is still more clearly evident in the case of nibbuta (q. v. for further discussion). In verbal compn. nis+vā (see vāyati) refers only to the (non-) emittance of an odour, which could never be used for a meaning of “being exhausted”; moreover, one has to bear in mind that native commentators themselves never thought of explaining nibbāna by anything like blowing (vāta), but always by nis+vana (see nibbana). For Bdhgh’s defⁿ of nibbāna see e. g. Vism.293. -- The meanings of n. are: 1. the going out of a lamp or fire (popular meaning). -- 2. health, the sense of bodily well-being (probably, at first, the passing away of feverishness, restlessness). -- 3. The dying out in the heart of the threefold fire of rāga, dosa & moha: lust, ill-will & stupidity (Buddhistic meaning). ‹-› 4. the sense of spiritual well-being, of security, emancipation, victory and peace, salvation, bliss.

II. Import and Range of the Term. A. Nibbāna is purely and solely an ethical state, to be reached in this birth by ethical practices, contemplation and insight. It is therefore not transcendental. The first and most important way to reach N. is by means of the eightfold Path, and all expressions which deal with the realisation of emancipation from lust, hatred and illusion apply to practical habits and not to speculative thought. N. is realised in one’s heart; to measure it with a speculative measure is to apply a wrong standard. -- A very apt and comprehensive discussion of nibbāna is found in F. Heiler, “Die buddhistische Versenkung” (München² 1922), pp. 36--42, where also the main literature on the subject is given. -- N. is the untranslatable expression of the Unspeakable, of that for which in the Buddha’s own saying there is no word, which cannot be grasped in terms of reasoning and cool logic, the Nameless, Undefinable (cp. the simile of extinction of the flame which may be said to pass from a visible state into a state which cannot be defined. Thus the Saint (Arahant) passes into that same state, for which there is “no measure” (i. e. no dimension): “atthaṅgatassa na pamāṇam atthi . . . yena naṁ vajju: taṁ tassa n’atthi” Sn.1076. The simile in v. 1074: “accī yathā vāta-vegena khitto atthaṁ paleti, na upeti saṅkhaṁ: evaṁ munī nāmakāyā vimutto atthaṁ paleti, na upeti saṅkhaṁ”). Yet, it is a reality, and its characteristic features may be described, may be grasped in terms of earthly language, in terms of space (as this is the only means at our disposal to describe abstract notions of time and mentality); e. g. accutaṁ ṭhānaṁ, pāraṁ, amataṁ padaṁ, amata (& nibbāna-) dhātu. -- It is the speculative, scholastic view and the dogmatising trend of later times, beginning with the Abhidhamma period, which has more and more developed the simple, spontaneous idea into an exaggerated form either to the positive (i. e. seeing in N. a definite state or sphere of existence) or the negative side (i. e. seeing in it a condition of utter annihilation). Yet its sentimental value to the (exuberant optimism of the) early Buddhists (Rh. Davids, Early Buddhism, p. 73) is one of peace and rest, perfect passionlessness, and thus supreme happiness. As Heiler in the words of R. Otto (Das Heilige etc. 1917; quoted l. c. p. 41) describes it, “only by its concept Nirvāna is something negative, by its sentiment, however, a positive item in most pronounced form.” -- We may also quote Rh. Davids’words: “One might fill columns with the praises, many of them among the most beautiful passages in Pāli poetry and prose, lavished on this condition of mind, the state of the man made perfect according to the B. faith. Many are the pet names, the poetic epithets, bestowed upon it, each of them-for they are not synonyms-emphasising one or other phase of this many-sided conception-the harbour of refuge, the cool cave, the island amidst the floods, the place of bliss, emancipation, liberation, safety, the supreme, the transcendental, the uncreated, the tranquil, the home of ease, the calm, the end of suffering, the medicine for all evil, the unshaken, the ambrosia, the immaterial, the imperishable, the abiding, the further shore, the unending, the bliss of effort, the supreme joy, the ineffable, the detachment, the holy city, and many others. Perhaps the most frequent in the B. texts is Arahantship, “the state of him who is worthy” ; and the one exclusively used in Europe is Nirvana, the “dying out,” that is, the dying out in the heart of the fell fire of the three cardinal sins-sensuality, ill-will, and stupidity (Saṁyutta IV.251, 261),” (Early Buddhism pp. 72, 73.) And Heiler says (p. 42 l. c.): “Nirvāna is, although it might sound a paradox, in spite of all conceptional negativity nothing but “eternal salvation,” after which the heart of the religious yearns on the whole earth.”

The current simile is that of fire, the consuming fire of passion (rāg-aggi), of craving for rebirth, which has to be extinguished, if a man is to attain a condition of indifference towards everything worldly, and which in the end, in its own good time, may lead to freedom from rebirth altogether, to certain and final extinction (parinibbāna). -- Fire may be put out by water, or may go out of itself from lack of fuel. The ethical state called Nibbāna can only rise from within. It is therefore in the older texts compared to the fire going out, rather than to the fire being put out. The latter point of view, though the word nibbāna is not used, occurs in one or two passages in later books. See J.I,212; Miln.346, 410; SnA 28; Sdhp.584. For the older view see M.I,487 (aggi anāhāro nibbuto, a fire gone out through lack of fuel); Sn.1094 (akiñcanaṁ anādānaṁ etaṁ dīpaṁ anāparaṁ Nibbānaṁ iti); S.I,236 (attadaṇḍesu nibbuto sādānesu anādāno); S.II,85 (aggikkhandho purimassa upādānassa pariyādānā aññassa ca anupāhārā anāhāro nibbāyeyya, as a fire would go out, bereft of food, because the former supply being finished no additional supply is forthcoming); sa-upādāno devānaṁ indo na parinibbāyati, the king of the gods does not escape rebirth so long as he has within him any grasping S.IV,102; pāragū sabbadhammānaṁ anupādāya nibbuto A.I,162; pāragato jhāyī anup° nibbuto, a philosopher, freed, without any cause, source, of rebirth A.IV,290 (etc., see nibbuta). dāvaggi-nibbānaṁ the going out of the jungle fire J.I,212; aggi nibbāyeyya, should the fire go out M.I,487; aggikkhandho nibbuto hoti the great fire has died out Miln.304; nibbuto ginī my fire is out Sn.19. The result of quenching the fire (going out) is coolness (sīta); and one who has attained the state of coolness is sītibhūta. sītibhūto ‘smi nibbuto Vin.I,8; Pv.I,8⁷; sītibhūto nirūpadhi, cooled, with no more fuel (to produce heat) Vin.II,156; A.I,138; nicchāto nibbuto sītibhūto (cp. nicchāta) A.II,208; V,65. anupādānā dīpacci viya nibbutā gone out like the flame of a lamp without supply of fuel ThA.154 (Ap. 153). -- nibbanti dhīrā yath’âyaṁ padīpo the Wise go out like the flame of this lamp Sn.235. This refers to the pulling out of the wick or to lack of oil, not to a blowing out; cp. vaṭṭiṁ paṭicca telapadīpo jāleyya S.II,86; Th.2, 116 (padīpass’eva nibbānaṁ vimokkho ahu cetaso). The pulling out of the wick is expressed by vaṭṭiṁ okassayāmi (=dīpavaṭṭiṁ ākaḍḍhemi ThA.117) cp. on this passage Pischel, Leben & Lehre des Buddha 71; Mrs. Rh. Davids, Buddhism 176; Neumann, Lieder 298). Pajjotass’eva nibbānaṁ like the going out of a lamp S.I,159≈.

B. Since rebirth is the result of wrong desire (kāma, kilesa, āsava, rāga etc.), the dying out of that desire leads to freedom & salvation from rebirth and its cause or substratum. Here references should be given to: (1) the fuel in ethical sense (cp. A 1: aggi); (2) the aims to be accomplished (for instance, coolness=peace); (3) the seat of its realisation (the heart); (4) the means of achievement (the Path); (5) the obstacles to be removed. -- 1. Fuel=cause of rebirth & suffering: āsāva (intoxications). khīṇāsavā jutimanto to loke parinibbutā the wise who are rid of all intoxications are in this world the thoroughly free S.V,29; sāvakā āsavānaṁ khayā viharanti A.IV,83; kodhaṁ pahatvāna parinibbiṁsu anāsavā (are completely cooled) A.IV,98; āsavakhīṇo danto parinibbuto Sn.370; saggaṁ sugatino yanti parinibbanti anāsavā those of happy fate go to heaven, but those not intoxicated die out Dh.126; nibbānaṁ adhimuttānaṁ atthaṅgacchanti āsavā Dh.226; āsavānaṁ khayā bhikkhu nicchāto parinibbuto It.49; vimutti-kusuma-sañchanno parinibbissati anāsavo Th.1, 100. -- kāmā (cravings) nikkāmo nibbano Nāgo Sn.1131. -- kilesa-(nibbāna) vice (only in certain commentaries). kilesa-nibbānass’âpi anupādā parinibbānass’âpi santike DhA.I,286; upādānaṁ abhāvena anupādiyitvā kilesa-nibbānena nibbutā DhA.IV,194. -- nibbidā (disenchantment). Nibbānaṁ ekanta-nibbidāya virāgāya etc. saṁvattati S.II,223; nibbijjha sabbaso kāme sikkhe nibbānaṁ attano Sn.940. -- rāga virāgo nirodho nibbānaṁ S.I,136≈; desento virajaṁ dhammaṁ nibbānaṁ akutobhayan S.I,192; yo rāgakkhayo (dosa° . . . moha° . . .): idaṁ vuccati nibbānaṁ S.IV,251, & same of Amata S.V,8; chandarāga-vinodanaṁ nibbānapadaṁ accutaṁ Sn.1086; kusalo ca jahati pāpakaṁ rāgadosamoha-kkhayā parinibbuto Ud.85; ye ‘dha pajahanti kāmarāgaṁ bhavarāgânusayañ ca pahāya parinibbānagatā Vv 53²⁴. -- vana sabba-saṁyojan’atītaṁ vanā nibbānaṁ āgataṁ A.III,346; nikkhantaṁ vānato ti nibbānaṁ KhA 151; taṇhā-saṅkhāta-vānâbhāvato nibbānaṁ SnA 253.

2. Aims: khema (tranquillity). ātāpī bhikkhu nibbānāya bhabbo anuttarassa yogakkhemassa adhigamāya It.27; ajaraṁ amaraṁ khemaṁ pariyessāmi nibbutiṁ J.I,3; acala (immovable, not to be disturbed). patto acalaṭṭhānaṁ Vv 51⁴; accuta (stable) patthayaṁ accutaṁ padaṁ S.III,143; chandarāga-vinodanaṁ nibbānapadaṁ accutaṁ Sn.1086. nekkhamma (renunciation, dispassionateness). vanā nibbānaṁ āgataṁ kāmehi nekkhammarataṁ A.III,346. -- pāragū (victor). pāragū sabbadhammānaṁ anupādāya nibbuto A.I,162 (cp. A.IV,290 with tiṇṇo pāragato). -- santipada (calm, composure). santī ti nibbutiṁ ñatvā Sn.933; santimaggaṁ eva brūhaya nibbānaṁ sugatena desitaṁ Dh.285; s.=acala VvA.219. -- samatha (allayment, quietude). sabbasaṅkhārasamatho nibbānaṁ S.I,136≈. -- sotthi (welfare). saccena suvatthi hotu nibbānaṁ Sn.235.

3. The Heart: (a) attā (heart, self). abhinibbut-atto Sn.456; thiṭatto frequent, e. g. parinibbuto ṭh° Sn.359; danto parinib° ṭh° Sn.370. -- (b) citta (heart). apariḍayhamāna-citto SnA 347 (for abhinibbutatto Sn.343). -- (c) hadaya (heart) nibbānaṁ hadayasmiṁ opiya S.I,199; mātuhadayaṁ nibbāyate J.I,61; nibbāpehi me hadaya-pariḷāhaṁ (quench the fever of my heart) Miln.318. -- (d) mano (mind). mano nibbāyi tāvade J.I,27; disvā mano me pasīdi Vv 50¹⁴.

4. The Path: dhīra. lokapariyāyaṁ aññāya nibbutā dhīrā tiṇṇā etc. S.I,24; nibbanti dhīrā . . . Sn.235 sabbâbhibhū dhīro sabbagantha-ppamocano It.122 ‹-› Recognition of anicca (transitoriness, see nicca). aniccasaññī . . . bhikkhu pāpuṇāti diṭṭh’eva dhamme nibbānaṁ A.IV,353. -- paññā. nibbānaṁ ev’ajjhagamuṁ sapaññā S.I,22; n’abhirato paññā S.I,38. ‹-› paṇḍita & nipaka. anupubbena n°ṁ adhigacchanti paṇḍitā A.I,162; nipakā asesaṁ parinibbanti It.93. ‹-› vijjā. bhikkhu paṇihitena cittena avijjaṁ bhecchati vijjaṁ uppādessati n°ṁ sacchikarissati the bhikkhu with devout heart will destroy ignorance, gain right cognition & realise Nibbāna A.I,8; idh’aññāya parinibbāti anāsavo A.III,41; sabb’āsave pariññāya parinibbanti anāsavā Vbh.426.

5. The Obstacles: gantha (fetter). nibbānaṁ adhigantabbaṁ sabba-g°-pamocanaṁ S.I,210; It.104; similarly It.122 (see above). gabbhaseyyā (rebirth). na te punam upenti gabbhaseyyaṁ, parinibbānagatā hi sītibhūtā Vv 53²⁴ -- nīvaraṇa (obstacles). pañca n°. anibbāna-saṁvattanikā S.V,97. -- punabbhava (rebirth). nibbāpehi mahārāgaṁ mā ḍayhittho punappunaṁ S.I,188; vibhavañ ca bhavañ ca vippahāya vusitavā khīṇapunabbhavo sa bhikkhu Sn.514; bhava-nirodha nibbānaṁ S.II,117. -- saṅkhārā (elements of life). sabbasaṅkhāra-samatho nibbānaṁ S.I,136; N.=sabbasaṅkhārā khayissanti A.III,443. -- saṁyojanāni (fetters). sabbas-âtītaṁ vanā Nibbānaṁ āgataṁ A.III,346; s. pahāya n°ṁ sacchikarissati A.III,423; saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā antarā-parinibbāyī hoti S.V,69.

III, Nibbāna: its ethical importance and general characterisation. 1. Assurance of N. (nibbānass’eva santike, near N., sure of N.): S.I,33 (yassa etādisaṁ yānaṁ . . . sa etena yānena n. e. s.: with the chariot of the Dhamma sure of reaching N.); IV,75; A.II,39 (abhabbo parihānāya n. e. s. impossible to fail in the assurance of final release, of one “catuhi dhammehi samannāgato, viz. sīla, indriyaguttadvāratā, bhojanamattaññutā. jāgariyā”); III,331 (id. with appamādagaru: ever active & keen); II,40=It.40 (id. with appamāda-rato); Sn.822. -- 2. Steps and Means to N.: nibbāna-sacchikiriyā, attainment of N., is maṅgalaṁ uttamaṁ & to be achieved by means of tapo, brahmacariyā and ariyasaccāna-dassanaṁ Sn.267. -- brahmacariya (a saintly life) is n.-parāyanā (leading to N.) S.III,189, cp. V,218; also called n.-ogadhā (with similar states of mind, as nibbidā, virāgo, vimutti) ibid.; A.II,26=It.28, cp. It.29 (nibbān’--ogadha-gāminaṁ b°ṁ). The stages of sanctification are also discussed under the formula “nibbidā virāgo vimutti . . . vimuttasmiṁ vimuttaṁ iti ñāṇaṁ hoti: khīṇā jāti etc.” (i. e. no more possibility of birth) S.II,124=IV.86. ‹-› dhamma: Buddha’s teaching as the way to N.: “dhammavaraṁ adesayi n.-gāmiṁ paramaṁ hitāya” Sn.233; ahaṁ sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ desemi sattānaṁ visuddhiyā . . . n°assa sacchikiriyāya A.V,194, cp. 141; pubbe dh.-ṭhiti-ñāṇaṁ pacchā nibbāne ñāṇan ti S.II,124. -- magga: Those practices of a moral & good life embraced in the 8 fold Noble Path (ariyamagga). Sace atthi akammena koci kvaci na jīyati nibbānassa hi so maggo S.I,217; ekāyano ayaṁ maggo sattānaṁ visuddhiyā . . . N°assa sacchikiriyāya D.II,290; S.V,167, 185; bhāvayitvā sucimaggaṁ n° --ogadha-gāminaṁ . . . Vbh.426; ādimhi sīlaṁ dasseyya, majjhe maggaṁ vibhāvaye, pariyosānamhi nibbānaṁ . . . DA.I,176. -- N.--gamanaṁ maggaṁ: tattha me nirato mano “my heart rejoices in the path to Nibbāna” S.I,186; N.--gāminī paṭipadā A.IV,83 (the path to salvation). Cp. §§ 4 & 7. -- 3. The Search for N. or the goal of earnest endeavour. ārogya-paramā lābhā nibbānaṁ paramaṁ sukhaṁ, aṭṭhaṅgiko ca maggānaṁ khemaṁ amata-gāminaṁ “N. is a higher bliss than acquisition of perfect health, the eightfold Path (alone) of all leads to perfect peace, to ambrosia” M.I,508, cp. Dh.204 (“the fullest gain is for health etc.; N. is the highest happiness” DhA.III,267). Similarly: khantī paramaṁ tapo titikkhā, n°ṁ paramaṁ vadanti buddhā D.II,49=Dh.184; n°ṁ paramaṁ sukhaṁ: Dh.204=Sn.257=J.III,195; id.: Dh.203; jhānaṁ upasampajja . . . okkamanāya n.°assa A.IV,111 sq.; cp. 230 sq.; kaṭuviyakato bhikkhu . . . ārakā hoti N°ā A.I,281; n°ṁ ajjhagamuṁ sapaññā S.I,22; devalokañ ca te yanti . . . anupubbena n°ṁ adhigacchanti paṇḍitā A.I,162; n°ṁ abhikaṅkhati S.I,198; abhipassati A.I,147; tiṇṇakathaṅkatho visallo n.--âbhirato Sn.86; bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaraṁ sītibhāvaṁ sacchikātuṁ . . . paṇītâdhimutto hoti ṇ-âbhirato ca A.III,435; n.--âbhirato . . . sabbadukkhā pamuccati S.I,38; n.--ogadhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ vussati n.--parāyaṇaṁ n.--pariyosānaṁ S.III,189=V.218; n°ṁ gavesanto carāmi (Bodhisat, J.I,61). All means of conduct & all ideals of reason & intellect lead to one end only: Nibbāna. This is frequently expressed by var. similes in the phrase n.--ninna, °poṇa, °pabbhāra, e. g. S.V,75=134=137=190; V,244; A.V,75, 134, 190, 244= 291; Vv 84⁴². Saddahāno arahataṁ dhammaṁ n.‹-› pattiyā sussūsā labhate paññaṁ appamatto S.I,214= Sn.186, cp. S.I,48; Gotamo n.--paṭisaṁyuttāya dhammiyā kathāya bhikkhū sandasseti S.I,214=192=210; Ud.80; n°ṁ pariyesati A.II,247; n.--pariyosānā sabbe dhammā A.V,107; n.-poṇaṁ me mānasaṁ bhavissati, saṁyojanā pahāṇaṁ gacchanti A.III,443; odhunitvā malaṁ sabbaṁ patvā n.--sampadaṁ muccati sabba-dukkhehi: sā hoti sabbasampadā A.IV,239; nibbijjha sabbaso kāme sikkhe n°ṁ attano Sn.940, cp. 1061. -- 4. Some Epithets of Nibbāna: akutobhayaṁ A.II,24=It.122; accutaṁ padaṁ (careyya āditta-sīso va patthayaṁ a. p.) S.III,143; Sn.1086; pattā te acalaṭṭhānaṁ yattha gantvā na socare Vv 51⁴; amataṁ A.II,247; M.III,224 (Bhagavā atthassa ninnetā a °assa dātā); Miln.319; Vv 64²⁷ (apāpuranto a °assa dvāraṁ); VvA.85 (a-rasa); Vv 50²⁰ (amatogadha magga=nibb°-gāminī paṭipadā); amosadhammaṁ Sn.758; khemaṁ appaṭibhayaṁ S.IV,175; S.I,189=Sn.454; Th.2, 350 (°ṭṭhāne vimuttā te patta te acalaṁ sukhaṁ); M.I,508 (+amatagāminaṁ); A.II,247 (yogakkhemaṁ anuttaraṁ); same at A.III,294; It.27; Dh.23. -- taṇhakkhaya Vv 73⁵; ṭhānaṁ dud- dasaṁ S.I,136 (=sabba-saṅkhāra-samatho); dhuvaṁ (q. v.); niccaṁ Kvu 121; nekkhammaṁ A.I,147 (°ṁ daṭṭhu khemato . . . nibbānaṁ abhipassanto); Vv 84⁴². sabba-gantha-pamocanaṁ (deliverance from all ties) S.I,210; II,278 (sabbadukkha°); It.222=A.II,24; yathābhūtaṁ vacanaṁ S.IV,195; yathāsukhaṁ (the Auspicious) A.IV,415 sq.; (chanda-) rāga vinodanaṁ Sn.1086; rāgakkhayo (dosa°, moha°) S.V,8; rāgavinayo (dosa°, moha°) ibid., santi (calm, peace) Vv 50²¹=Sn.204 (chandarāga-viratto bhikkhu paññāṇavā ajjhagā amataṁ santiṁ nibbānapadaṁ accutaṁ); VvA.219 (=acala); santimaggaṁ eva brūhaya n°ṁ Sugatena desitaṁ Dh.285=Nett 36; sandiṭṭhikaṁ akālikaṁ etc.; A.I,158; samo bhūmibhāgo ramaṇīyo S.III,109; sassataṁ Kvu 34; suvatthi Sn.235. -- 5. N. is realisable in this world, i. e. in this life if it is mature (diṭṭhe va dhamme): S.II,18=115=III,163=IV.141 (diṭṭha-dh-npatta); M.II,228; A.IV,353=358, cp. 454. -- 6. Definitions with regard to the destruction of the causes or substrata of life (cp. above I.): taṇhāya vippahānena n°ṁ iti vuccati S.I,39=Sn.1109; as sabba-saṅkhārasamatho (calming down of all vital elements) Vin.I,5; S.I,136; A.II,118=III,164; IV,423; V,8, 110, 320, 354; akiñcanaṁ anādānaṁ etaṁ dīpaṁ anāparaṁ n°ṁ iti nam brūmi jarāmaccu-parikkhayaṁ Sn.1094; bhavanirodho n°ṁ ti S.II,117; A.V,9; rāga-kkhayo (dosa°, moha°) S.IV,251=261; virāgo nirodho n°ṁ in typical & very freq. exposition at Nd²=S.I,136≈. See also vana & cp. the foll.: taṇhā-saṅkhāta-vānâbhāvato n°ṁ SnA 253; nikkhantaṁ vānato ti n°ṁ KhA 151; kilesa-n° ass’âpi anupādā parinibbānass’âpi santike yeva DhA.I,286 (on Dh.32). -- 7. N. as perfect wisdom and what is conducive to such a state (saṁvattati). The foll. phrase is one of the oldest stereotype phrases in the Canon & very freq.; it is used of all the highest means & attainments of conduct & meditation & may be said to mark the goal of perfect understanding & a perfect philosophy of life. It is given in 2 variations, viz. in a simple form as “upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati,” with ref. to majjhimā paṭipadā at Vin.I,10=S.IV,331=V.421; of satta bojjhaṅgā at S.V,80; and in a fuller form as “ekanta-nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya etc. as above” at D.I,189 (negative); II,251 (of brahmacariyaṁ), 285; III,130 (sukhallikânuyogā, neg.) 136 (avyākataṁ, neg.); S.II,223 (brahmacariya); V,82 (satta bojjhaṅgā), 179 (satipaṭṭhānā), 255 (iddhipādā), 361 (ariyamagga), 438 A.III,83, 326 sq.; etc. -- Cp. n-saṁvattanika S.V,97 (upekhāsambojjhaṅga); Nd² 281 (neg. of tamo). ‹-› 8. N. as the opposite of rāga (passion, lust). Freq. is the combⁿ of virāga nirodha nibbāna, almost used as three synonyms, thus at S.II,18; Vin.III,20=111; A.II,118=III,164=IV.423=V.8=Nd² under Nibbāna; A.II,34=It.88 (dhammānaṁ aggaṁ akkhāyati, madanimmadano pipāsa-vinayo ālaya-samugghāto vaṭṭûpacchedo taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodha nibbānaṁ), cp. Vin.III,20≈. Similarly S.I,192 (Sugataṁ payirupāsati desentaṁ virajaṁ dhammaṁ nibbānaṁ akutobhayaṁ). ‹-› 9. Various Characterisations & Similes (cp. above II. A 4 & 5). sukkâbhijātiko samāno akaṇhaṁ asukkaṁ n°ṁ abhijayati D.III,251; A.III,384 sq.; aniccā sabbe saṅkhārā dukkhā ‘nattā ca saṅkhātā: nibbānañ c’eva paññatti anattā iti nicchayā Vin.V,86. On anicca & anattā in rel. to N. see also S.IV,133 sq.; A.IV,353; dukkhato & sukhato n°ṁ samanupassati A.III,442. On comparison with a lamp see e. g. S.I,159=D.II,157= Th.1, 906 (pajjotass’eva nibbānaṁ vimokkho cetaso ahū), A.IV,3 (pajjotass’eva n. vimokkho hoti cetaso); Sn.235 (. . . te khīṇabījā avirūḷhichandā nibbanti dhīrā yathâyaṁ padīpo).

--abhirata fond of N. (cp. III, 3) S.I,38; A.III,435; Sn.86 (visalla+); --ogadha merging into N. (of brahmacariya) S.III,189; V,218; A.II,26=It.28; Vbh.426, cp. amatogadha A.V,107; --gamana (magga; cp. III, 2) leading to N. D.II,223; S.I,186, 217; A.IV,83; (dhamma:) S.V,11; Sn.233; --dhātu the sphere or realm of N. always in phrase anupādisesāsaya n.-dhātuyā parinibbāyate Vin.II,239; D.III,135; It.38, 121; Ps.I,101; cp. rāgavinayo n.-dhātuyā adhivacanaṁ S.V,8. See parinibbāyin; --ninna (+°poṇa, °pabbhāra; cp. III, 3) converging into N. A.III,443; Vv 84⁴² & passim; --paṭisaññuta (dhammikathā; cp. III, 2) relating or referring to N. S.I,114=192=210; Ud.80; --patta having attained N. (diṭṭha-dhamma°, see above III, 5) S.II,18=114= III,163; --patti attainment of N. S.I,48, 214=Sn.186; --pada=Nibbāna (see pada 3) Sn.204. --pariyosāna ending in N. having its final goal in N. S.III,189; V,218; A.V,107; --saṁvattanika conducive to N.; contributing toward the attainment of N. S.V,97; Nd² 281 (a°); cp. above III, 7; --sacchikiriyā realisation of N. (identical with ñāṇa and constituting the highest ideal; cp. above III, 2) Sn.267. Cp. also D.II,290; S.V,167; A.III,423; V,141; --saññā perception of N. A.III,443; --sampatti successful attainment of N. Kh VIII,13; --sampadā the blessing of the attainment of N. A.IV,239. (Page 362)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbāpana: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. nibbāpeti] means of extinguishing, extinction, quenching S.I,188 (cittaṁ pariḍayhati: nibbāpanaṁ brūhi=allayment of the glow); A.IV,320 (celassa n°āya chandaṁ karoti: try to put out the burning cloth); Miln.302 (jhāyamāno n°ṁ alabhamāno), 318 (pariḷāha°). (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】冷却，熄，消失。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbāpeti: {'def': '[Sk. ni(r)vārayati, Caus. of ni(r)varati, influenced in meaning by nirvāpayati. Caus. of nirvāti= make cool by blowing (e. g. RV X.16¹³). See nibbuta on etym.] 1. to extinguish, put out, quench S.I,188 (mahārāgaṁ); It.93 (rāg-aggiṁ; & nibbāpetvā aggiṁ nipakā parinibbanti); cp. aggiṁ nijjāleti J.VI,495; Pv.I,8⁵ (vārinā viya osiñcaṁ sabbaṁ daraṁ nibbāpaye); Miln.304 (aggikhandhaṁ mahāmegho abhippavassitvā n.), 318 (nibbāpehi me hadaya-pariḷāhaṁ), 410 (megho uṇhaṁ n.); DhA.II,241 (fire); Sdhp.552 (bhavadukkh’aggiṁ). -- 2. to cleanse, purify (cittaṁ, one’s heart) Vism.305. -- pp. nibbāpita. See also nibbāpana. (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni+vā+e), 熄灭，冷却，熄灭。【过】nibbāpesi。【过分】nibbāpita。【现分】nibbāpenta。【独】nibbāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ni + vā + e), 熄灭，冷却，熄灭。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【现分】 ~penta。【独】 ~bāpetvā。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nibbāpita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of nibbāpeti] extinguished, put out, quenched J.III,99 (=nicchuddha). (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbāti: {'def': '[see nibbuta etym.; influenced in meaning by Sk. nirvāti, nis+vāti to blow, i. e. to make cool, see vāyati & nibbāpeti] (Instr.) to cool off (lit. & fig.), to get cold, to become passionless Sn.235 (nibbanti dhīrā yathâyaṁ padīpo=vijjhāyanti; yathâyaṁ padīpo nibbuto evaṁ nibbanti KhA 194, 195), 915 (kathaṁ disvā nibbāti bhikkhu=rāgaṁ etc. nibbāpeti Nd¹ 344); J.IV,391 (pāyāsaṁ). See also parinibbāti (e. g. Vbh.426). (Page 362)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni+vā+a), 寒冷，变成不热情。被熄灭。【过】nibbāyi。【过分】nibbuta。【现分】nibbāyanta。【独】nibbāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ni + vā + a), 寒冷，变成不热情。被熄灭。【过】 nibbāyi。【过分】nibbuta。【现分】 nibbāyanta。【独】 nibbāyitvā。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nibbāyati: {'def': '[Sk. ni-(or nir-)vriyate, Pass. of ni(r)varati, influenced by nirvāyati intrs. to cease to blow; see on etym. & Pāli derivation nibbuta] 1. to be cooled or refreshed, to be covered up=to be extinguished, go out (of fire), to cease to exist, always used with ref. to fire or heat or (fig.) burning sensations (see nibbāna II. A end): aggikkhandho purimassa ca upādānassa puriyādānā aññassa ca anupāhārā anāhāro nibbāyeyya S.II,85 (opp. jāleyya); do. of telaṁ & vaṭṭiṁ paṭicca telappadīpo n. S.II,86=III,126=IV.213=V.319; sace te purato so aggi nibbāyeyya jāneyyāsi tvaṁ: ayaṁ . . . aggi nibbuto M.I,487; A.IV,70 (papaṭikā n.); aggi udake tiṇukkā viya n. J.I,212; mātuhadayaṁ n. J.I,61; aggi upādāna-saṅkhayā n. Miln.304. -- aor. nibbāyi [Sk. niravāri] J.I,27 (mano n.: was refreshed) 212 (aggi udake n.: was extinguished); VI,349 (cooled down). -- 2. to go out (of light) Vism.430 (dīpā nibbāyiṁsu the lights went out); ThA.154 (dīpacci n. nirāsanā: went out). See also parinibbāyati & cp. nibbuta, nibbāpeti, nibbāpana. (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni + vā + ya), 不再存在，变成很凉爽。【过】 nibbāyi。 nibbāti。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ni+vā +ya),不再存在，变成很凉爽。【过】nibbāyi。见nibbāti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibbāyin: {'def': 'see pari°. (Page 365)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibbāyituŋ: {'def': 'nibbātuŋ, 【不】不再存在。(p176)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nibbāyituṁ: {'def': 'nibbātuṁ,【不】不再存在。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nibha: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. nibha, to bhāti] shining; like, equal to, resembling (-°) J.V,372; Vv 40¹; Pv IV.3¹²; VvA.122 (vaṇṇa°=vaṇṇa); Nd² 608. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】相等的，相似的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】相等的，相似的。(p177)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nibhatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. to nibha] likeness, appearance VvA.27. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibhā: {'def': '【阴】光彩，光(shine, lustre, splendour)。vaṇṇanibhā﹐光彩的颜色。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [to nibha] shine, lustre, splendour VvA.179 (nibhāti dippatī ti nibhā). (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】光彩，光。(p177)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nibhāti: {'def': '[ni+bhāti] to shine VvA.179 (=dippati). (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni+bhā+a), 照耀。【过】nibhāsi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ni + bhā + a), 照耀。【过】 nibhāsi。(p177)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nibodhati: {'def': '[ni+bodhati] to attend to, to look out for, to take J.III,151 (=gaṇhati). -- Caus. nibodheti to waken, at Th.1, 22 is probably to be read as vibodheti. (Page 361)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nibyaggha: {'def': 'see nivyaggha. (Page 366)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nicaya: {'def': '【阳】积聚，堆起。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】积聚，堆起。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. nicaya, ni+caya, cp. nicita] heaping up, accumulation; wealth, provisions S.I,93, 97; Vin.V,172 (°sannidhi). See also necayika. (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nicca: {'def': '【形】不变的，连续的，长备的。niccakālaṁ,【副】时常地，不变地。Niccadāna,【中】常施((AA.4.39.)：Niccadānanti salākabhattaṁ(以木片(木瓢)分发食物)。niccabhatta,【中】连续不断的粮食。niccasīla,【中】不间断的守戒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】不变的，连续的，长备的。 ~kālaŋ, 【副】时常地，不变地。~dāna, 【中】永久的布施。 ~bhatta, 【中】连续不断的粮食。 ~sīla, 【中】不间断的守戒。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic nitya, adj.-formation fr. ni, meaning “downward”=onward, on and on; according to Grassmann (Wtb. z. Rig Veda) originally “inwardly, homely”] constant, continuous, permanent D.III,31; S.I,142; II,109, 198; IV,24 sq., 45, 63; A.II,33, 52; V,210; Ps.II,80; Vbh.335, 426. In chain of synonyms: nicca dhuva sassata avipariṇāmadhamma D.I,21; S.III,144, 147; see below anicca, -- nt. adv. niccaṁ perpetually, constantly, always (syn. sadā) M.I,326; III,271; Sn.69, 220, 336; Dh.23, 109, 206, 293; J.I,290; III,26, 190; Nd² 345 (=dhuvakālaṁ); PvA.32, 55, 134. ‹-› Far more freq. as anicca (adj.; aniccaṁ nt. n.) unstable, impermanent, inconstant; (nt.) evanescence, inconstancy, impermanence. -- The emphatic assertion of impermanence (continuous change of condition) is a prominent axiom of the Dhamma, & the realization of the evanescent character of all things mental or material is one of the primary conditions of attaining right knowledge (: anicca-saññaṁ manasikaroti to ponder over the idea of impermanence S.II,47; III,155; V,132; Ps.II,48 sq., 100; PvA.62 etc. -- kāye anicc’ânupassin realizing the impermanence of the body (together with vayânupassin & nirodha°) S.IV,211; V,324, 345; Ps.II,37, 45 sq., 241 sq. See anupassanā). In this import anicca occurs in many combinations of similar terms, all characterising change, its consequences & its meaning, esp. in the famous triad “aniccaṁ dukkhaṁ anattā” (see dukkha II.2), e. g. S.III,41, 67, 180; IV,28 (sabbaṁ), 85 sq., 106 sq.; 133 sq. Thus anicca addhuva appāyuka cavanadhamma D.I,21. anicca+dukkha S.II,53 (yad aniccaṁ taṁ dukkhaṁ); IV,28, 31, V,345; A.IV,52 (anicce dukkhasaññā); M.I,500 (+roga etc.); Nd² 214 (id. cp. roga). anicca dukkha vipariṇāmadhamma (of kāmā) D.I,36. aniccasaññī anattasaññī A.IV,353; etc. ‹-› Opposed to this ever-fluctuating impermanence is Nibbāna (q. v.), which is therefore marked with the attributes of constancy & stableness (cp. dhuva, sassata amata, vipariṇāma). -- See further for ref. S.II,244 sq. (saḷāyatanaṁ a.), 248 (dhātuyo); III,102 (rūpa etc.); IV,131, 151; A.II,33, 52; V,187 sq., 343 sq.; Sn.805; Ps.I,191; II,28 sq., 80, 106; Vbh.12 (rūpa etc.), 70 (dvādasâyatanāni), 319 (viññāṇā), 324 (khandhā), 373; PvA.60 (=ittara).

--kālaṁ (adv.) constantly Nd² 345; --dāna a perpetual gift D.I,144 (cp. DA.I,302); --bhatta a continuous foodsupply (for the bhikkhus) J.I,178; VvA.92; PvA.54; --bhattika one who enjoys a continuous supply of food (as charity) Vin.II,78; III,237 (=dhuva-bhattika); IV,271; --saññā (& adj. saññin) the consciousness or idea of permanence (adj. having etc.) A.II,52; III,79, 334; IV,13, 145 sq.; Nett 27; --sīla the uninterrupted observance of good conduct VvA.72; PvA.256. (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niccala: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. niścala, nis+cala] motionless J.IV,2; PvA.95. (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不动的。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不动的。niccalabhāvena﹐以不动的状态。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niccamma: {'def': '[Sk. niścarman, nis+camma] without skin, excoriated, in °ṁ karoti to flog skinless, to beat the skin off J.III,281. niccamma-gāvī “a skinless cow,” used in a well-known simile at S.II,99, referred to at Vism.341 & 463. (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】无皮肤的，鞭打脱的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】无皮肤的，鞭打脱的。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Niccatta: {'def': '(nt.)=niccatā Vism.509. (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niccatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. to nicca] continuity, permanence, only as a° changeableness, impermanence S.I,61, 204; III,43; IV,142 sq., 216, 325. (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】连续性，永久性。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】连续性，永久性。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niccaŋ: {'def': '【副】不变地，总是地，长备地。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Niccaṁ: {'def': '【副】不变地，总是地，长备地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nicchanda: {'def': '(adj.) [nis+chanda] without desire or excitement J.I,7. (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niccharati: {'def': '(ni+car+a), 从…出去，从…往前，散发。【过】nicchari。【过分】niccharita。【独】niccharitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. niścarati, nis+carati] to go out or forth from, to rise, sound forth, come out It.75 (devasadda); Vv 38²; J.I,53, 176; DhA.I,389; VvA.12, 37 (saddā). ‹-› Caus. nicchāreti to make come out from, to let go forth, get rid of, emit, utter, give out D.I,53 (anattamanavācam a° not utter a word of discontent); J.III,127; V,416 (madhurassaraṁ); Pug.33; Miln.259 (garahaṁ); Dāvs.I,28 (vācaṁ). (Page 356)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni + car + a), 从…出去，从…往前，散发。【过】 ~chari。【过分】 ~charita。【无】 ~ritvā。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Niccharaṇa: {'def': '【中】散发，传出。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】散发，传出。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. niccharati] emanation, sending out, expansion, efflux Vism.303. (Page 356)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nicchaya: {'def': '[Sk. niścaya, nis+caya of cināti] discrimination, conviction, certainty; resolution, determination J.I,441 (°mitta a firm friend); DhsA.133 (adhimokkha=its paccupaṭṭhāna); SnA 60 (daḷha° adj. of firm resolution). See vi°. (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】决议，果断，辨别。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】决议，果断，辨别。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nicchināti: {'def': '(ni+chi +nā), 区别，考虑，调查。【过】nicchini。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. niścinoti, nis+cināti] to discriminate, consider, investigate, ascertain; pot. niccheyya Sn.785 (expl^d by nicchinitvā vinicchinitvā etc. Nd¹ 76); Dh.256 (gloss K vinicchaye). -- pp. nicchita. (Page 356)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni + chi + nā), 区别，考虑，调查。【过】 ~chini。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nicchita: {'def': '(Nicchināti的【过分】) 区别，考虑，调查。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. niścita, nis+cita, see nicchināti] determined, convinced Mhvs 7, 19. (Page 356)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nicchodeti: {'def': '(& v. l. nicchādeti) [shows a confusion of two roots, which are both of Prk. origin, viz. chaḍḍ & choṭ, the former=P. chaḍḍeti, the latter=Sk. kṣodayati or BSk. chorayati, Apabhraṁśa chollai; with which cp. P. chuddha] to shake or throw about, only in phrase odhunāti nidhunāti nicchodeti at S.III,155=M.I,229= 374=A.III,365, where S has correct reading (v. l. °choṭeti); M has °chādeti (v. l. °chodeti); A has °chedeti (v. l. °choreti, °chāreti; gloss nippoṭeti). The C. on A.III,365 has: nicchedetī ti bāhāya vā rukkhe vā paharati. -- nicchedeti (chid) is pardonable because of Prk. chollai “to cut.” Cp. also nicchubhati with v. l. BB nicchurāti. For sound change P. ch ‹ Sk. kṣ cp. P. chamā‹ kṣamā, chārikā‹ kṣāra, churikā‹ kṣurikā etc. (Page 356)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nicchubhana: {'def': '(nt.) [see nicchubhati] throwing out, ejection, being an outcaste Miln.357. (Page 356)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nicchubhati: {'def': '[Sk. *niḥkṣubhati, nis+khubhati or chubhati, cp. chuddha & khobha, also nicchodeti & upacchubhati and see Trenckner, Miln.pp. 423, 424] to throw out J.III,512 (=nīharati Com.; v. l. nicchurāti); Miln.187. -- pp. nicchuddha q. v. (Page 356)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nicchuddha: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. niḥkṣubdha, nis+chuddha, see nicchubhati] thrown out J.III,99 (=nibbāpita, nikkhāmita); Miln.130. (Page 356)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nicchādeti: {'def': 'see nicchodeti. (Page 356)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nicchāreti: {'def': '(niccharati 的【使】), 1.发出，送出。2.说话。【过】nicchāresi。【过分】nicchārita。【独】nicchāretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(niccharati 的【使】), 1. 发出，送出。 2. 说话。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~rita。【无】 ~retvā。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Caus. of niccharati, q. v. (Page 356)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nicchāta: {'def': '[Sk. *niḥpsāta, nis+chāta] having no hunger, being without cravings, stilled, satisfied. Ep. of an Arahant always in combⁿ with nibbuta or parinibbuta: S.III,26 (tanhaṁ abbuyha); IV,204 (vedanānaṁ khayā); M.I,341; 412, A.IV,410; V,65 (sītibhūta); Sn.707 (aniccha), 735, 758; It.48 (esanānaṁ khayā); Th.2, 132 (abbūḷhasalla). -- Expl^d at Ps.II,243 by nekkhammena kāmacchandato n.; arahattamaggena sabbakilesehi n. muccati. (Page 356)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不饥饿的，满足的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】不饥饿的，满足的。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Niccittaka: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. niścitta, nis+citta (ka)] thoughtless J.II,298. (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niccola: {'def': '【形】无覆盖的，赤裸的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】无覆盖的，赤裸的。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [nis-cola] without dress, naked PvA.32 (=nagga). (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nicita: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. nicita, ni+cita, of nicināti] heaped up, full, thick, massed, dense Th.2, 480 (of hair); PvA.221 (ussanna uparûpari nicita, of Niraya). (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(nicināti 的【过分】), 已堆积。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nicināti 的【过分】), 已堆积。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nicula: {'def': '[Sk. nicula] a plant (Barringtonia acutangula) VvA.134. (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nidahati: {'def': '[Sk. nidadhāti, ni+dahati¹] to lay down or aside, deposit; accumulate, hoard, bury (a treasure) Vin.I,46 (cīvaraṁ); Miln.271; ger. nidahitvā PvA.97 (dhanadhaññaṁ) & nidhāya Dh.142, 405; Sn.35 (daṇḍaṁ), 394, 629; Nd² 348; pres. also nidheti KhA 217, 219; fut. nidhessati PvA.132. Pass. nidhīyati KhA 217. Caus. nidhāpeti PvA.130 (bhoge). See also nidāhaka, nidhāna & nidhi; also upanidhāya. (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni + dah + a), 存放，埋（藏宝物）。【过】 nidahi。【过分】 nidahita,nihita。【独】 ~hitvā。(p173)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ni+dah放置+a), 存放，埋(藏宝物)。【过】nidahi。【过分】nidahita, nihita。【独】nidahitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nidassana: {'def': '【中】例子，证据，比较。(p173)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. nidarśana, ni+dassana] “pointing at” evidence, example, comparison, apposition, attribute, characteristic; sign, term D.I,223 (a° with no attribute); III,217 (id.); S.IV,370 (id.); A.IV,305 sq. (nīla°, pīta° etc.); Sn.137; Vbh.13, 64, 70 sq. (sa°, a°); VvA.12, 13; PvA.26, 121 (pucchanākāra°) 226 (paccakkhabhūtaṁ n. “sign, token”). (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】例子，证据，比较。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nidassati: {'def': 'v. l. BB at Sn.785 for nirassati (q. v.) Nd¹ 76 has nid° in text, nir° as v. l. SS; SnA 522 reads nirassati. (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nidasseti: {'def': '[Sk. nidarśayati, ni+dasseti] to point out (“down”), explain, show, define VvA.12, 13 (°etabbavacana the word to be compared or defined, correl. to nidassana-vacana).-- pp. nidassita (q. v.). (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni+dis指出+e), 指出，解释，定义。【过】nidassesi。【过分】nidassita。【独】nidassetvā, nidassiya。【义】nidassitabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ni + dis + e), 指出，解释，定义。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~ssita。【独】 ~setvā, nidassiya。【潜】 ~sitabba。(p173)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nidassita: {'def': '(pp.) [see nidasseti] pointed out, defined as, termed Pv.I,5¹²; PvA.30. (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nidaṁsanī: {'def': '现露。kopīnanidaṁsanī, 现露阴物(D.31./III,183.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nidda: {'def': '(nt.) [nis+dara, see darī] a cave Nd¹ 23 (Ep. of kāya). (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niddanta: {'def': '[so read for niddanna, v. l. niddhā=niddā; cp. supinanta]=niddā J.VI,294. (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niddara: {'def': '【形】无苦闷的，无痛苦的，无恐惧的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】无苦闷的，无痛苦的，无恐惧的。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [nis+dara] free from fear, pain or anguish Dh.205=Sn.257 (expl^d at DhA.III,269 by rāgadarathānaṁ abhāvena n.; at SnA 299 by kilesapariḷāhâbhāvena n.). (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niddasa: {'def': 'see niddesa. (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niddaya: {'def': '【形】无慈悲心的，残酷的。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. nirdaya, nis+dayā (adj.)] merciless, pitiless, cruel Sdhp.143, 159. (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】无慈悲心的，残酷的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niddesa: {'def': '[Sk. nirdeśa, fr. niddisati, cp. desa, desaka etc.] 1. description, attribute, distinction PvA.7 (ukkaṭṭha°); °vatthu object of distinction or praise D.III,253= A.IV,15 (where reading is niddasa, which also as v. l. at D.III,253 & Ps.I,5). -- 2. descriptive exposition, analytic explanation by way of question & answer, interpretation, exegesis Vin.V,114 (sa°); Nett 4, 8 38 sq.; Vism.26; DhsA.54; VvA.78; PvA.71, 147. ‹-› 3. N. of an old commentary (ascribed to Sāriputta) on parts of the Sutta Nipāta (Aṭṭhaka-vagga, interpreted in the Mahā-Niddesa; Pārāyana-vagga and, as a sort of appendix, the Khaggavisāṇa-sutta, interpreted in the Culla-Niddesa); as one of the canonical texts included in the Khuddaka Nikāya; editions in P.T.S. Quoted often in the Visuddhimagga, e. g. p. 140, 208 sq. etc. (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'm. 義釋 [小部經之一].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '(Sk. nirdewa, fr. niddisati, cp. desa, desaka etc.),【阳】1.描述，(分析的)解释(description, attribute, distinction)。2.(descriptive exposition, analytic explanation by way of question & answer, interpretation, exegesis Vin.V,114 (sa°); Nett 4, 8 38 sq.; Vism.26; DhsA.54; VvA.78; PvA.71, 147. ‹-› 3. N. of an old commentary (ascribed to Sāriputta) on parts of the Sutta Nipāta (Aṭṭhaka-vagga, interpreted in the Mahā-Niddesa; Pārāyana-vagga and, as a sort of appendix, the Khaggavisāṇa-sutta, interpreted in the Culla-Niddesa)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】描述，（分析的）解释。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'm. 義釈 [小部経の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Niddhamana: {'def': '【中】排水沟，运河，排出物。niddhamanadvāra,【中】储水池的水门。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [of niddhamati or=*nirdhāvana= °dhovana to dhāvati²] drainage, drain, canal Vin.II,120 (udaka°; dhovituṁ immediately preceding); J.I,175, 409, 425; III,415; IV,28; V,21 (udaka°); DhA.II,37. (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】排水沟，运河，排出物。 ~dvāra, 【中】储水池的水门。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Niddhamanā: {'def': '(f.) [either to niddhamati or to niddhāpeti] throwing out, ejection, expulsion J.V,233 (=nikkaḍḍhanā Com.). (Page 359)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niddhamati: {'def': '(ni + dham + a), 吹走，排出。【过】 ~mi。【独】 ~mitvā。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ni+dham+a), 吹走，排出。【过】niddhami。【独】niddhamitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[in form=Sk. nirdhmāti, nis+dhamati, but in meaning the verb, as well as its derivations, are influenced by both meanings of niddhāvati (dhāvati¹ & ²): see niddhāpeti, niddhamana, & niddhovati] to blow away, blow off; to clean, cleanse, purify; to throw out, eject, remove Sn.281=Miln.414 (kāraṇḍavaṁ); Sn.282 (°itvā pāpicche), 962 (malaṁ=pajahati (Nd¹ 478); Dh.239 (id.); Miln.43. -- pp. niddhanta). (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niddhana: {'def': '【形】贫穷的，没有财产的。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [nis+dhana] without property, poor J.V,447. (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】贫穷的，没有财产的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niddhanta: {'def': '(niddhamati的【过分】) 吹走，排出，泻。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of niddhamati, nis+dhanta, q. v.] blown off, removed, cleaned, purified A.I,254 (jātarūpa “loitered,” cp. niddhota); Sn.56 (°kasāva-moha; Com. vijahati); Dh.236 (°mala, malānaṁ nīhaṭatāya DhA.III,336); Nd² 347 (=vanta & pahīna); J.VI,218 (of hair; Com. expl^s siniddharutā, v. l. BB siniddha-anta, thus meant for Sk. snigdhānta). (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niddharaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) not with Hardy (Index VvA)=Sk. nirdhāraṇa (estimation), but to be read as nittharaṇa (see nittharaṇa²). (Page 359)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niddhota: {'def': '【过分】1.洗过，纯净过。2.已削尖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】 1. 洗过，纯净过。 2. 已削尖。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [nis+dhota; pp. of niddhovati] washed, cleansed, purified Dāvs.V,63 (°rūpiya; cp. niddhanta). (Page 359)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niddhovati: {'def': '[Sk. nirdhāvati, nis+dhovati, cp. niddhamati] to wash off, clean, purify A.I,253 (jātarūpaṁ, immediately followed by niddhanta). pp. niddhota. (Page 359)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niddhunana: {'def': '【中】摆脱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】摆脱。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Niddhuniya: {'def': '(?) (nt.) [=Sk. nihnuvana fr. nihnute with diff. derivation] hypocrisy Pug.18 (=makkha); cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 83. (Page 359)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niddhunāti: {'def': '[Sk. nirdhunoti, nis+dhunāti] to shake off S.III,155; A.III,365 (odhunāti+; spelt nidhunāti); M.I,229; Th.1, 416; PvA.256 (=odhunāti). (Page 359)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni + dhu + nā), 摆脱。【过】 ~dhuni。【过分】 niddhūta, 【独】~nitvā。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ni+dhu+nā), 摆脱。【过】niddhuni。【过分】niddhūta,【独】niddhunitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niddhāmase: {'def': 'at J.IV,48 should probably be read niddhāpaye (as v. l. BB), q. v. (Page 359)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niddhāpeti: {'def': '[Sk. nirdhāvayati, nis+dhāveti (dhāpeti), Caus. of dhāvati¹; may also stand for niddhamāpeti, Caus. fr. niddhamati, cp. contamination niddhāmase at J.IV,48, unless misread for niddhāpaye, as v. l. BB bears out] to throw out, chase away, expel J.IV,41 (niddhāpayiṁsu), 48 (? for niddhāmase). pp. niddhāpita. (Page 359)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niddhāpita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of niddhāpeti, q. v.] thrown out J.III,99 (v. l. for nibbāpita). (Page 359)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niddhāraṇa: {'def': '【中】详述。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】详述。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niddhāreti: {'def': '(ni+dhar+e), 敍述【过】niddhāresi。【过分】niddhārita。【独】niddhāretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ni + dhar + e), 叙述。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~rita。【独】 ~retvā。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Niddhūpana: {'def': '(adj.) [nir+dhūpana] unscented J.VI,21 (udaka). (Page 359)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niddisati: {'def': '(ni+dis指出+a) 指出，解释，定义。【过】niddisi。【独】niddisitvā。【义】niddisitabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ni + dis + a) 指出，解释，定义。【过】 niddisi。【独】 niddisitvā。【潜】 ~sitabba。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Niddiṭṭha: {'def': '(pp.) [see niddisati] expressed, explained, designated Miln.3; DhsA.57; Vism.528; VvA.13. Niddisati (& niddissati) [Sk. nir-diśati, nis+disati, cp. Lat. distinguo] to distinguish, point out, explain, designate, define, express, to mean It.122=Nd² 276^f; Miln.123, 345; DhsA.57; DhA.II,59; PvA.87, 217 (°itvā); aor. niddisi DhsA.57; SnA 61. -- grd. niddisitabba DhsA.56; Nett 96. Pass. niddissīyati PvA.163. -- pp. niddiṭṭha (q. v.). (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(niddisati的【过分】)已指出，已解释，已定义。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niddosa: {'def': '【形】完美的，无污的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】完美的，无污的。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [Sk. nirdveṣa, nis+dosa²] free from hatred J.IV,10 (su°; Com. “adussanavasena,” foll. upon sunikkodha). (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [Sk. nirdośa, nis+dosa¹] faultless, pure, undefiled Sn.476; DhsA.2; PvA.189 (=viraja); DhA.I,41. (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niddukkha: {'def': '【形】无痛苦的，无悲惨的。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [nis+dukkha] without fault or evil J.III,443 (in explⁿ of anīgha); PvA.230 (id.); (in explⁿ of mārisa) K.S. (S.A.) 1, 2, n. 1. (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】无痛苦的，无悲惨的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niddā: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic nidrā, ni+drā in Sk. drāti, drāyate, Idg. *dorē; cp. Gr. (hom.) e)/draqon, Lat. dormio] sleep A.II,48, 50; III,251; Sn.926 (opp. jāgariyā), 942 (see explⁿ at Nd¹ 423); J.I,61, 192; II,128. -- niddaṁ okkamati to fall asleep Vin.I,15 (niddā?); J.III,538; IV,1; DhA.I,9; VvA.65; PvA.47; °ṁ upagacchati id. PvA.43, 105, 128.

--ārāma fond of sleep, slothful, sluggish It.72 (+kammarāma, bhassarata); --ārāmatā fondness of sleep, laziness, sluggishness A.III,116, 293 sq., 309 sq.; IV,25 (+kamm°, bhass°); V,164; --sīlin of drowsy habits, slothful, sleepy Sn.96. (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】睡觉。 ~yana, 【中】睡觉。 ~lu, ~sīlī, 【形】喜欢睡眠的，昏昏欲睡的习惯。 ~rāmatā, 【阴】睡眠的喜爱。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Vedic nidrā, ni+drā in Sk. drāti, drāyate),【阴】睡觉(sleep)。niddāyana,【中】睡觉。niddālu, niddāsīlin,【形】喜欢睡眠的，昏昏欲睡的习惯。niddārāma,【阳】睡眠的喜爱。niddārāmatā,【阴】睡眠的喜爱。niddaṁ okkamati, 进入睡眠(to fall asleep)。opp. jāgariyā, 醒寤。Pañcime, Upāli, ānisaṁsā upaṭṭhitassatissa sampajānassa niddaṁ okkamato. Katame pañca? Sukhaṁ supati, sukhaṁ paṭibujjhati, na pāpakaṁ supinaṁ passati, devatā rakkhanti, asuci na muccati.(优婆离！近住正念正知的入睡有五种功德。哪五种？睡得快乐，醒来快乐，不见恶梦，诸天守护，不释放不净(遗精))(Vin.Pari.V,205.；CS:p.357)《杂阿含241 经》：「多闻圣弟子作如是学：睡眠者，是愚痴活，痴命，无果、无利、无福。我当不眠，亦不起觉想，起想者生於缠缚、诤讼，令多人非义饶益，不得安乐。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niddāna: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. *nirdāna, nis+dāna of dayati², Sk. dāti, cp. dātta] cutting off, mowing, destroying Sn.78 (=chedana lunana uppāṭana SnA 148)=S.I,172; K.S. I.319, cp. niḍḍāyati. (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. *nirdāna, nis+dāna of dayati2, Sk. dāti, cp. dātta,【中】砍掉，割草，破坏(cutting off, mowing, destroying Sn.78 (=chedana lunana uppāṭana SnA 148)=S.I,172; K.S. I.319, cp. niḍḍāyati.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niddāyati: {'def': '(niddā 的【派】), 睡。【过】 ~yi。【现分】 niddāyanta。【独】~yitvā。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[denom. fr. niddā] to sleep D.I,231; J.I,192, 266; II,103; V,68, 382; DhA.III,175; SnA 169. (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(niddā 的【派】), 睡(to sleep)。【过】niddāyi。【现分】niddāyanta。【独】niddāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niddāyitar: {'def': '(n. ag. fr. niddāyati), 睡眠者(a sleepy person Dh.325.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[n. ag. fr. niddāyati] a sleepy person Dh.325. (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nidheti: {'def': '(ni + dah + e), 存放，藏，保留。【过】 nidhesi, 参考 nidahati。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see nidahati. (Page 359)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni+dah放置+e), 存放，藏，保留。【过】nidhesi, 参考 nidahati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nidhi: {'def': '【阳】宝藏。nidhikumbhi,【阴】宝壶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic nidhi, ni+dhā, see nidahati] 1. “setting down,” receptacle; (hidden) treasure Sn.285 (brahma n.); Dh.76; Kh VIII,2 (see KhA 217 sq.: nidhīyatī ti nidhi, def. of n.), 9 (acorâharaṇo nidhi cp. “treasures in heaven, where thieves do not steal” Matt. 6, 20); Sdhp.528, 588. -- 2. “putting on,” a cloak J.VI,79 (expl^d as vākacīra-nivāsanaṁ=a bark dress). Cp. sannidhi.

--kumbhī a treasure-pot, a treasure hidden in a pot =a hidden treasure DhA.II,107; IV,208; --nidhāna laying up treasures, burying a treasure J.IV,280; --mukha an excellent treasure A.V,346. (Page 359)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】宝藏。 ~kumbhi, 【阴】宝壶。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nidhura: {'def': 'see nīdhura. (Page 359)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nidhāna: {'def': '【中】存放物，宝藏。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic nidhāna, see nidahati] laying down, depositing, keeping; receptacle; accumulation, (hidden) treasure J.IV,280 (nidhi°); PvA.7 (udaka-dāna-nīharaṇa-n°), 97 (n-gata dhana=hoarded, accumulated), 132 (°ṁ nidhessāmi gather a treasure); DhsA.405 (°kkhama). (Page 359)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】存放物，宝藏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nidhānavant: {'def': '(adj.) forming or having a receptacle, worth treasuring or saving D.I,4 (=hadaye nidhātabba-yuttavāca DA.I,76). Nidhāpeti, Nidhāya & Nidhīyati, see nidahati. (Page 359)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nidhāpeti: {'def': '(nidahati 的【使】), 使存放。【过】nidhāpesi。【过分】nidhāpita。nidhāpeyya﹐【未被】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nidahati 的【使】), 使存放。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 nidhāpita。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nidhāya: {'def': '(nidahati 的【独】) 存放了，保留了。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nidahati 的【独】) 存放了，保留了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nidhīyati: {'def': '(Nidheti的【被】) 存放，藏，保留。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nidāgha: {'def': '[Sk. nidāgha, fr. nidahati, ni+dahati², see ḍahati] heat, summer-heat, summer, drought J.I,221 (-samaya dry season); II,80; Vism.259 (°samaya, where KhA 58 reads sarada-samaya); PvA.174 (-kāla summer). fig. J.IV,285; V,404; Dāvs II.60. (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】干旱，热，夏天。(p173)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】乾旱，热，夏天。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nidāhaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. nidahati] one who puts away, one who has the office of keeper or warder (of robes: cīvara°) Vin.I,284. (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nidāna: {'def': '【中】来源，因素，起因。 ~kathā, 【阴】（一本书的）说明。(p173)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】来源，因素，起因。nidānakathā,【阴】(一本书的)说明，序文。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. nidāna, ni+*dāna of dā, dyati to bind, cp. Gr. dέsma, dhμa (fetter) & see dāma] (a) (n.) tying down to; ground (lit. or fig.), foundation, occasion; source, origin, cause; reason, reference, subject (“sujet”) M.I,261; A.I,134 sq.; 263 sq., 338; II,196; IV,128 sq.; Dhs.1059 (dukkha°, source of pain), 1136; Nett 3, 32; Miln.272 (of disease: pathology, ætiology), 344 (°paṭhanakusala, of lawyers); PvA.132, 253. ‹-› (b) (adj.-°) founded on, caused by, originating in, relating to S.V,213 sq. (a° & sa°); A.I,82 (id.); Sn.271 (ito°), 866 (kuto°), 1050 (upadhi°=hetuka, paccayā, kāraṇā Nd² 346); 872 (icchā°) etc.; VvA.117 (vimānāni Rājagaha° playing at or referring to R.). -- (c) nidānaṁ (Acc. as adv.) by means of, in consequence of, through, usually with tato° through this, yato° through which D.I,52, 73; M.I,112; Pv IV.1⁶¹ (through whom=yaṁ nimittaṁ PvA.242); PvA.281; ito° by this Nd² 291². (Page 358)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nidāna-kathā: {'def': 'f. 因緣物語(故事) [パーリ(Pali, 巴利語)本生物語的序論, 佛傳].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'f. 因縁物語 [パーリ本生物語の序論, 仏伝].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Nidāna-vagga: {'def': 'm. 因縁品, 因縁篇.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'm. 因緣品, 因緣篇.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Nidānaŋ: {'def': '【副】 (在【合】中) 经由，的结果，因为…的缘故，由于。(p174)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nidānaṁ: {'def': '【副】(在【合】中) 经由，的结果，因为…的缘故，由於。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niga: {'def': 'in gavaya-gokaṇṇa-nig-âdīnaṁ DhsA.331 is misprint for miga. (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nigacchati: {'def': '[Sk. nigacchati, ni+gacchati] to go down to, to “undergo,” incur, enter, come to; to suffer esp. with dukkhaṁ & similar expressions of affliction or punishment S.IV,70 (dukkhaṁ); M.I,337 sq. (id.); A.I,251 (bandhanaṁ); Dh.69 (dukkhaṁ=vindati, paṭilabhati DhA.II,50), 137; Nd² 199⁴ (maraṇaṁ+maraṇamattam pi dukkhaṁ) Pv IV.7⁷ (pret. nigacchiṭṭha=pāpuṇi PvA.266). (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni + gam + a), 遭受，达到。【过】 ~chi。(p171)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ni+gam去+a), 遭受，达到。【过】nigacchi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nigama: {'def': '【阳】市镇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. nigama, fr. nigacchati=a meeting-place or market, cp. E. moot-hall=market hall] a small town, market town (opp. janapada); often comb^d with gāma (see gāma 2) Vin.I,110 (°sīma), 188 (°kathā), 197 (Setakaṇṇika°); D.I,7 (°kathā), 101 (°sāmanta), 193, 237; M.I,429, 488; Pv.II,13¹⁸; J.VI,330; PvA.111 (Asitañjana°, v. l. BB nagara). Cp. negama. (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】市镇。(p171)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nigamana: {'def': '【中】结论，说明。(p171)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】结论，说明，跋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. nigamana] quotation, explanation, illustration Vism.427 (°vacana quotation); PvA.255 (perhaps we should read niyamana); conclusion, e. g. Paṭṭh.A 366; VbhA.523. (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nigati: {'def': '(f.) [ni+gati, q. v.] destiny, condition, behaviour J.VI,238. See also niyati & cp. niggatika. (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nigaḷa: {'def': '[Sk. nigaḍa, ni+gaḷa, cp. gala³] an (iron) chain for the feet J.I,394; II,153; VI,64 (here as “bracelet”). (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】锁象脚的链。(p171)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】锁象脚的链。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nigaṇṭha: {'def': '【阳】尼乾陀（耆那教的一个成员）。(p171)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[BSk. nirgrantha (Divy 143, 262 etc.) “freed from all ties,” nis+gaṇṭhi. This is the customary (correct?) etym. Prk. niggantha, cp. Weber, Bhagavatī p. 165] a member of the Jain order (see M.I,370--375, 380 & cp. jaṭila) Vin.I,233 (Nātaputta, the head of that Order, cp. D.I,57; also Sīho senāpati n-sāvako); S.I,78, 82 (°bhikkhā); A.I,205 sq. (°uposatha), cp. 220; II,196 (°sāvaka); III,276, 383; V,150 (dasahi asaddhammehi samannāgata); Sn.381; Ud.65 (jaṭilā, n., acelā, ekasātā, paribbājakā); J.II,262 (object to eating flesh); DA.I,162; DhA.I,440; III,489; VvA.29 (n. nāma samaṇajāti). -- f. nigaṇṭhī D.I,54 (nigaṇṭhi-gabbha). (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '[BSk. nirgrantha] 尼乾陀, 離繋, ジャイナ(Jaina, 耆那)教. f. Nigaṇṭhī. -ūposatha 尼乾布薩. -parisā 尼乾陀集團. cf. Nātaputta.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '[BSk. nirgrantha] 尼乾陀, 離繋, ジャイナ教. f. Nigaṇṭhī. -ūposatha 尼乾布薩. -parisā 尼乾陀集団. cf. Nātaputta.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '(梵nirgrantha),【阳】尼乾陀、尼乾子(耆那教的称呼)。Nigaṇṭho Nāṭaputto﹐尼乾陀若提子(耆那教教主，又称为‘大雄’Mahvīra)。《中阿含19经》敍说佛指示尼乾外道以苦行灭前世之业非解脱之正道，有三点理由：(一)尼乾不知前世为有我为无我，不知前世有作恶或未作恶，现世苦尽或未尽。(二)尼乾依苦行即於现世作苦而已。因为业不可因勤、因苦行转作乐报。(三)尼乾等亦知以苦行转苦报业为乐报业，乃至转熟报业为不熟报业，是不可能的。又说尼乾有五可憎恶，如来得五称誉。中部(cf. M.101.Devadahasuttaṁ天臂经)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niggacchati: {'def': '(ni + gam + a), 出去，从…传出。【过】 ~chi。【过分】 niggata。【无】 niggantvā。(p171)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. nirgacchati, nis+gacchati] to go out or away, disappear; to proceed from, only in pp. niggata (q. v.); at J.VI,504 as ni°. (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni+gam去+a), 出去，从…传出。【过】niggacchi。【过分】niggata。【独】niggantvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niggaha: {'def': '【阳】责难，过失，责备。(p171)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】责难，过失，责备。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. nigraha, ni+gaha²; see niggaṇhāti] 1. restraint, control, rebuke, censure, blame Vin.II,196; A.I,98, 174; V,70; J.V,116 (opp. paggaha); VI,371 (id.); Miln.28, 45, 224. -- dun° hard to control (citta) Dh.35 (cp. expl. at DhA.I,295). -- 2. (log.) refutation Kvu 3. (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niggahaṇa: {'def': '(梵nirgahaṇa, nis+gahaṇa)﹐【形】获得物的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. *nirgahaṇa, cp. nirgṛha homeless; nis+gahaṇa] without acquisitions, i. e. poor J.II,367 (v. l. BB. as gloss nirāhāra). (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niggahaṇatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. ni+gṛh, cp. next] restraint Vism.134 (cittassa). Opp. pagg°. (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niggahetabba: {'def': '【义】可以被责备，可以被检查。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【潜】可以被责备，可以被检查。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Niggahīta: {'def': '【中】鼻音的辅音 ŋ。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. nigṛhīta, but cp. Divy 401: nigṛhīta; ni+gahita] restrained, checked, rebuked, reproved S.III,12; A.I,175 (aniggahīto dhammo); J.VI,493. (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】鼻音的辅音 ṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niggama: {'def': '(n.) in logic, deduction, conclusion. Pts. of Controversy p. 1. (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 ~mana, 【中】出去，离开，结果。(p171)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】niggamana,【中】出去，离开，结果。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niggamana: {'def': '[Sk. *nirgamana, of niggacchati] 1. going away DA.I,94. -- 2. result, fate, consequence, outcome Sdhp.172, 173 (dun°). -- 3. (log.) conclusion Kvu 4. (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niggata: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. nirgata, see niggacchati] 1. going out, proceeding from (Abl.): dahato niggatā nadī (a river issuing from a lake) PvA.152. -- 2. (=nigata? or= nis+gata “of ill fate”) destined, fateful; miserable, unfortunate PvA.223 (°kamma=punishment in explⁿ of niyassa kamma, v. l. SS. nigaha for niggata; see also niya & niyata); Sdhp.165 (of niraya=miserable), cp. niggatika & niggamana. (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niggatika: {'def': '[Sk. *nirgatika, nis+gati-ka] having a bad “gati” or fate, ill-fated, bad, unfortunate, miserable J.III,538 (v. l. BB as gloss, nikkāruṇika); IV,48 (v. l. BB nikatika). (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niggayh: {'def': 'a-vādin (adj.) [see niggaṇhāti] one who speaks rebukingly, censuring, reproving, resenting Dh.76 (see explⁿ in detail at DhA.II,107 & cp. M.III,118). (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niggayha-vādī: {'def': '【阳】责难地说的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】责难地说的人。(p171)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Niggayhati: {'def': '[Sk. nigṛhyate, ni+gayhati, Pass. of niggaṇhāti] to be seized by (?), to be blamed for DhA.I,295 (cittaṁ dukkhena n., in explⁿ of dunniggaha). (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niggaṇhaṇa: {'def': '【中】责备，处罚。(p171)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】责备，处罚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niggaṇhāti: {'def': '(ni + gah + ṇhā) 斥责，指责，制止。【过】 ~ṇhi。【过分】 niggahita。【现分】 ~ṇhanta。【无】 niggayha, ~ṇhitvā。(p171)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ni+gah拿+ṇhā) 斥责，指责，制止，蹈。【过】niggaṇhi。【过分】niggahita。【现分】niggaṇhanta。【独】niggayha, niggaṇhitvā, niggahetvā。vāmena pādena niggahetvā dakkhiṇena pādena vittharetvā﹐左足蹈之，右足展之。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. nigṛhṇāti, ni+gaṇhāti] 1. to hold back, restrain Dh.326; J.IV,97; Miln.184; Vism.133. -- Opp. paggaṇhāti. -- 2. to rebuke, censure (c. Instr.) A.III,187; J.III,222; Miln.9 (musāvādena); DhA.I,29. ‹-› ger. niggayha, pp. niggahīta (q. v.). Cp. abhi°. (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niggaṇṭhi: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. nirgranthi, nis+gaṇṭhi, cp. also nigaṇṭha] free from knots (said of a sword) Miln.105. See also nighaṇḍu. (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nigghosa: {'def': '【阳】大喊大叫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. nirghoṣa, nis+ghosa] 1. “shouting out,” sound; fame, renown; speech, utterance, proclamation; word of reproach, blame S.I,190; A.IV,88 (appa° noiseless, lit. of little or no noise); Sn.719, 818 (=nindāvacana SnA 537), 1061; J.I,64; VI,83; Vv 5⁵; Nd¹ 150; Nd² 344; Dhs.621; VvA.140 (madhura°); 334 (in quotation appa-sadda, appa°); Sdhp.245. -- 2. (adj.) noiseless, quiet, still Sn.959 (=appasadda appanigghosa Nd¹ 467). (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】大喊大叫。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nigghātana: {'def': '【中】杀害，破坏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. nirghātana, nis+ghātana, but cp. nighāta] destruction, killing, rooting out Sn.1085 (taṇhā°; SnA 576=vināsana); Nd² 343 (v. l. nighātana). (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】杀害，破坏。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Niggilati: {'def': '(niggalati) [Sk. nigirati, ni+gilati] to swallow down (opp. uggilati to spit out, throw up) J.IV,392 (sic as v. l.; text niggalati). (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Niggumba: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. *nirgulma, nis+gumba] free from bushes, clear J.I,187; Miln.3. (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】无矮树丛的，清楚的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】无矮树丛的，清楚的。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nigguṇa: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. nirguṇa, nis+guṇa] devoid of good qualities, bad Miln.180. (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nigguṇḍi: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. nirguṇḍī, of obscure etym.] a shrub (Vitex Negundo) Miln.223 (°phala); Vism.257 (°puppha). (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nigguṇḍī: {'def': '【阴】梣叶槭牡荆 (Vitex Negundo)(药草)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】梣叶槭牡荆 (Vitex Negundo)（药草）。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Niggāhaka: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [ni+gāhaka, see niggaṇhāti] one who rebukes, oppresses, oppressor Sn.118 (=bādhaka SnA 178, with v. l. ghātaka); J.IV,362 (=balisādhaka Com.). (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】斥责的人，制止的人。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '﹐【阳】斥责的人，制止的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nigha: {'def': '² (nt.) [prob. ni+gha=Sk. °gha of hanati (see also P. °gha), to kill; unless abstracted from anigha as in prec. nigha¹] killing, destruction Th.2, 491 (=maraṇasampāpana ThA.288). (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nīgha) (adj.-n.) is invented by Com. & scholiasts to explain the combⁿ anigha (anīgha sporadic, e. g. S.V,57). But this should be divided an-īgha instead of a-nīgha. -- (m.) rage, trembling, confusion, only in formula rāgo n. doso n. moho n. explaining the adj. anīgha. Thus at S.IV,292=Nd² 45; S.V,57. -- (adj.) anigha not trembling, undisturbed, calm [see etym. under īgha=Sk. ṛgh of ṛghāyati to tremble, rage, rave] S.I,54; IV,291; J.V,343. Otherwise always comb^d with nirāsa: S.I,12=23, 141; Sn.1048, 1060, 1078. Expl^d correctly at SnA 590 by rāgādi-īgha-virahita. Spelling anīgha J.III,443 (Com. niddukkha); Pv IV.1³⁴ (+nirāsa; expl^d by niddukkha PvA.230). anīgha also at It.97 (+chinnasaṁsaya); Ud.76; Dh.295 (v. l. aniggha; expl^d by niddukkha DhA.III,454). (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nighaŋsa: {'def': '【阳】 ~sana, 【中】摩擦，擦伤。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nighaŋsati: {'def': '(ni + ghaŋs + a), 擦，摩擦，抹掉。【过】~si。【过分】 ~sita。【无】 ~sitvā。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nighaṁsa: {'def': '[Sk. nigharṣa] rubbing, chafing DhsA.263, 308. (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】nighaṁsana,【中】摩擦，擦伤。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nighaṁsana: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. nigharṣana]=nighaṁsa Miln.215. (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nighaṁsati: {'def': '[Sk. nigharṣati, ni+ghaṁsati¹] 1. to rub, rub against, graze, chafe Vin.II,133; Vism.120; DhA.I,396. -- 2. to polish up, clean J.II,418; III,75. (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni+ghaṁs+a), 擦，摩擦，抹掉。【过】nighaṁsi。【过分】nighaṁsita。【独】nighaṁsitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nighaṇḍu: {'def': '同义词字典。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. nighaṇṭu, dial. for nirgrantha from grathnāti (see gaṇṭhi & ghaṭṭana), orig. disentanglement, unravelling, i. e. explanation; cp. niggaṇṭhi, which is a variant of the same word. -- BSk. nighaṇṭa (Divy 619; AvŚ II.19), Prk. nighaṇṭu] an explained word or a word explⁿ, vocabulary, gloss, usually in ster. formula marking the accomplishments of a learned Brahmin “sanighaṇḍu-keṭubhānaṁ . . . padako” (see detail under keṭubha) D.I,88; A.I,163, 166; III,223; Sn.p. 105; Miln.10. Bdhgh’s explⁿ is quoted by Trenckner, Notes p. 65. (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '同义词字典。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nighāta: {'def': '【阳】击倒，杀死，破坏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. nighāta, ni+ghāta] striking down, suppressing, destroying, killing M.I,430; Nett 189. Cp. nighāti. (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】击倒，杀死，破坏。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nighāti: {'def': '[ni+ghāti] “slaying or being slain,” defeat, loss (opp. ugghāti) Sn.828. Cp. nighāta. (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nigrodha: {'def': '[Sk. nyagrodha; Non-Aryan?] the banyan or Indian fig-tree, Ficus Indica, usually as cpd. °rukkha Vin.IV,35; D.II,4; Sn.272; J.III,188 (r.) DhA.II,14 (r.); PvA.5 (r.) 112, 244; Sdhp.270; --pakka the fruit of the fig-tree Vism.409. --parimaṇḍala the round or circumference of the banyan D.II,18; III,144, 162. (Page 355)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】孟加拉榕(一种热带的印度无花果树〔榕属 Ficus benghalensis〕因其枝上生有气根，垂入土中并长成另外的树干，所以覆盖面积很大。因装饰性和树荫而被种植)。nigrodhapakka,【中】孟加拉榕的成熟果实。nigrodhaparimaṇḍala,【形】有如孟加拉榕的圆周一般相称的四肢。ajapāla-nigrodha, 阿闍惒罗尼拘类(榕树之一种)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】孟加拉榕（一种热带的印度无花果树〔榕属 Ficus benghalensis〕因其枝上生有气根，垂入土中并长成另外的树干，所以覆盖面积很大。因装饰性和树荫而被种植）。 ~pakka, 【中】孟加拉榕的成熟果实。~parimaṇḍala, 【形】有如孟加拉榕的圆周一般相称的四肢。(p172)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nigāḷhika: {'def': '(better v. l. nigāḷhita) [Sk. nigāḍhita; ni+ gāḍhita, see gāḷha²] sunk down into, immersed in Th.1, 568 (gūthakūpe). (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nigūhana: {'def': '【中】隐匿，内敛。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. nigūhana, see nigūhati] covering, concealing, hiding VvA.71. (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】隐匿。(p171)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Nigūhati: {'def': '[Sk. nigūhati, ni+gūhati] to cover up, conceal, hide J.I,286; III,392; IV,203; Pv.III,4³ (≈parigūhāmi, v. l. SS guyhāmi). pp. nigūḷha (q. v.). (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ni + gūh + a), 掩盖，隐藏，藏。【过】 nigūhi。【过分】 ~hita, nigūha,【无】 nigūhitvā。(p171)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ni+gūh+a), 掩盖(台语︰am kham3)，隐藏，藏。【过】nigūhi。【过分】nigūhita, nigūha,【独】nigūhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Nigūḷha: {'def': '[Sk. nigūḍha, but BSk. nirgūḍha (Divy 256); ni+gūḷha] hidden (down), concealed; (n.) a secret J.I,461; Dāvs III,39. (Page 354)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nihanati: {'def': '(ni + han + a), 杀，击败，使丢脸，破坏。【过】 nihani。【独】nihantvā。(p182)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ni+han+a), 杀，击败，使丢脸，破坏。【过】nihani。【独】nihantvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Niharati: {'def': 'see nīharati. (Page 375)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nihata: {'def': '(Nihanati的【过分】)已杀，已击败，已破坏，已判定。nihatamāna,【形】无自傲的，有礼貌的。nihatatā, 已破坏的状态。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of nihanti, ni+han] “slain”; put down, settled; destroyed; dejected, humiliated; humble Vin.II,307 (settled); J.V,435 (°bhoga one whose fortunes are destroyed).

--māna “with slain pride,” humiliated, humble S.IV,203; Th.2, 413 (=apanīta-māna ThA.267); J.II,300; VI,367. (Page 375)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Nihita: {'def': '(nidahati 的【过分】)。1.已存放。2.已安排。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. nihita, pp. of ni+dhā, see dahati] put down, put into, applied, settled; laid down, given up, renounced. As °- often in the sense of a prep.= without, e. g. °daṇḍa °sattha without stick & sword (see daṇḍa . . .) D.I,70 (°paccāmitta); Pv IV.3²⁶ (su° well applied); PvA.252 (bhasma-nihita thrown into the ashes); Sdhp.311. (Page 375)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(nidahati 的【过分】), 已保持，已放进，已整理。(p182)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nidahati 的【过分】)。 1. 存放。 2. 安排。(p183)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nidahati 的【过分】), 已保持，已放进，已整理。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

【經文資訊】
【原始資料】原始资料皆来自网络
【其他事項】本資料庫可自由免費流通，詳細內容請參閱【中華電子佛典協會資料庫版權宣告】